Basics of APL 2

2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1 General information

2.1.1.1 User-configured message classes

User-configured message classes

The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance, the corresponding abbreviations in symbols
and colors, and the terms used in this documentation are not valid for user-configured message
classes.
These terms and colors depend on the project-specific setting. The user-configured messages
classes are only supported for block symbols as of V9.

2.1.1.2 Forcing operating modes

Forcing operating modes

The "forcing of operating modes" function lets you set the function block into a different
operating mode using interconnectable input parameters, regardless of the currently active
control. This can, for example, be:
• Forces tracking for closed-loop controllers and control valves
• Enabling and disabling at motors
• Opening and closing of valves
It is only possible to force operating modes with "Large" blocks in the following operating modes:
• Manual mode
• Automatic mode
• Local mode "1" and "3" (only if Feature2.Bit8 = 1)
Forcing operating modes has the highest priority over all three operating modes.

Forcing operating modes at closed-loop controllers

In control engineering, this procedure is also known as forced tracking of values. Refer to
the Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable (Page 226) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 47
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Forcing operating modes at motors and valves

The input parameter xxxxForce = 1 (for example OpenForce and CloseForce at a valve)
is used for forced controlling of the function block and thus an intervention in the function of the
block, irrespective of currently active controls, interlock conditions and monitoring errors. If the
input parameters are inconsistent (for example OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1 at
valves), an error number (Page 130) is output at the parameter ErrorNum and the control
remains unchanged.

Note
If you have set the parameters for the advance warning time WarnTiMan and the idle
time IdleTime to values higher than 0, the control will only take effect once the set times have
elapsed.

Note
With block VlvAnl, the warning time is ignored in tracking MV_TrkOn = 1 and in forced
tracking MV_ForOn.

The Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 158) Feature bit has no
effect when forcing the operating modes of the MotRevL and MotSpdCL blocks. Direct
switchover between forward and reverse is always possible.

Display in the faceplate and in the block icon

If an operating mode is forced, this is displayed in the block icon and in the standard view of the
faceplate:
Block icon: In the block icon, the display for motors, valves and dosers involves the use of a red
F and a crossed-out padlock.
There is no display for closed-loop controllers.
Faceplate: An information text on the forced operating mode is displayed in the standard view
of the faceplate, for example, "Forced stop" for motors. This is also indicated by a crossed-out
padlock:

Messaging
No messages are assigned to the forcing of operating modes. However, if you want to have
corresponding messages, you can use the freely interconnectable input parameters to generate
the messages. Refer also to the Generating instance-specific messages (Page 234) section for
more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

48 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.3 Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors

Resetting the block

The block must be reset when an interlock has been set via the Protect input ("Protection"),
Trip ("Protection") or an error has occurred ("Runtime" or "Control", external error FaultExt
or CSF with Feature.Bit18).

Note
"Small" blocks do not feature protection (Protect).

The RdyToReset output signals when a reset can be carried out via the RstLi input parameter
or the automatic commands.
There are different ways to reset the block:
• Reset by interconnection (input RstLi).
• Reset by the operator using a button in the faceplate (input RstOp).
• Reset with a 0-1 edge transition in the corresponding automatic or local signal (except with
motor protection). Refer to the following sections for more information.

Note
The reset via input RstLi or RstOp does not depend on the selected operating mode.

The operator must have the appropriate authorization to use the reset function in the faceplate
(OS_Perm). After a reset, the output parameter P_Rst is set for a cycle.

Note
Note for VlvMotL and VlvPosL
After resetting the block, in the case of interlocks or errors, the valve position will always be
tracked, depending on FbkOpen and FbkClose.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 49
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting monitoring errors and interlocks in manual and automatic mode

You can influence the reaction using the following Feature Bits:
• Feature.Bit9: Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors
(Page 176)
• Feature.Bit30: Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter
(Page 176)
• Feature.Bit31: Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 178)
Note
With MonSafePos = 0, a reset is not required, the valve and motor can be driven despite
feedback failure.

Resetting monitoring errors, external errors and interlocks in local mode

The monitoring error can occur in local mode if you have set 1, 3 or 5 for the input
parameter LocalSetting (see Local mode (Page 88)). When LocalSetting is set to 2 or
4, a monitoring error can only occur when a rapid stop is triggered.
The following applies with LocalSetting 1 or 3:
The monitoring error, the external error and the interlocks cannot be reset when the control and
feedback signals do not match.
With Feature2.Bit13 = 0: the following applies:
• When the control and feedback signals match, the monitoring error, external error and the
interlocks are reset by stopping (StopLocal = 1) the drive.
• With Vlv2WayL in the MonSafePos = 1 setting, a monitoring error is reset
by Pos0Local = 1.
• With VlvL, VlvMotL in the MonSafePos = 1 setting, a monitoring error is reset with the
local command, which moves the valve to the neutral position.
• With Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL and VlvL in the MonSafePos = 0 setting, no reset of the
monitoring error is required. The currently pending control is in effect.
• With Vlv2WayL, VlvL and VlvMotL, an external error is reset with the local command,
which moves the valve to the neutral position
• With DoseL, you must acknowledge the protection (Protect) and flow alarms with a
positive edge at the "CancelLocal" or "PauseLocal" output parameter.
• With MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL or MotSpdL in the MonSafePos =1 setting, an external or
monitoring error or an interlock protection is reset with the local stop command.
With Feature2.Bit13 = 1: The reset can be done from the reset button in the standard view
of the faceplate.
The following applies with LocalSetting 2, 4 or 5:
No reset required.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

50 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting motor protection (Trip) in local mode

There are two ways for resetting the Motor protection In Local mode 1 & 3. Once the trip is
healthy and feedback is withdrawn then:
• If Feature2.Bit13 = 0 the reset of pending errors will not be possible via faceplate.
• If Feature2.Bit13 = 1 then reset button will be enabled in the standard view of the
faceplate and operator can reset using this button.

Resetting monitoring errors, external errors and interlocks using the "Forcing operating states"
function
With "Forcing operating states", monitoring errors, external errors, interlocks or the motor
protection function are reset under the following conditions and a reset pulse is output at
the P_Rst output:
• The block is in an operating mode in which a reset is necessary and
• a monitoring error, an external error, a "Protection" interlock or the motor protection function
is ready to be reset. This can be seen in the faceplate with the reset button or with the Request
0/1 indicator in the faceplate. When Feature.Bit19 = 1, the block is ready to reset as soon
as the protection (Protect = 0) or motor protection (Trip = 0) interlock is set,
whereby enabled motor protection prevents the motor from starting.
See also the following chapter: Forcing operating modes (Page 47).

Tabular overview for resetting for interlocks and errors

Permit Interlock Protect PermitSafePos

Meaning Activation enable ("Per‐ Interlock without reset Interlock with reset Activation enable
mission") ("Interlock") ("Protection") ("PermitSafePos")
Description The activation enable A pending interlock con‐ A pending interlock con‐ The activation ena‐
(input Permit = 1) dition brings the block dition brings the block ble (input Permit‐
makes it possible to to the neutral position to the neutral position SafePos = 0) pre‐
leave the neutral posi‐ (input Intlock = 0). (input Protect = 0). vents the control in
tion of the block in re‐ neutral position or
sponse to operator input the stop command
or a command from the of the block in re‐
program (CFC/SFC). The sponse to operator
activation enable has no input or a com‐
effect if the block is not mand from the pro‐
in the neutral position. gram (CFC/SFC).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 51
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Permit Interlock Protect PermitSafePos

Mode: Takes effect if block is in
After the interlock con‐ Feature.Bit9 After the interlock
Automatic the neutral position. dition has gone, the cur‐ and Feature.Bit30 = permission condi‐
After the interlock con‐ rently pending control 0: Reset via faceplate tion has gone, the
dition has gone, the cur‐ function becomes active or RstLi = 1 currently pending
rently pending control again. Feature.Bit9 = 1 control function
function becomes active and Feature.Bit30 = becomes active
again. 0: Reset via faceplate again.
or RstLi = 1 or a 0-1
edge transition in the
control
Feature.Bit9 = 0
and Feature.Bit30 =
1: Reset via RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit9
and Feature.Bit30 =
1: Reset via RstLi = 1
or a 0-1 edge transition
in the control = 1 or 0-1
edge transition in the
control

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

52 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Permit Interlock Protect PermitSafePos

Mode: Takes effect if block is in
After the interlock con‐ The following applies -
Local the neutral position. dition has gone, the cur‐ with LocalSetting =
After the interlock con‐ rently pending control 1 or 3:
dition has gone, the cur‐ function becomes active Generally: When the
rently pending control again. control and feedback
function becomes active signals match, reset
again. via StopLocal = 1.
Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL
und VlvL: Reset via local
command, which
moves the valve into the
neutral position.
DoseL: Reset via a posi‐
tive edge at
"CancelLocal" or
"PauseLocal".
The following applies
with LocalSetting =
2,4 or 5:
No reset required
Mode: Takes effect if block is in The faceplate can be op‐ Feature.Bit30 After the interlock
Manual the neutral position. erated again after the in‐ and Feature.Bit31 = permission condi‐
terlock condition has 0: Resetting not necessa‐ tion has gone, the
gone. ry currently pending
It is possible to leave the
Feature.Bit30 = 1 control function
neutral position with an
operation in the face‐ and Feature.Bit31 = becomes active
plate. 0: Resetting not necessa‐ again.
ry
Feature.Bit30 = 0
and Feature.Bit31 =
1: Reset via faceplate
or RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit30
and Feature.Bit31 =
1: Reset via faceplate

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 53
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Trip Error Rapid stop

Meaning Motor protection Monitoring errors and exter‐ Rapid stop
nal errors
Description The motor protection func‐ • Monitoring the startup A rapid stop stops the drive
tion is used to switch off the and stop characteristics immediately.
motor when there is a heat for motors or the runtime
overload (input Trip = 0). of valves
• Monitoring the operation
of motors or the mainte‐
nance of the position of
valves
• External error FaultExt:
Block goes to error state
without a message being
output.
• External control system
fault CSF with
set Feature.Bit18:
block reports an external
control system fault and
goes to error state.
Mode: Feature.Bit9 and Feature.Bit30 = 0: Reset via face‐ Feature.Bit9 = 0: Reset
Automatic plate or RstLi = 1 via faceplate or RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit9 = 1 and Feature.Bit30 = 0: Reset via Feature.Bit9 = 1: Reset
faceplate or RstLi = 1 or a 0-1 edge transition in the control via faceplate or RstLi = 1 or
Feature.Bit9 = 0 and Feature.Bit30 = 1: Reset a 0-1 edge transition in the
via RstLi = 1 control
Feature.Bit9 and Feature.Bit30 = 1: Reset via RstLi
= 1 or a 0-1 edge transition in the control = 1 or 0-1 edge
transition in the control

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

54 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Trip Error Rapid stop

Mode: The following applies The following applies The rapid stop function is un‐
Local with LocalSetting = 1 or 3: with LocalSetting = 1 or 3: locked in the faceplate via the
When the control and feed‐ • When the control and "Reset" button (RstOp = 1).
back signals of the drive In CFC, unlocking is carried
feedback signals of the
match, reset via StopLocal out using the input parame‐
drive match, reset
= 1. ter RstLi = 1
via StopLocal = 1.
The following applies For more information, please
• With Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL, refer Resetting the Pending
with LocalSetting = 2, 4
VlvPosL, VlvL, MotL, Mo‐ Error in Local Mode 1 and 3
or 5:
tRevL, MotSpdCL, (Page 213).
No reset required. MotSpdL.
For more information, please
– Monitoring error
refer Resetting the Pending
with MonSafePos
Error in Local Mode 1 and 3
(Page 213). = 1: Reset via the local
command, which
moves the valve into
the neutral position or
the motor in stop posi‐
tion.
– Monitoring error
with MonSafePos
= 0: No resetting re‐
quired; the currently
pending control func‐
tion is active.
– External error: Reset
via the local com‐
mand, which moves
the valve into the neu‐
tral position.
For more information,
refer Resetting the Pending
Error in Local Mode 1 and 3
(Page 213).
• With DoseL, resetting via a
positive edge at
"CancelLocal" or
"PauseLocal".
The following applies
with LocalSetting = 2, 4
or 5:
No reset required.
Mode: Feature.Bit30 and Feature.Bit31 = 0: Resetting not The rapid stop function is un‐
Manual necessary locked in the faceplate via the
Feature.Bit30 = 1 and Feature.Bit31 = 0: Resetting "Reset" button (RstOp = 1).
not necessary In CFC, unlocking is carried
out using the input parame‐
Feature.Bit30 = 0 and Feature.Bit31 = 1 Reset via
ter RstLi = 1
faceplate or RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit30 and Feature.Bit31 = 1: Reset via face‐
plate

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 55
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.4 Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers

Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers

The neutral position always represents the deenergized state.

Neutral position for motors

The neutral position for motors is always the stopped motor.
The neutral position is adopted when:
• The function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 106) was triggered.
• One of the interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 109)).
• An external error via FaultExt or CSF was triggered (see Error handling (Page 130)).
• The Motor protection function (Page 108) was triggered.
• The function Rapid stop for motors (Page 117) was triggered.
• During start-up (see Set startup characteristics (Page 150)).
• The "Out of service" mode is active.
• One of the automatic commands has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) and the Feature2
bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 202) is set to 1.

Neutral position for valves

There are different forms of the deenergized state for valves:
• Valve is closed in a de-energized state
• Valve is open in a de-energized state
• Valve is stopped in a de-energized state (e.g. motor valve)
The input parameter SafePos is used to set these properties of the valve:
• SafePos = 0: Valve is closed in a de-energized state
• SafePos = 1: Valve is open in a de-energized state
• SafePos = 2: Valve is stopped in a de-energized state (e.g. motor valve)
The neutral position is adopted when:
• The function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 106) was triggered.
• One of the interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 109)).
• An external error via FaultExt or CSF was triggered (see Error handling (Page 130)).
• During start-up (see Set startup characteristics (Page 150)).
• The "Out of service" mode is active.
• One of the automatic commands has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) and the Feature2
bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 202) is set to 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

56 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Neutral position for the VlvAnL and VlvPosL blocks (actuator)

The possible neutral positions are set by the SafePos parameter:
• SafePos = 0: Neutral position of the control valve is "Closed" (MV.Value = MV_LoLim)
• SafePos = 1: Neutral position of the control valve is "Open" (MV.Value = MV_HiLim)
• SafePos = 2: Neutral position of the control valve is "Stop" (MV.Value = RbkOut,
if Rbk.ST <> 16#FF, else MV.Value remains unchanged)
The control valve VlvAnL is brought to the neutral position when the FbkAuxVCloseOut = 1
auxiliary valve is closed.
The neutral position of the control valve VlvAnL and VlvPosL is adopted when:
• The function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 106) was triggered.
• One of the interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 109)).
• An external error via FaultExt or CSF was triggered (see Error handling (Page 130)).
• During start-up (see Set startup characteristics (Page 150)).
• The "Out of service" mode is active.
• One of the automatic commands has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) and the Feature2
bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 202) is set to 1.
In case of startup or “Out of service” mode, the valve VlvAnL has additional Feature bits for
adopting the neutral position:
• During start-up, if the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 150) and the Feature
bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 179) are set.
• In the "Out of service" mode, if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes
effect with "out of service" operating mode (Page 179) is set.

Neutral position for continuous controllers (does not apply to controller modules)
• Only the limits or a special analog value for the manual value are taken into consideration for
the neutral position with continuous controllers.
The input parameter SafePos is used to specify the neutral position:
– SafePos = 0 corresponds to the low limit (ManLoLim or MV_LoLim for PIDConS)
– SafePos = 1 corresponds to the high limit (ManHiLim or MV_HiLim for PIDConS)
• The input parameters SafePos and SafePos2 are used to determine the neutral position:

SafePos SafePos2 Neutral position Remarks

=0 =0 ManLoLim for PIDConL, PIDConR or MV_LoLim Low limit for manipulated variable in
for PIDConS manual mode
=1 =0 ManHiLim for PIDConL, PIDConR or MV_HiLim High limit for manipulated variable in
for PIDConS manual mode
x =1 MV_SafePos Manipulated variable neutral position
x =2 Last manipulated variable (stop) Last manipulated variable (stop)

x: Not relevant

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 57
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The neutral position is adopted:

• The interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 109) only at PIDConL and PIDConR).
In case of startup or "Out of service" mode, the controller has additional Feature bits for
adopting the neutral position:
• During start-up, if the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 150) and the Feature
bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 179) are set.
• In the "Out of service" mode, if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes
effect with "out of service" operating mode (Page 179) is set.

Neutral position for step controllers (does not apply to controller modules)
You can use the input parameter SafePos to determine if the step controller should close, open
or stop the valve when it enters the neutral position:
SafePos = 0: close valve
SafePos = 1: open valve
SafePos = 2: stop valve
When the neutral position (fully opened or fully closed) is reached and a limit stop signal
(FbkOpened or FbkClosed) is set, the valve is stopped (Stop = 1).
The neutral position is adopted:
• during start-up if the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 150) and the Feature
bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 179) are set.
• in the "Out of service" mode if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes
effect with "out of service" operating mode (Page 179) is set.

Safety control for controllers of the FM 355 or FM 355-2 modules

The controller modules have their own mechanism for feedforwarding a safety value (see
Temperature Controller FM 355-2 manual or Controller Module FM 355 manual)

2.1.1.5 Specifying warning times for control functions at motors and valves

Specifying warning times for control functions at motors and valves

This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.
You can generate warning signals when, for example, motors are started or valves are opened.
Warning signals can be generated in the following modes:
• Manual mode (input parameter WarnTiMan)
• Automatic mode (input parameter WarnTiAut)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a motor is started then, this is displayed at the output parameter
with WarnAct = 1. The motor then starts after the configured warning time has expired and
WarnAct is reset (WarnAct = 0).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

58 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Note
In this case, the warning time is only active if the block is controlled from the de-energized state.

Disabling warnings
Configure each parameter with 0 seconds to generate no warnings.

2.1.1.6 Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal

Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal

You can output the control signals for motors, valves and dosers as:
• Static signal or as a
• Pulse signal with configurable pulse length.
You can find the signals in the I/O table of the individual blocks.

Note
The pulse signal is available only for the "large" blocks.

Output signal as a static signal

The control settings are made available as a static signal in the blocks in the form of
interconnectable output parameters. The MotRevL block, for example, provides these as static
signals via the alternative output parameters Fwd, Rev and Run.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 59
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Output signal as a pulse signal

The control is made available as pulse signals at the blocks using interconnectable output
parameters. You specify the pulse length of the output signals in seconds using the input
parameter PulseWidth. The MotRevL block, for example, provides these as pulse signals via
the output parameters P_Fwd, P_Rev and P_Stop.

Fwd

P_Fwd
PulseW idth

Rev

P_Rev
PulseW idth

P_Stop
PulseW idth

Note
Almost all output parameters for pulse control, for example P_Fwd, P_Rev, P_Ctrl, have a
positive effective direction, i.e. a 0→1→0 pulse triggers activation.
The only exception is the P_Stop output parameter with a negative effective direction, i.e. a
1→0→1 pulse triggers activation.

2.1.1.7 Recording the first signal for interlock blocks

Recording the first signal

You activate the function described below using the Feature bit " Activating recording of the
first signal (Page 163)".
The number of the input that caused the last output signal change from 1 to 0 (good state to
locked) is displayed for you in bit coding at the FirstIn output. The cause may be:
• A signal change at the input or a change in inversion
Example: With an OR logic operation, the single 1 changes to 0. The output then changes
from 1 to 0.
• A change to the I/O
Example: Excluding the single 1 then results in an output of 0 with an OR logic operation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

60 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

• A change to the signal status

If the signal status of the input, which forms the output value alone and has the value 1,
changes from 16#80 to 16#00, the output value changes from 1 to 0.
• FirstIn is not changed if the following events occur, despite a change to the output:
– Change in output value from or to DefaultOut
If several signals are at the same time responsible for the change, all responsible inputs are
indicated in the faceplate and output in bit coding in the FirstIn output. If the input signals
change without this causing the signal at the output to change, FirstIn does not change.
Inputs which are not interconnected or which are excluded are not taken into account.
You can reset FirstIn to 0 if you set the RstLi input from 0 to 1 (positive edge) or you can
operate the RstOp input using the faceplate ("Reset" button).
If at least one bit in FirstIn is set, other signal changes are not taken into account.

2.1.1.8 Outputting a signal for start readiness

Outputting a signal for start readiness

The RdyToStart = 1 output parameter is used to indicate start readiness in automatic mode.
Start readiness is output when the following conditions are met:
• No group error pending (group fault with consideration of Feature.Bit18 for CSF
and MonSafePos for feedback errors)
• No interlock is active
• No forced operating mode or manipulated variable is active
• No rapid stop is active (only applies to motors or VlvMotL)
• The block is in automatic mode (not with controller blocks)
• The waiting time for the restart must have expired (only applies to motors or VlvMotL)
The start readiness is shown at the following block groups via the RdyToStart output
parameter:
• Motors
• Valves
• Dosers
• Software controller
• Hardware controller

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 61
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for motors

The start readiness for motor blocks is formed as follows:

)HHGEDFNHUURU
0RQ[[[(UU 
*URXSHUURU

! 

*URXSIDXOWWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQW
([WHUQDOHUURU
*US(UU ZLWK&6) )HDWXUH%LW
&6) 
)HDWXUH%LW $XWR
([WHUQDOHUURU ! 
)DXOW([W

0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
7ULS 

5HDG\WRSRZHUXSLQDXWRPDWLF
:DLWWLPHIRUUHVWDUWH[SLUHG
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\

%ORFNLQDXWR
5G\7R6WDUW
$XW$FW 

)RUFLQJRSHUDWLQJPRGHV
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\

[)RUFH,QSXW$FWLYH 

%ORFNQRWLQWHUORFNHG
/RFN$FW 

5DSLGVWRSQRWDFWLYH
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\
5B6WS$FW 
Figure 2-1 Output signal for start readiness for motors

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

62 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for valves

The start readiness for valve blocks is formed as follows:

*URXSHUURU
)HHGEDFNHUURU
0RQ[[[(UU 
9OY0RW/0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
7ULS  !  *US(UU

([WHUQDOHUURU
&6) 

([WHUQDOHUURU
)DXOW([W

*URXSIDXOWWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQW
0RQ6DIH3RVDQG)HDWXUH%LW

0RQ6DIH3RV 
! 

)HDWXUH%LW $XWR

5HDG\WRSRZHUXSLQDXWRPDWLF
9OY0RW/:DLWWLPHIRUUHVWDUW
H[SLUHG

%ORFNLQDXWR
5G\7R6WDUW
$XW$FW 
)RUFLQJRSHUDWLQJ
PRGHV
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\
[)RUFH,QSXW$FWLYH 

%ORFNQRWLQWHUORFNHG
/RFN$FW 

9OY0RW/5DSLGVWRSQRW
DFWLYH
5B6WS$FW 
Figure 2-2 Output signal for start readiness for valves

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 63
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for dosers

The start readiness for dosers is formed as follows:

([WHUQDOHUURU )DXOW([W ! 
([WHUQDOHUURU &6)  *US(UU

5HDG\WRSRZHUXSLQDXWRPDWLF

)HDWXUH%LW $XWR
%ORFNLQDXWR
5G\7R6WDUW
$XW$FW 

)RUFLQJRSHUDWLQJ
PRGHV
[)RUFH,QSXW$FWLYH 

%ORFNQRWLQWHUORFNHG
/RFN$FW 

'RVLQJVWDWXV
1RWUDFNLQJ
'RV5HOD[ 

1RQH
8QGHUGRVLQJ
'4B$/B$FW 
4XDQWLW\QRWUHDFKHG ! 
'4B2XW'4B63

5HVHWWLQJWKHGRVDJH
TXDQWLW\DWGRVDJHVWDUW
)HDWXUH%LW 

Figure 2-3 Output signal for start readiness for dosers

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

64 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for software controllers

The start readiness for software controllers is formed as follows:

([WHUQDOHUURU *US(UU
&6) 
5HDG\WRRSHUDWH

5G\7R6WDUW

)RUFHGPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOHQRWDFWLYH
09B)RU2Q 

Figure 2-4 Output signal for start readiness for software controllers

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 65
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for hardware controllers

The start readiness for hardware controllers is formed as follows:

0RGXOHHUURU
0RG(UU 
*URXSHUURU

! 

,2DFFHVVHUURU
*US(UU
3HU$FF(UU 

&RQILJXUDWLRQHUURU
3DU)0B(UU 

([WHUQDOHUURU
&6) 

5HDG\WRVWDUWLQDXWRPDWLF

5G\7R6WDUW

)RUFHGPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOHQRWDFWLYH
09B6DIH2Q 
Figure 2-5 Output signal for start readiness for hardware controllers

2.1.1.9 Simulating signals

Simulating signals
Simulation means the manipulation of a signal regardless of the actual source of the signal or
logic that generates this signal.
Simulation is carried out either at the field device (externally from the control system) itself or
at a block (internally in the control system).
In either case, the associated status in the signal is set to the simulation value (see also Forming
and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118)).
During the simulation, every block is considered in isolation. There are two different forms of
simulation here, namely:
• Block-external simulation and
• Block-internal simulation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

66 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Block-external simulation
Block-external simulation is characterized by the fact that:
• The simulation function is not executed in the block itself and
• A signal whose status has the simulation state, for example, a simulation of the signal at
another block or directly in the I/O device, is applied at an input parameter.
The block-external simulation has the following effects on the functionality of the block:
• The technological functions are not influenced
• All the process-relevant output signals do not receive the simulation status. In the case of
technologic blocks, process-related output signals are parameters that actively affect the
process, e.g. "Start" for block MotL.
• In the case of blocks with operator control or monitoring functions (for example faceplates),
these signals are identified in the faceplate with the status for the simulation as follows:

• Blocks with one or more input parameters for signals with "Generate status from individual
status" receive a group status in accordance with the priority table. This group status is
displayed in the status bar of the block icon and of the faceplate with the simulation status
as follows:

• The interlocking functions of the block are not influenced.

Note
For the output channel blocks, you need to specify the exact block response with external
simulation using the Feature bit Outputting a de-energized value for block-external
simulation (Page 161).

Block-internal simulation
Block-internal simulation is characterized by the "simulation" function being run in the block
itself.
With operator control and monitoring blocks, all process values that cannot be controlled (e.g.
PV, AV, In) can be simulated. This is used primarily as an aid for commissioning and servicing
of the system. For example, the control settings of a motor can be simulated and the feedback
values corrected without the monitoring functions being active.
For specific technological blocks (e.g. large blocks) that can be operated and monitored,
simulation can take place via the faceplate as well as interconnectable inputs:
- SimLiOp = 0: The simulation is activated/deactivated via faceplate (parameter view) at the
input SimOn.
- SimLiOp = 1: The simulation is activated/deactivated via the input SimOnLi. The
interconnectable simulation values (e.g. SimPV_Li, SimAV_Li, SimInLi) will become
effective in the process. In this case, the inputs SimOn, SimPV, SimAV, SimIn, SimRbk are
written back with SimOnLi, SimPV_Li, SimAV_Li, SimInLi, SimRbkLi.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 67
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The Feature bit Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 166) can be used to delay
tracking of the feedback signals for motors and valves (for example, Fbkxxx).
Simulation can also be carried out for blocks (such as channel blocks) that cannot be controlled
and monitored by the operator.
The control is simulated in the CFC by setting parameters directly in the block with the input
parameters SimOn = 1 and Simxxxx = for the desired simulation value (e.g. SimPV , SimAV
or SimIn).

Note
With channel blocks, ensure that the Mode parameter is set correctly during simulation.

Note
If the block is not in simulation, the simulation values (SimPV, SimAV, SimIn, SimRbk) are
updated to the process values (PV, AV, In, Rbk).

Simulation is triggered during runtime in the faceplate's parameter view by clicking on the
"Simulation" button.
This simulation is characterized by the fact that:
• The simulation can only be enabled / disabled with the operator authorization level for
system authorization.
• The technological functions are not influenced.
• All the process-related output signals receive the "simulation" status. In the case of
technologic blocks, process-related output signals are parameters that actively affect the
process, e.g. "Start" for block MotL.
• In the case of blocks with operator control or monitoring functions (for example faceplates),
these signals are identified in the faceplate with the status for the simulation as follows:

• The group status of the block is displayed in the status bar of the block icon and of the
faceplate with the simulation status as follows:

• All the process values displayed in the faceplate that cannot be operated-controlled in normal
operation (e.g. PV).
• When the block control can be manipulated, the readback and feedback values (for
example Rbk, FbkSpd1) are adjusted according to the manipulation of the control.
• Associated values (for example UserAna1) cannot be simulated.
• The interlocking functions of the block are activated in accordance with input
parameter BypProt = 0 or deactivated (BypProt = 1). This is shown as follows in the
faceplate and block icon:

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

68 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Enabled

Disabled

Block-internal simulation for controllers

How block-internal simulation for controllers works (SimOn = 1):
• In manual mode, both the simulated process value SimPV and the simulated repeated
manipulated variable SimRbk can be entered in the faceplate as a simulated value.
• When a switchover to automatic mode is performed, the simulated process value SimPV is
set so that it is equal to the setpoint SP (= tracking). This means the control deviation is no
longer present and the pending manipulated variable (from the bumpless manual-automatic
switchover, for example) remains constant. SimRbk can still be controlled.

Note
If you switch a controller block to block-internal simulation during automatic mode and the
controller is connected to the actual process on the actuator side, you will open the control loop
as a result.
The actuating signals calculated on the basis of the simulated actual value are switched to the
process, but the resulting motion in the process is no longer visible in terms of the controller
actual value, as a copy of the setpoint is present at this point instead, where it takes the form of
a simulated actual value. The process could move away from the setpoint without the controller
doing anything to counteract this and without you seeing this happen in the controller faceplate.
Manipulated variable step changes occur during switchover to automatic mode if an error signal
was already present before the switchover.

The following applies to program mode:

• Program mode with setpoint specification should be considered the same as automatic mode
from a control engineering point of view. Block-internal simulation reacts in the same way as
it does in automatic mode: The process value PV is set so that it is equal to the setpoint SP,
which in this case is derived from the input parameter AdvCoMV.
• Program mode with manipulated variable specification should be considered the same as
manual mode from a control engineering point of view. Block-internal simulation reacts in
the same way as it does in manual mode: The simulated process value SimPV can be entered
as a simulated value. In this case the manipulated variable MV is derived from the input
parameter AdvCoMV.

2.1.1.10 Dead band

Dead band
To suppress values fluctuating around zero, you can set a dead band (Deadband):

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 69
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Deadband = 0: Dead band is disabled

Deadband ≠ 0: Dead band is enabled
With a negative dead band (Deadband < 0.0), calculation is continued internally with this
value

39B2XW

>'HDGEDQG@

39
>'HDGEDQG@

2.1.1.11 Request for maintenance release

Issuing a request for maintenance (MS → APL)

An operator can issue a request for maintenance release from the Maintenance view of the
ASSET faceplate ("Status service" → "Release request"). After issuing a maintenance request, the
operator can set the maintenance release. This will display the message which the operator has
configured. Later, operator can set the Maintenance Release in the technological Block
(Page 72). It indicates that the maintenance operator can start the maintenance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

70 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Functional sequence in APL

6\VWHPDUHD 8VHUDUHDൺ0HDVXULQJSRLQWWHPSODWH
$66(7)DFHSODWH 2SHUDWRUUHTXHVWH[WHUQDOPHVVDJH

2SHUDWRUUHTXHVW

06B5HT ([W0VJ[
&RQQHFWWRWKH
06B5(4 ';&+*B;; ';&+*B;; H[WHUQDOPHVVDJH

$3/
'LDJQRVWLFGULYHU $3/LQSXW
WHFKQRORJLFDO
02' FKDQQHOEORFN
EORFN

• The output parameter MS_Req of the channel block will be set to 1 when an operator issues
a maintenance request in Maintenance view of the ASSET faceplate.
• The output parameter MS_Req has to be connected to the input parameter ExtMsgx of the
desired technological block for which the user wants to issue an operator request message.
• The operator has to configure the "Message class" and enter a suitable text in the "Event"
field for the operator request message in the "PCS 7 Message Configuration" window of the
technological block.
• With the configured message and issued maintenance release, the maintenance operator
can start the maintenance.
• The operator request message stays active until the user changes to "In service" or "Cancel"
mode in the Maintenance view of ASSET faceplate.
• Once the maintenance is done, the operator can change the mode to "Completed". This
will deactivate the "In service" mode (OosAct = 0).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 71
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.12 Release for maintenance

Issuing a release for maintenance

The release for maintenance serves as information about a process tag at which maintenance,
service or calibration should be carried out. You can use the signal for release for maintenance
to transfer the information about the enabling of a process tag from the OS to a Maintenance
Station.

Note
The block must be in either "Manual," "On" or "Out of service" mode to set the release for
maintenance.

You set the release for maintenance (operator control permission "System control" required) in
the parameter view using the input parameter MS_RelOp = 1. A release for maintenance is
then made available via the interconnectable output parameter MS_Release = 1 for further
processing. In order to make this information of the Maintenance Station available, you have to
interconnect the output parameter MS_Release of the technologic block with the input
parameter MS_Releaseof the corresponding channel block.
The issuing of a release for maintenance does not have any influence on the function of the
block. An operation message is generated.

Use of the state "In progress" on the Maintenance Station

The status "In progress" is implemented on the Maintenance Station for a process tag or a field
device using the channel blocks and the interconnectable output parameter OosAct = 1. You
can interconnect the output parameter OosAct of the channel block with the input
parameter OosLi of a technologic block.
Use the Feature bit Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 190) to specify, in case the input
parameter is OosLi = 1, if:
• there is a switchover to the "out of service" mode and the symbol for the "In progress" (see
table) status is displayed. You can change to manual mode at any time.
• Only the "In progress" display (see table) in the block icon and in the faceplate of the assigned
technologic block is made.

Display Meaning
In progress

Function sequence in the APL

• The OS operator issues the release for maintenance (MS_RelOp = 1) in the technologic
block's parameter view.
• The technologic block then sets the MS_Release = 1 output parameter.
• The channel block's MS_Rel input is now also 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

72 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

• The channel block signals the release for maintenance to the diagnostics block via the DXCHG
parameter.
• The release for maintenance is only signaled to the Maintenance Station once all 0 bits of the
parameter DXCHG_XX are set on the diagnostics block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 73
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

• The channel block determines the "in progress" state of the Maintenance Station using
the MS input parameter and makes this information available at the OosAct output
parameter.
• On the technologic block, the "working" state is displayed at input parameter OosLi and
forwarded for display to the faceplate.
6\VWHPDUHD 8VHUDUHDà3URFHVVWDJWHPSODWH

(;7B67$7 06B5HOHDVH 06B5HO2S 06B5HOHDVH

202'(B 0RGH
39B2XW 39
202'(B ';FKJ

06 ';&+*B
'HWHUPLQHLQSURJUHVV
';&+*B 09
VWDWXVIURP06

2B06 06 2RV$FW 2RV/L

ุ 2RV2S
39B,Q

$3/
$3/LQSXW
WHFKQRORJLFDO
'LDJQRVWLFGULYHU FKDQQHOEORFN EORFN
02'

3,,

(;7B67$7 06B5HOHDVH
39B2XW

202'(B 0RGH
202'(B ';FKJ

06 ';&+*B
'HWHUPLQHLQSURJUHVV
';&+*B
VWDWXVIURP06

2B06 06 2RV$FW

39B,Q

$3/RXWSXW
'LDJQRVWLFGULYHU FKDQQHOEORFN
02'

3,4

Figure 2-6 Release for maintenance

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

74 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Key to diagram:

PII Process image of inputs

PIQ Process image of outputs
Black lines Automatic system connections
Green lines Process value connections made by the planner
Blue lines Connections for release for maintenance made by the planner

Note
For additional information on the topic of maintenance please refer to PCS 7 OS process
management.

2.1.1.13 SIMATIC BATCH functionality

SIMATIC BATCH functionality

Some blocks have an interface to SIMATIC BATCH. You use them when you connect BatchEn,
BatchID, BatchName, StepNo and Occupied I/Os to the corresponding SIMATIC BATCH
blocks. A new BatchName becomes effective if the BatchID is changed. Refer to the SIMATIC
BATCH documentation.
Please refer to the descriptions of the individual blocks for information about whether a block
supports the SIMATIC BATCH functionality.

2.1.1.14 Flutter suppression for channel blocks

Flutter suppression
The time-controlled "Flutter suppression" function is used to delay the outgoing of a message by
a configurable period.
Flutter suppression is used for
• OB82 events - diagnostic messages
• OB83 events - fault
used.
The flutter time is entered at the channel block at the FlutTmIn parameter. The high byte of the
DataXchg parameter of the channel blocks contains the flutter time.
Flutter suppression comes into effect when FlutEN = 1 and FlutTmIn > 0 is set at the channel
block.
There is only one flutter message per module. The delay times and fault messages are channel-
specific. The fault messages are extended by at least the delay time. Flutter occurs when the
status of fault messages changes from "Outgoing" back to "Incoming" within the delay time.
The last fluttering channel and its set delay time deactivates the flutter message.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 75
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The following channel blocks have this function:

FbAnIn - Analog input channel block for field devices (Page 2486)
FbAnTot - Analog totalizer channel block for field devices (Page 2507)
FbAnOu - Analog output channel block for field devices (Page 2496)
FbDiIn - Digital input channel block for field devices (Page 2515)
FbDiOu - Digital output channel block for field devices (Page 2525)
Pcs7AnIn - Analog input channel block (Page 2584)
Pcs7AnOu - Analog output channel block (Page 2597)
Pcs7DiIn - Digital input channel block (Page 2616)
Pcs7DiIT - Digital input channel block with time stamp (Page 2625)
Pcs7DiOu - Digital output channel block (Page 2636)
Pcs7Cnt1 - Controlling and reading FM 350 modules (Page 2645)
Pcs7Cnt2 - Control and read an 8-DI_NAMUR module of the ET 200iSP (Page 2656)
Pcs7Cnt3 - Control and read the 1 COUNT 24V/100kHz module for count mode (Page 2666)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

76 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.15 Startup characteristics over Trigger block

Startup characteristics over Trigger block

With the function block Trigger, you can influence the startup characteristics of the blocks Limit,
TimerP, FlipFlop, and Trigger. Connect the output parameter InitOut of the Trigger block with
the input parameter Init of the block Limit, TimerP, or FlipFlop to initialize these blocks. In the
second cycle of OB30 to OB38, the output parameter InitOut of the Trigger block will be reset
after a startup.

2.1.1.16 Parameters that cannot be connected

This section provides information on parameters that cannot be connected by user via CFC
connection. (for example: StartValue at the Pcs7DiOu).
the following parameters that are not linkable:

Parameters Applicable for all the blocks TimeTrig

SampleTime x x
MsgEvId(x) x x
All inputs beginning with Old. x x
For example: In
CntOhSc: OldMinutes,
OldDays, and so on.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 77
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameters Applicable for all the blocks TimeTrig

J_Mini x x
OptimOcc x x
InPerTrigOn - x
InSglTrigOn - x
InSglTrigDT - x

2.1.2 Operating modes of the blocks

2.1.2.1 Overview of the modes

Overview of the individual modes

The available operating modes are assigned to the block families:
• Motors, valves and dosers
• Controllers
• Blocks without "Manual" and "Automatic" modes
You can find an overview below. Click on one of the operating modes to go directly to the
relevant detailed description.
You can find a state graph for the operating modes (Page 92) at the end of this section.

Operating modes for motors, valves and dosers

The following operating modes are available:
1. Local mode (Page 88)
2. Automatic mode (Page 84)
3. Manual mode (Page 84)
4. Out of service (Page 79)
The mode with the lowest number in the list above has the highest priority. "Manual" and
"Automatic" modes have the same priority. General information on the individual modes is
available in the following sections. The sections also include block-specific information, for
example, non-standard parameter assignment. Refer to the description and function of the
relevant blocks.

Operating modes for controllers

The following operating modes are available:
1. Automatic mode (Page 81)
2. Manual mode (Page 81)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

78 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

3. Program mode for controllers (Page 87)

4. Out of service (Page 79)
The mode with the lowest number has highest priority. "Manual" and "Automatic" modes have
the same priority. General information on the individual modes is available in the following
sections. The sections also include block-specific information, for example, non-standard
parameter assignment. Refer to the description and function of the relevant blocks.

Operating modes for blocks without "Manual" and "Automatic" operation

The following operating modes are available:
1. On (Page 79)
2. Out of service (Page 79)
The mode with the lowest number has highest priority. General information on the individual
modes is available in the following sections. The sections also include block-specific information,
for example, non-standard parameter assignment. Refer to the description and function of the
relevant blocks.

Note
Note that the operating modes are realized differently in the individual block families.

2.1.2.2 On

"On" operating mode

The "On" operating mode tells you that the block algorithm is being processed (output
parameter OnAct = 1). This operating mode is only available for blocks that have faceplates
but not the following operating modes:
• Manual mode or
• Automatic mode or
• Local mode
The "On" mode can only be activated via a control on the faceplate (input parameter
OnOp = 1). The block must be in the "Out of service" operating mode for this to be possible.

2.1.2.3 Out of service

Using the "Out of service" operating mode

The "Out of service" operating mode is available to all blocks that have an operating mode
switchover and a direct connection to the process (with a connection to a process tag, for
example).
The "Out of service" operating mode is intended for purposes of maintenance and servicing
(replacing the device, for example). All of the block's functions are disabled. No incoming or

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 79
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

outgoing messages are generated. The only function still possible is an operating mode
switchover.
All outputs for motors and valves are set to the neutral position in this operating mode.
The timer for the function "Restart disable after the shutoff of motor (Page 1774)" is reset in this
mode.

Note
Notes on VlvMotL and VlvPosL
If the neutral position of is "Closed" or "Open", the corresponding control outputs "Closed" or
"Open" are set. The control outputs are reset after reaching the neutral position or with an active
torque signal. The "Seal valve" function (Feature.Bit8) is a component.

Note
Note on VlvMotL
If the timer of the "Restart disable after the shutoff of motor (Page 1774)" function is running and
the block is not in the neutral position, it is not possible to switch to "Out of service" mode.

Note
For the RbkOut.ST parameter, the status is set to "Out of service (OOS)" in the moment of
change and not in every cycle of OOS.

For controllers, the neutral position manipulated variable (high or low manual limit of the
manipulated variable) is only used if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable
takes effect at startup (Page 179) is active. Otherwise the manipulated variable remains at the
latest value like all the other output parameters.
See also the section Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 56) for more on
this.
The last value available is output permanently for all other blocks.

Requirement for the "Out of service" mode

Prerequisite for switching to this operating mode is that the block is in "Manual mode" or "On"
mode.

Activating the "Out of service" operating mode using the faceplate

The "Out of service" operating mode can only be switched on by using the faceplate when it is
in the default block view (OosOp = 1 parameter) and even then, only if ModLiOp = 0.
To switch the operating mode using the faceplate, refer to the descriptions relating to the
standard view of the individual blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

80 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Switching on the "Out of service" operating mode by using the interconnection

The "Out of service" operating mode is switched on by using the configurable parameter OosLi
= 1. This is only possible if the block is in manual mode or "On" mode and the Feature
bit Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 190) was set to 1.
Regardless of operating mode, the parameter view of the faceplate will always display the status
of the parameter OosLi =1 with the symbol for the status "In progress" (see table) next to the
Maintenance enable button.

Display Meaning
In progress

See also the section Release for maintenance (Page 72) for more on this.

Exiting the "Out of service" operating mode

From this operating mode, a block can only be switched by an operator action at the faceplate
into the following operating modes:
• "On"
• "Manual mode"

2.1.2.4 Manual and automatic mode for control blocks

"Manual" and "Automatic" modes for controller blocks

In "manual mode", the control settings for the device are made manually by the operator. The
operator decides how to change the block's manipulated variable (output signal). The
manipulated variable can be analog or binary.
In "automatic mode", the control settings for the controller are made automatically as calculated
by the block algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 81
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Changing between operating modes

The switchover between manual and automatic modes takes place as shown in the following
schematic:

6HOHFWLRQRIPDQXDODXWRPDWLFRSHUDWLQJPRGHZLWK

0RG/L2S  0RG/L2S 

IDFHSODWH RU6)& &)&6)&

0DQ0RG2S  $XW0RG2S  0DQ0RG/L  $XW0RG/L 

$XW0RG/L  0DQ0RG/L 

0DQXDOPRGH $XWRPDWLFPRGH

Switchover initiated in the faceplate (ModLiOp = 0): The switchover between operating
modes is carried out in the standard view of the faceplate. In the function block, the parameters
ManModOp for "manual mode" and AutModOp for "automatic mode" are used.
If both signals (ManModOp =1, AutModOp = 1 ) are set, ManModOp = 1 has priority.
Switchover per interconnection (CFC or SFC instance) (ModLiOp = 1): The switchover
between the operating modes is carried out with an interconnection on the function block. The
parameters ManModLi for "manual mode" and AutModLi for "automatic mode" are used in
pushbutton operation. In switching mode (requirement: Feature.Bit4 = 1, see Setting
switch or button mode (Page 180)) connection AutModLi is used exclusively.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

82 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If both signals (ManModLi =1, AutModLi = 1 ), the previous operating mode is retained and
the ErrorNum output is assigned with the error number 51.

Note
You can access the variable parameters AutModOp and ManModOp from a normal SFC (in
contrast to the instance of an SFC type). The SFC can thus change the operating mode without
revoking the access rights of the operator (i.e. without setting ModLiOp = 1).

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode

When changing over from "automatic mode" to "manual mode", the last valid control settings
(Manipiulated Value MV)for the controller set in "automatic mode" remain valid until you change
the control settings manually.

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode

The switchover from manual to automatic mode can take place with or without the internal
setpoint tracking the process value. You specify this behavior on the SP_TrkPV I/O, which can
also be operated from the faceplate in the parameter view (Option "SP = PV"). For the blocks
PIDConL and PIDStepL you can also change the behavior for the switchover via the
parameter Feature bit Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers
(Page 186):
• Switchover with internal setpoint tracking process variable(SP_TrkPV = 1) means that
in "Manual" mode the setpoint (SP) tracks the process value (PV) (bumpless switchover).
After switching back to "Automatic" mode, the manipulated variable remains constant until
the setpoint value (SP) is changed or the process value (PV) changes.
• Switchover without internal setpoint tracking process variable (SP_TrkPV = 0) means
that the block immediately recalculates the value of the manipulated variable based on the
setpoint and process value (PV) when the mode is changed. The Feature parameter is used
to choose between the two variants:
– Switchover without P step (standard setting, Feature bit = 0):
During switchover, the I action of the controller is set in such a way that the switchover is
carried out without a P step (virtually bumpless referring to the manipulated variable). A
control deviation is only regulated via the I action.
– Switchover with P step (Feature bit = 1):
During switchover, the I action of the controller is set in such a way that the switchover is
carried out with a P step (not bumpless referring to the manipulated variable). A control
deviation is regulated via the P and the I action.
Note
Points to note about switchovers with a P step change:
• The P action must be active for the setting "Switchover with P step" (PropSel = 1)
• If the P action is in the feedback (PropFacSP = 0), the "Switchover with P step"
setting has no effect.
• If the switchover function with the internal setpoint tracking the process variable is
active (SP_TrkPV = 1), the "Switchover with P step" setting has no effect.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 83
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Reaction of signals when operating mode is changed

Using the Feature bit Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 174), you can
choose whether the block automatically resets the signal for changing the operating mode.

Switch on program mode

A few controller blocks allow you to operate in program mode. Refer to the relevant sections for
the controller blocks to learn whether a control block allows program mode.
Also refer to the section Program mode for controllers (Page 87) for information on program
mode.

2.1.2.5 Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers

Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers

In "manual mode", the control settings for the device are made manually by the operator. The
operator decides how to change the block's manipulated variable (output signal). The
manipulated variable can be analog or binary in accordance with the function block.
In "automatic mode", the control settings for the device are made by the block algorithm via
interconnected inputs or inputs controlled by SFC.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

84 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Changing between operating modes

The switchover between "manual and automatic mode" takes place as shown in the following
schematic:

6HOHFWLRQRIPDQXDODXWRPDWLFRSHUDWLQJPRGHZLWK

0RG/L2S  0RG/L2S 

IDFHSODWH RU6)& &)&6)&

0DQ0RG2S  $XW0RG2S  0DQ0RG/L  $XW0RG/L 

$XW0RG/L  0DQ0RG/L 

0DQXDOPRGH $XWRPDWLFPRGH

Note
The two selections (manual and automatic) cannot both be set to "1" in switching mode.

Switchover using faceplates (ModLiOp = 0): The switchover between operating modes is
carried out in the standard view of the faceplate. In the function block, the parameters
ManModOp for "manual mode" and AutModOp for "automatic mode" are used.
Switchover per interconnection (CFC or SFC instance) (ModLiOp = 1): The switchover
between the operating modes is carried out with an interconnection on the function block. The
parameters ManModLi for "manual mode" and AutModLi for "automatic mode" are used in

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 85
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

pushbutton operation. In switching mode (requirement: Feature.Bit4 = 1, see Setting

switch or button mode (Page 180)) connection AutModLi is used exclusively.

Note
The Feature.Bit4 is available only for the "large" blocks.

Note
You can access the variable parameters AutModOp and ManModOp from a normal SFC (in
contrast to the instance of an SFC type). The SFC can thus change the operating mode without
revoking the access rights of the operator (i.e. without setting ModLiOp = 1).

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode

When changing over from "automatic mode" to "manual mode", the last valid control settings for
the block set in "automatic mode" remain valid until you change the control settings manually.

Note
For VlvAnL, the bumplessness of the switchover depends on the parameter MV_TrkExt.

Switchover from manual to automatic mode

You can set the following options for changing over from "manual mode" to "automatic mode"
using the Feature bit Bumpless switchover to automatic mode (Page 186). Refer to the I/O
descriptions for the relevant block.
• A switchover from manual to automatic mode is possible at any time (standard
setting, Feature bit = 0). The control settings for the automatic mode become effective
immediately.
• Switchover from manual to automatic mode is only possible if the control settings for the
manual and automatic modes match (Bumpless switchover), (Feature bit = 1). An error
message is output if they do not match. In this case, you will need to adapt the control
settings in "manual mode" to the control settings in "automatic mode".
Note
The "Bumpless switchover to automatic mode" function is supported only by "large" blocks.

Reaction of signals when operating mode is changed

Using the Feature bit Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 174), you can
choose whether the block automatically resets the signal for changing the operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

86 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting the commands for the control settings

With the Feature bit Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 175), you
select how the block handles commands for the control settings (for example motor on) via the
interconnected input parameters.

2.1.2.6 Program mode for controllers

Program mode for controllers - interface for higher-level control functions

The interface for primary controller functions (external Advanced Control software package)
provides primary controller functions, which run on an external PC as an OPC client, the option
of using the control from the controller function block and specifying the setpoint or
manipulated variable from a remote location. This procedure is called program mode.
You can use the Feature bit Enabling program mode (Page 172) to specify whether or not the
controller block is intended for program mode.
Program mode requires an enable signal (input parameter AdvCoEn = 1) from a central control
block. If this enable signal goes from 1 to 0, for example, due to errors in the OPC
communication, the controller block switches to manual mode if it is in program mode with
manipulated variable specification or to automatic mode if it is in program mode with setpoint
specification.
You activate program mode in the standard view of the controller faceplate. In addition to
switching from manual to automatic mode, you are also given the option of using program
mode as the operating mode. You exit program mode by operator input or by switching back into
manual or automatic mode.
A 0-1 edge transition of the interconnectable input parameter AdvCoMstrOn activates program
mode depending on the conditions described below. You can use this to put an entire group of
downstream controller blocks into program mode at the same time from a central control block.
Both the input parameter AdvCoOn and the interconnectable input parameter AdvCoMstrOn
can be used at the same time, since the parameter AdvCoMstrOn only reacts to edges of the
binary signal.
Program mode is deactivated with a 1 - 0 edge transition.

Note
The output parameters ManAct or AutAct display the mode to which the controller changes
with a 1 - 0 edge transition.

The output parameter AdvCoRdy = 1 indicates if the PID controller is ready to switch to
program mode. At a central control block, you can use an AND operation for all AdvCoRdy
signals of the downstream controllers to enable central switchover.
The output parameter AdvCoAct = 1 indicates of the block is in program mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 87
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Selecting the type of program mode

There are two types of program mode:
• Program mode driven by setpoint (in automatic mode only)
• Program mode driven by manipulated variable (in manual mode only, not for step controllers
without position feedback)
Program mode with setpoint: If you set the input parameter AdvCoModSP = 1, the analog
value provided by the OPC client (AdvCoMV) is used as an external setpoint for the controller. The
controller and faceplate otherwise react as they do with automatic mode and an external
setpoint. Refer to section Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 138) for more about
this.
Requirements for program mode with setpoint:
• AdvCoModSP = 1,
• AdvCoEn = 1,
• Controller has to be in automatic mode
• The setpoint can be set to internal as well as external.
Program mode with manipulated variable: If you set the input parameter AdvCoModSP = 0,
the analog value provided by the OPC client (AdvCoMV) is used as an external manipulated
variable for the controller. The algorithm of the PID controller is bypassed. The controller and
faceplate otherwise react as they do with tracking (MV_TrkOn = 1). Refer to section Tracking
and limiting a manipulated variable (Page 226) for more about this.
Requirements for program mode with manipulated variable:
• AdvCoModSP = 0,
• AdvCoEn = 1,
• Controller is preferably in manual mode, but it can also be in automatic mode.
• The setpoint can be set to internal as well as external.
Note
Program mode with manipulated variable is not available for step controllers without
position feedback (available in PIDStepL, FmCont and FmTemp). ErrorNum = 50 is output
on the controller block and the controller cannot switch into program
mode (AdvCoAct=0).

2.1.2.7 Local mode

Areas of application for local mode

This operating mode is used for motors, valves and dosing units. The control settings are made
directly or via a control station that is located "locally". In addition, you can set different control
strategies with the parameter LocalSetting.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

88 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With LocalSetting = 0, you prevent a change to "local mode".

Note
Differences between "Large" and "Small" blocks
The operating mode described here is valid for "Large" blocks. For "Small"
blocks, LocalSetting can be configured only on a limited basis. For more information, refer
to the respective description for the operating modes of the blocks.

Changing to local mode

Changing to local mode is only possible from the manual and automatic operating modes. The
change to this mode is initiated by:
• An operation on the faceplate (input parameter LocalOp = 1, valid if LocalSetting = 3
or LocalSetting = 4 and ModLiOp = 0) or
• The interconnected input parameter (LocalLi = 1, valid if LocalSetting = 1
or LocalSetting = 2).

Exiting local mode

You leave local mode using:
• An operation on the faceplate (LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4
and ModLiOp = 0) or
• the interconnected input parameter (LocalSetting = 1 or LocalSetting = 2).
In order to exit local mode via the interconnected input parameter, you can configure various
reactions using a Feature bit Exiting local mode (Page 191).

Operator input in "local mode" using a faceplate

You are not permitted to functionally operate the block in local mode. You can only use the
faceplate to exit local mode if you have also activated "local mode" using the faceplate. The rules
you specified for exiting "local mode" apply here.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 89
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Input in "local mode" via interconnected inputs

In "local mode", the way the block functions is influenced via interconnected input parameters
according to the settings of the LocalSetting parameter. You have the following options:
• LocalSetting = 1 and LocalSetting = 3
– The control settings for the block are adjusted (tracking) via an interconnected input
parameter. The interconnected input parameter includes the control signal for the local
operator station on the system.
– The runtime monitoring of the block is effective in accordance with your configuration.
– The interlocking functions of the block are activated in accordance with input
parameter BypProt = 0 or deactivated (BypProt = 1).
Note
The block VlvAnL does not support LocalSetting = 1/3.

• LocalSetting = 2 and LocalSetting = 4

– The control settings for the block are made based on internal adjustment of the feedback
value.
– Runtime monitoring of the block is active if more than one available feedback signals are
set (discrepancy).
An exception is VlvMotL:
Note
VlvMotL
The motor and valve feedback signals are monitored if the motor feedback signlas exist
and are connected with FbkOpening and FbkClosing (Feature.Bit2 = 0). The
motor feedback signals are only monitored in the end positions of the valve and in
discrepancy. For example, if the valve is in end position FbkOpen =1 and the motor
feedback FbkOpening =1 is pending, an error message is generated upon expiration of
the monitoring time.

VlvAnL: The auxiliary valve is controlled via internal tracking of the feedback
signals FbkAuxVCloseOut and FbkAuxVOpenOut. The control of the main valve via
the feedback value Rbk is not affected by this.

The texts for labeling the command buttons in the faceplates of the motor and valve blocks can
now be assigned for each specific instance.
The configuration of the texts is performed with the "Text 1" property of the respective control
inputs of the motor and valve blocks in the CFC.
If no instance-specific text is configured, the previous default texts are used and displayed in the
faceplate.
The following table shows the assignment of the command buttons to the corresponding block
input:
The interlock functions of the block are deactivated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

90 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Overview of behavior in local mode

LocalSetting = 0 1 2 3 4 5 (VlvS only)

Switch on operat‐ Cannot be CFC/SFC CFC/SFC Faceplate Faceplate CFC
ing mode set
Changing the op‐ - CFC/SFC CFC/SFC - - CFC/SFC
erating mode:
Local mode/to
manual mode only
(Feature = 0)
Changing the op‐ - CFC/SFC CFC/SFC - - CFC/SFC
erating mode:
Local mode/previ‐
ous mode
(Feature = 1)
Operating in the - Resetting of Er‐ Rapid stop and Only switching Only switching -
faceplate rors/Protection resetting of rap‐ of operating of operating
Via Faceplate, Re‐ id stop (only for mode, rapid mode, rapid
setting of Rapid "Large" blocks). stop, internal/ stop, and reset‐
Stop Resetting of Er‐ external set‐ ting of rapid
rors/Protection point switch‐ stop
Via Faceplate, over and reset‐
ting of rapid
stop
Executing local - Yes No Yes No No
commands
Reaction of the - Monitoring the Tracking of feed‐ Monitoring the Tracking of Monitoring the
block feedbacks back, monitor‐ feedbacks feedback, mon‐ feedbacks
ing feedback itoring feed‐
during rapid back during
stop, external rapid stop, ex‐
errors, motor ternal errors,
protection or motor protec‐
discrepancy tion or discrep‐
ancy
Interlock activated - Yes: only at Yes: only at only at
(BypProt = 0) output (BypProt = 0) output output
LockAct LockAct LockAct
No: No:
with with with
(BypProt = 1) Feature.Bit2 (BypProt = 1) Feature.Bit Feature.Bit
7=1 27 = 1 27 = 1
and BypProt and BypProt and BypProt
= 0 = 0 = 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 91
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.2.8 State graph of the operating modes

State graph of the operating modes

2XWRIVHUYLFH

0DQXDO
 2Q

 



3URJUDP /RFDO
PRGH


 

$XWRPDWLF

Figure 2-7 State graph of the operating modes

* This operating mode is used for motors, valves, and dosing units.
** This operating mode is used for controllers only.

Number in Condition for status change

graphic (top)
(1) Manual (on) → Out of service
• Via faceplate (OosOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Via edge transition 0 → 1 of OosLi if Feature bit Reaction to the out of service
mode (Page 190)= 1
(2) Out of service → Manual (on)
• Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1)
(3) Local mode → Manual
• Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3
or LocalSetting = 4 or
• Via LocalLi = 0 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2
or LocalSetting = 5. See section Exiting local mode (Page 191) for more con‐
ditions.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

92 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Number in Condition for status change

graphic (top)
(4) Automatic → Manual
• Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Via ManModLi = 1 if ModLiOp = 1 and Feature bit Setting switch or button
mode (Page 180)= 0 or
• Via AutModLi = 0 if ModLiOp = 1 and Feature bit Setting switch or button
mode (Page 180)= 1
(5) Manual → Automatic
• Via faceplate (AutModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Via AutModLi = 1 if ModLiOp = 1
(6) Manual → Local mode
• Via faceplate (LocalOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3
or LocalSetting = 4 or
• Via LocalLi = 1 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2
or LocalSetting = 5
(7) Automatic → Local mode
• Via faceplate (LocalOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3
or LocalSetting = 4 or
• Via LocalLi = 1 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2
or LocalSetting = 5
(8) Local mode → Automatic
• Via faceplate (AutModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3
or LocalSetting = 4 or
• Via LocalLi = 0 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2
or LocalSetting = 5. See section Exiting local mode (Page 191) for more con‐
ditions.
(9) Program mode → Automatic
• Via faceplate (AutModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Via AutModLi = 1 if ModLiOp = 1 or
• Via edge transition 1 → 0 of AdvCoMstrOn if automatic is set before program mode.
(10) Automatic → Program mode
Requirement for switchover in program mode: AdvCoEn = 1
• Via faceplate (AdvCoOn= 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Via AdvCoMstrOn = 1
(11) Manual → Program mode
Requirement for switchover from manual to program mode: AdvCoEn = 1
and AdvCoModSP = 0
• Via faceplate (AdvCoOn= 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Via AdvCoMstrOn = 1
(12) Program mode → Manual
• Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
• Edge transition 1 → 0 of AdvCoMstrOn if manual is set before program mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 93
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.3 Monitoring functions

2.1.3.1 Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library

Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library

This and the following chapters encompass the standard monitoring functions in the Advanced
Process Library. The monitoring functions include:
• Limit value monitoring
• Feedback monitoring
• Motor protection
Some of the configured time values (e.g. MonTiStatic, MonTiDynamic) are limited at the
low end to the sampling time by the block algorithm and written back to the block input. "Reset
Program" (after a "Download Entire Program" for example) writes the parameter values changed
in this way to the offline data storage system.
For further and detailed information, refer to the following chapters. For the block-specific
monitoring functions, also refer to the description of the particular block.

2.1.3.2 Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx

Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx

The SumMsgAct output parameter assembles the following signals of a block and makes them
available to you:
• Limit monitoring of the process value
• Limit monitoring of the count value
• Limit monitoring of the feedback
• Limit monitoring of setpoint difference, manipulated variable difference and error signal
• External control system fault (CSF)
• Freely selectable messages ExtMsg1..4
Note
The signal status of the individual signals is not taken into consideration for forming the
group error.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

94 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.3.3 Limit monitoring

Limit monitoring of the process value

You can monitor the process value to the following high and low alarm, warning and tolerance
limits:
• PV_AH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
• PV_AL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
• PV_WH_Lim: Limit for high warning
• PV_WL_Lim: Limit for low warning
• PV_TH_Lim: Limit for the high tolerance
• PV_TL_Lim: Limit for the low tolerance

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

Note
Special note for "Small" blocks
"Small" blocks provide only the monitoring for alarms and warnings.

Result of the limit monitoring

The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters:
• PV_AH_Act = 1:: Limit for high alarm reached or exceeded
• PV_AL_Act = 1:: Limit for low alarm reached or undershot
• PV_WH_Act = 1:: Limit for high warning reached or exceeded
• PV_WL_Act = 1:: Limit for low warning reached or undershot
• PV_TH_Act = 1:: Limit for high tolerance reached or exceeded
• PV_TL_Act = 1:: Limit for low tolerance reached or undershot
made available (see figure). The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least one
limit value is reached or violated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 95
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

39B2XW

39B;;B/LP
39B+\VW

3URFHVVYDOXH

39B<<B/LP 39B+\VW

7LPH

39B;;B$FW

39B<<B$FW

;; $+IRU$ODUP+LJK ;; :+IRU:DUQLQJ+LJK ;; 7+IRU7ROHUDQFH+LJK

<< $/IRU$ODUP/RZ << :/IRU:DUQLQJ/RZ << 7/IRU7ROHUDQFH/RZ

You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 184) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 158) to disable limit monitoring
when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring

Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters:
• PV_AH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limits
• PV_AL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limits
• PV_WH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high warning limits
• PV_WL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low warning limits
• PV_TH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high tolerance limits
• PV_TL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low tolerance limits
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring of the tolerance limits is disabled,
meaning that the parameters are configured with 0. To activate monitoring, assign 1 to these
parameters.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

96 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

All other monitoring functions are enabled.

Message suppression

Symbol for message suppression

The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:

• PV_AH_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (high) messages are suppressed
• PV_AL_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (low) messages are suppressed
• PV_WH_MsgEn = 0: Warning (high) messages are suppressed
• PV_WL_MsgEn = 0: Warning (low) messages are suppressed
• PV_TH_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (high) messages are suppressed
• PV_TL_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (low) messages are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters
are preset to 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value
has been enabled.

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (PV_Hyst) for the limits, for example, to suppress signal flutter.
Refer to the Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 106) chapter for more on this.

Alarm delays
You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing alarms, warnings and tolerances. Refer to
the Area of application of the alarm delays (Page 229) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate

You can also change the limits and the hysteresis using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 360) chapter for more on this.

See also
Two time values per limit pair (Page 231)
Two time values for each individual limit (Page 232)
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 97
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Limit monitoring of the count value

You can monitor the count value to the following high and low alarm, warning and tolerance
limits:
• OutAH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
• OutAL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
• OutWH_Lim: Limit for high warning
• OutWL_Lim: Limit for low warning
• OutTH_Lim: Limit for the high tolerance
• OutTL_Lim: Limit for the low tolerance
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message
classes (Page 47).

Note
Monitoring the limits
The limits monitored depend on the direction of counting:
• In Mode 1 (summing up or integrating), the high limits are monitored:
– OutAH_Lim
– OutWH_Lim
– OutTH_Lim
• In Mode 2 (summing down or integrating), the low limits are monitored:
– OutAL_Lim
– OutWL_Lim
– OutTL_Lim

Example for limit monitoring with a counter

Monitoring of the high limit is performed only if the counter is running in "up" direction.
If you count "up" but with negative values, for example, from 100 down, you need to adjust the
high limit accordingly (for example, the high limit could be -15).
This behavior applies to the blocks CountScL, CountOh and TotalL.

Result of the limit monitoring

The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters:
• OutAH_Act = 1:: Limit for high alarm reached or exceeded
• OutAL_Act = 1:: Limit for low alarm reached or undershot
• OutWH_Act = 1:: Limit for high warning reached or exceeded
• OutWL_Act = 1:: Limit for low warning reached or undershot

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

98 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

• OutTH_Act = 1:: Limit for high tolerance reached or exceeded

• OutTL_Act = 1:: Limit for low tolerance reached or undershot
made available (see figure). The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least one
limit value is reached or violated.
You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 184) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 158) to disable limit monitoring
when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring

Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters:
• OutAH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limits
• OutAL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limits
• OutWH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high warning limits
• OutWL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low warning limits
• OutTH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high tolerance limits
• OutTL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low tolerance limits
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring of the tolerance limits is disabled,
meaning that the parameters are configured with 0. To activate monitoring, assign 1 to these
parameters.
All other monitoring functions are enabled.

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:
• OutAH_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (high) messages are suppressed
• OutAL_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (low) messages are suppressed
• OutWH_MsgEn = 0: Warning (high) messages are suppressed
• OutWL_MsgEn = 0: Warning (low) messages are suppressed
• OutTH_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (high) messages are suppressed
• OutTL_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (low) messages are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters
are preset to 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value
has been enabled.

Operating in the faceplate

You can also change the limits using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit operation and display in the
faceplate (Page 360) chapter for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 99
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value

Limit monitoring is performed for an additional analog value on the basis of the AV block,
see Description of AV (Page 711) chapter.
You can monitor an additional analog value to the following high and low limits for alarms
warnings and tolerances at the technologic block:
• AV_AH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
• AV_AL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
• AV_WH_Lim: Limit for high warning
• AV_WL_Lim: Limit for low warning
• AV_TH_Lim: Limit for the high tolerance
• AV_TL_Lim: Limit for the low tolerance
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message
classes (Page 47).

Note
The AV block and the technologic block must be built into the same cyclic interrupt OB.

Result of the limit monitoring

The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters of the
AV block:
• AV_AH_Act = 1:: Limit for high alarm reached or exceeded
• AV_AL_Act = 1:: Limit for low alarm reached or undershot
• AV_WH_Act = 1:: Limit for high warning reached or exceeded
• AV_WL_Act = 1:: Limit for low warning reached or undershot
• AV_TH_Act = 1:: Limit for high tolerance reached or exceeded
• AV_TL_Act = 1:: Limit for low tolerance reached or undershot
made available (see figure).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

100 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

$9B2XW

$9B;;B/LP
$9B+\VW

$QDORJYDOXH

$9B<<B/LP $9B+\VW

7LPH

$9B;;B$FW

$9B<<B$FW

;; $+IRU$ODUP ;; :+IRU:DUQLQJ+LJK ;; 7+IRU7ROHUDQFH+LJK

+LJK << :/IRU:DUQLQJ/RZ << 7/IRU7ROHUDQFH/RZ
<< $/IRU$ODUP/RZ

You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 184) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 158) to disable limit monitoring
when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring

Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters of the AV block:
• AV_AH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limits
• AV_AL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limits
• AV_WH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high warning limits
• AV_WL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low warning limits
• AV_TH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high tolerance limits
• AV_TL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low tolerance limits
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring of the tolerance limits is disabled,
meaning that the parameters are configured with 0. To activate monitoring, assign 1 to these
parameters.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 101
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

All other monitoring functions are enabled.

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed at the block AV using the parameters:
• AV_AH_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (high) messages are suppressed
• AV_AL_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (low) messages are suppressed
• AV_WH_MsgEn = 0: Warning (high) messages are suppressed
• AV_WL_MsgEn = 0: Warning (low) messages are suppressed
• AV_TH_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (high) messages are suppressed
• AV_TL_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (low) messages are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters
are preset to 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value
has been enabled.

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (AV_Hyst) at the technologic block for the limits, for example, to
suppress signal flutter. Refer to the Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 106) chapter for more
on this.

Alarm delays
You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing alarms, warnings and tolerances. Refer to
the Area of application of the alarm delays (Page 229) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate

You can also change the limits and the hysteresis using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 360) chapter for more on this.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

102 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Limit monitoring of the feedback

Limit monitoring of position feedback

The position feedback of the manipulated variable can be monitored for the following high and
low warning limits:
• RbkWH_Lim: Limit for high warning
• RbkWL_Lim: Limit for low warning
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message
classes (Page 47).

Result of limit monitoring of the position feedback

The result of limit monitoring of the position feedback is made available at the interconnectable
output parameters:
• RbkWH_Act = 1: High limit reached or exceeded
• RbkWL_Act = 1: Low limit reached or undershot
made available. The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least one limit value
is reached or violated.
When the limits are reached or exceeded, messages that can be suppressed are output.
You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 184) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 158) to disable limit monitoring
when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring

Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters:
• RbkWH_En = 0: Monitoring of the high warning limit is disabled
• RbkWL_En = 0: Monitoring of the low warning limit is disabled
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring is enabled (default is 1).

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:
• RbkWH_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the high limit monitoring are suppressed
• RbkWL_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the low limit monitoring are suppressed

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 103
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (for example,
RbkWH_MsgEn = 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the position feedback
has been enabled.

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (RbkHyst) for the limits, for example, to suppress signal flutter.
Refer also to chapter Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 106) for more on this.

Alarm delays (only for the PIDConR and MotSpdCL blocks)

You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing warnings. Refer to the Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 229) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate

You can also change the limits and the hysteresis using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 360) chapter for more on this.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable and control deviation

Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable and error signal

The setpoint, manipulated variable and error signal can be monitored for the following high and
low alarm limits:
• ER_AH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
• ER_AL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message
classes (Page 47).

Result of the limit monitoring

The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters:
• ER_AH_Act =1: High limit violated (reached or exceeded)
• ER_AL_Act =1: Low limit (reached or undershot)
made available. The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least one limit value
is reached or violated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

104 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

When the limits are reached or exceeded, messages that can be suppressed are output.
You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 184) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 158) to disable limit monitoring
when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring

Alarm monitoring is enabled using the input parameters:
• ER_AH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limit
• ER_AL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limit
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring is disabled.

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:
• ER_AH_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the high limit monitoring are suppressed
• ER_AL_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the low limit monitoring are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (for example,
ER_AH_MsgEn = 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring has been enabled.

Note
With the MotSpdCL block, messages are only output if you have enabled Feature.Bit5 (Alarm
setpoint difference (Page 184)).

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (ER_Hyst) for these limits, for example, in order to suppress signal
flutter . Refer also to chapter Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 106) for more on this.

Alarm delays
You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing alarms. Refer to the Area of application of
the alarm delays (Page 229) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate

You can also influence the limits and the hysteresis by means of the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 360) chapter for more on this.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 105
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Limit monitoring with hysteresis

Limit monitoring with hysteresis

You can additionally define a hysteresis for all limit monitoring functions (parameter xxx_Hyst,
xxx can, for example, be PV for the process value). You use the hysteresis, for example, to
suppress signal flutter.
Enter the hysteresis as a physical variable at the block and faceplate (if you have the appropriate
operator control permissions (WinCC)).
For the WinCC operator control permissions, refer to the help on WinCC.

2.1.3.4 Feedbacks

Monitoring the feedbacks

Feedback monitoring
You can use the following monitoring functions:
• Monitoring the start-up and stop characteristics for motors or the runtime of valves
• Monitoring the operation of motors or the maintenance of the position of valves
• Disabling feedback
This monitoring function is enabled via the Monitor = 1 input.
Static and dynamic errors are reset by disabling the monitoring (Monitor = 0). If you
reactivate monitoring during the plant runtime, only dynamic monitoring (MonTiDynamic)
will be performed.

Note
In Manual mode with Reset functionality deactivated (Feature.Bit31 = 0), you can control all
the valves (including the motor valve but not the motors) despite the setting MonSafePos = 1
and with "Monitoring error" without reaching the neutral position.

Monitoring the start-up and stop characteristics for motors or the runtime of valves
Monitoring of the startup characteristics is implemented using the parameter MonTiDynamic.
The monitoring time specifies the period within which the feedback value, for
example, FbkStart with motors, must be available in response to a control signal. If this is not
the case, the text "Control error" is displayed in the standard view of the faceplate. An error
message is generated at the same time. The block then goes to its neutral position. In the case
of motors, this is always the stop state. With other blocks, this is an neutral position you have
specified (SafePos parameter). The block signals this at the corresponding output parameter
of the error message with 1, for example, with MonDynErr = 1 for motors.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

106 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With the motors MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL and the motor valve VlvMotL, the
Feature.Bit13 can be set to use a separate monitoring time MonTiDyStop for the stop
behavior. The monitoring time for the stop behavior is displayed at the MonDynStopErr output.
Parameters are set in seconds.

Monitoring the operation of motors or the maintenance of the position of valves

The following applies for "Large" blocks: Monitoring of the operation or the maintenance of
the position of valves is implemented using the parameter MonTiStatic. The monitoring time
specifies the period in which the feedback value can change its value briefly without an error
message being output. An example would be a running motor with the feedback via the input
parameter FbkStart. This parameter should be static in accordance with the control function.
However, its value can change within the monitoring time. If the change in the FbkStart
parameter takes longer than the monitoring time, the text "End position error" is displayed in the
standard view of the faceplate. An error message is generated at the same time. The block then
goes to its neutral position. In the case of motors, this is always the stop state. With other blocks,
this is an neutral position you have specified (SafePos parameter). The block signals this at the
corresponding output parameter of the error message with 1, for example,
with MonStaErr = 1 for motors.
Parameters are set in seconds.

Note
Please note that MonTiDynamic ≥ MonTiStatic and MonTiDynamic ≥ SampleTime
have to be configured. If something is set outside these limits, the block always returns the
respective limit at the input.
If SampleTime changes, MonTiDynamic may be tracked to the new value for SampleTime.
MonTiStatic is tracked if MonTiDynamic < MonTiStatic changes. With MonTiStatic
= 0, each feedback change without change of the control immediately results in a runtime error.
After a static monitoring error (e.g.: MonStaErr =1), an impulse output control is set to drive
the motor or the valve in rest position even if the block is already in rest position.
When Monitoring Error occurs, STOP output pin value remains 0 until the error state got
rectified and reset.
When Trip, FaultExt, CSF(with Feature.Bit18 = 1) becomes active and error
occurs, STOP outpin pin is set to 1, even at the error state and before reset.

The following applies for "Small" blocks: These blocks operate like "Large" blocks; however, the
monitoring time is set to 0 within the block and cannot be changed. Any change is displayed
immediately at the output parameter MonStaErr with 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 107
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Disabling feedback for valves

You can also disable feedback completely. Please refer to section Disabling feedback for valves
(Page 108) for further information.

Note
This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors

In the event of an interlock or error, the block has to be reset. Refer to the Resetting the block in
case of interlocks or errors (Page 49) section for more on this.

Disabling feedback for valves

Disabling monitoring of feedback for valves

This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.
If you operate a block without feedback, use the parameter NoFbkOpen = 1 bzw.
NoFbkClose = 1. This means, for example, that you do not have any feedbacks for the opened
state of the valve. Monitoring is thus disabled for this feedback. The feedback at the block is
adjusted according to the control signal.

Disabling monitoring of feedback for valves and motors

This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.
If you operate a block without feedback, use the parameter NoFbkXxx = 1. This means, for
example, that you do not have any feedbacks for the opened state of the valve or running/
stopped state of the motor.
Monitoring is thus disabled for this feedback. The feedback at the block is adjusted according to
the control signal and the other available feedbacks.

2.1.3.5 Motor protection function

Motor protection function

The motor protection function is used to turn off the motor if there is thermal overload
(Trip = 0, interconnectable input parameter).
If the motor is turned off by the motor protection function, a message (process control message)
is generated. This is indicated in the faceplate by the "Motor protection" text. You can influence
the reset using a various Feature bits. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or
errors (Page 49) section for more on this.
You can find more information in Section Influence of the signal status on the interlock
(Page 114).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

108 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.4 Interlocking functions

2.1.4.1 Interlocks

Interlocks at blocks
A maximum of three types of interlock can be used depending on the block. Three separate
inputs named Permit, Intlock and Protect are available for these functions.
• Activation enable ("Permission"): The activation enable makes it possible to switch the
motor in the direction which is enabled. The activation disable is displayed with a padlock in
the standard view. The motor cannot switch in the direction which is disabled.
• Interlock without reset ("Interlock"): An active interlock condition puts the block to the
neutral position (Intlock = 0). After the interlock condition has gone, the currently active
control function becomes active again in automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the
faceplate can be operated again after the interlock condition has gone.
• Interlock with reset ("Protection"): An active interlock condition puts the block to the
neutral position (input Protect = 0). Once the interlock condition is cleared, a reset is
necessary. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49)section for
more information.
• Permission for safe position ("Permit neutral pos." or "Permission stop"):
- The activation enable ("PermitSafePos = 0") prevents stop command to the motor.
- The activation enable ("PermitSafePos = 0") prevents the control in safe position direction
for VlvL & VlvAnL.
- The activation enable ("PermitSafePos = 0") & Feature2.Bit16 = 0 prevents the control in safe
position direction for VlvMotL & VlvPosL.
- The activation enable ("PermitSafePos = 0") & Feature2.Bit16 = 1 prevents the stop
command for VlvMotL & VlvPosL.

Note
Interlocks for "small" blocks and controller blocks
Ensure that "small" blocks and controller blocks PIDConL and PIDConR have only the Intlock
parameter. The other two interlocks are not included in these block variants.
Permission stop for VlvPosL
Permission stop does not restrict manipulated variable when position control is active.
Permission stop for MotRevL & MotSpdCL
Permission stop does not restrict the direct changeover between forward and revrese direction
(Feature.Bit7 = 1)

Interlock dependent on direction, position or speed

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 109
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The blocks MotRevL, MotSpdL, VlvMotL, VlvPosL, VlvAnL and MotSpdCL with
Feature2.Bit16 = 1 (see section Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed
(Page 183)) have inputs for interlock functionality with direction:

MotRevL, MotSpdCL MotSpdL VlvMotL, VlvPosL, VlvAnL

(Feature2.Bit16 = 1) (Feature2.Bit16 = 1) (Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
Permit: Enable forward Permit: Enable speed1 Permit: Enable open
PermRev: Enable reverse PermSp2: Enable speed2 PermCls: Enable close
Intlock: Interlock forward Intlock: Interlock speed1 Intlock: Interlock open
IntlRev: Interlock reverse IntlSp2: Interlock speed2 IntlCls: Interlock close
Protect: Protection forward Protect: Protection speed1 Protect: Protection open
ProtRev: Protection reverse ProtSp2: Protection speed2 ProtCls: Protection close

Interlock function dependent on direction (Feature2.Bit16 = 1) for MotRevL:

• Activation enable forward/reverse: The activation enable makes it possible to switch the
motor in the direction which is enabled. The activation disable is displayed with a padlock in
standard view. The motor cannot switch in the direction which is disabled.
• Interlock forward/reverse without reset: An active interlock condition only puts the block
in the stop position, when the motor is running in direction which is interlocked. Once
interlock condition is cleared, the currently active control function becomes active again in
automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the faceplate can be operated again in this
direction.
• Interlock forward/reverse with reset: An active interlock condition only puts the block in
the stop position, when the motor is running in the direction which is interlocked. Once the
interlock condition is cleared, a reset is necessary. Interlock forward and reverse can be reset
separately. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49) section for
more information.
Interlock function dependent on speed (Feature2.Bit16 = 1) for MotSpdL:
• Activation enable speed1/speed2: The activation enable makes it possible to switch the
motor in the speed which is enabled. The activation disable is displayed with a padlock in
standard view. The motor cannot switch in the speed which is disabled.
• Interlock speed1/speed2 without reset: An active interlock condition only puts the block in
the stop position, when the motor is running with the peed which is interlocked. Once
interlock condition is cleared, the currently active control function becomes active again in
automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the faceplate can be operated again in this speed.
• Interlock speed1/speed2 with reset: An active interlock condition only puts the block in the
stop position, when the motor is running with the speed which is interlocked. Once the
interlock condition is cleared, a reset is necessary. Interlock speed1 and speed2 can be reset
separately. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49) section for
more information.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

110 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Interlock function dependent on position (Feature2.Bit16 = 1) for VlvMotL, VlvPosL,

VlvAnL:
• Activation enable open/close: The activation enable makes it possible to move the valve in
the direction of the position which is enabled. The activation disable is displayed with a
padlock in standard view. The valve cannot move in the direction of the position which is
disabled.
• Interlock open/close without reset: An active interlock condition only puts the block in the
neutral position, when the valve is moving to a position which is interlocked. If the
interlocked position is the neutral position open or close, valve goes only to stop position.
Once interlock condition is cleared, the currently active control function becomes active
again in automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the faceplate can be operated again from
this position.
• Interlock open/close with reset: An active interlock condition only puts the block in the
neutral position, when the valve is moving to a position which is interlocked. If the
interlocked position is the neutral position open or close, valve goes only to stop position.
Once the interlock condition is cleared, a reset is necessary. Interlock open and close can be
reset separately. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49)
section for more information.

Display of the interlock in the faceplate and in the block icon

The interlock state is visualized in the faceplate and in the block icon by a status display (padlock)
as follows:
• Open padlock: No interlock pending
• Closed padlock: One or more interlocks are pending
• No padlock: Individual interlocks are not active
– Perm_En = 0 or Permit.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Permit has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.
– PermRevEn/PermClsEn/PermSp2En = 0 or PermRev.ST/PermCls.ST/PermSp2.ST
= 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter PermRev/PermCls/PermSp2 has no effect, the button in the
faceplate is invisible.
– Prot_En = 0 or Protect.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Protect has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.
– ProtRevEn/ProtClsEn/ProtSp2En = 0 or ProtRev.ST/ProtCls.ST/
ProtSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter ProtRev/ProtCls has no effect, the button in the faceplate is
invisible.
– Intl_En = 0 or Intlock.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Intlock has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible
– IntlRevEn/IntlClsEn/IntlSp2En = 0 or IntlRev.ST/IntlCls.ST/IntlSp2.ST
= 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.
– PermSf_En = 0 or PermitSafePos.ST = 16#FF or for VlvAnL when SafePos = 2 :
The input parameter PermitSafePos has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 111
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The block icon indicates the prioritized group status according to the active operating state. See
also the section Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 115) for more on this.
The faceplate visualizes the state of each interlock type separately.
The padlock is not shown in the block icon if all parameters for enabling the button are set to 0
or all parameters have the signal status 16#FF.

Note
Motors and values are not put into the neutral position if one of the interlock inputs is active (for
example Intlock = 0) and the corresponding signal status is 16#FF
(Intlock.ST = 16#FF).

Influence of the signal status on the interlock

See also the section Influence of the signal status on the interlock (Page 114) for more on this.

Outputting "Interlock active" using the LockAct parameter

If an interlock is set at the parameter:
• Intlock
• Permit
• Protect
• IntlRev/IntlCls/IntlSp2 (only for blocks with directional interlock
and Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
• PermRev/PermCls/PermSp2 (only for blocks with directional interlock
and Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
• ProtRev/ProtCls/ProtSp2 (only for blocks with directional interlock
and Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
• Trip (only for motors and motor valves),
• PermitSafePos
the LockAct parameter is set automatically to active (=1). The parameter LockAct is set to 0
if the interlock is no longer present and those interlocks which require acknowledgement have
been acknowledged.
You can bypass the interlock using BypProt = 1 in local mode and during simulation. This also
makes LockAct = 0.

Note
The LockAct parameter is not set despite a pending interlock, if a value in the block is forced.
See also the section Forcing operating modes (Page 47) for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

112 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Messaging
No messages are assigned to the interlock types. However, if you want to have a message when
an interlock condition is violated, you can use the freely interconnectable input parameters to
generate the messages. See also the section Generating instance-specific messages (Page 234)
for more on this.

See also
Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 56)

2.1.4.2 Disabling interlocks

Disabling individual interlocks

You can disable the block interlocks that are implemented using the input parameters Intlock,
Protect, Permit, IntlRev/Cls/Sp2, ProtRev/Cls/Sp2,and PermRev/Cls/Sp2.
If you want to disable the block interlock, you have to set the following parameters:
• Perm_En = 0 or Permit.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Permit has no effect.
• PermRevEn/PermClsEn/PermSp2En = 0 or PermRev.ST/PermCls.ST/
PermSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter PermRev/PermCls/PermSp2 has no effect.
• Prot_En = 0 or Protect.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Protect has no effect.
• ProtRevEn/ProtClsEn/ProtSp2En = 0 or ProtRev.ST/ProtCls.ST/
ProtSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter ProtRev/ProtCls/ProtSp2 has no effect.
• Intl_En = 0 or Intlock.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Intlock has no effect.
• IntlRevEn/IntlClsEn/IntlSp2En = 0 or IntlRev.ST/IntlCls.ST/
IntlSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter IntlRev/IntlCls/IntlSp2 has no effect.
• PermSf_En = 0 or PermitSafePos.ST = 16#FF or for VlvAnL when SafePos = 2 :
The input parameter PermitSafePos has no effect.

Note
"Small" blocks have only the Intlock parameter
With "Small" blocks, you can only assign parameters to "Interlock without reset" (input
parameter Intlock or for the deactivation of the interlock for the input parameter Intl_En).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 113
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Disabling of all the interlocks (only for local operation and for simulation)
You can use the input parameter BypProt = 1 to disable all the interlocks, irrespective of the
parameter assignment of the individual interlock, in local mode as well as for the "simulation"
function.

2.1.4.3 Influence of the signal status on the interlock

Influence of the signal status on the interlock

There are three ways in which the signal status affects the interlocks:
• Simulation signal status
• Signal status "Bad, device related" (value 16#00) or "Bad, process related" (value 16#28)
• Signal status ≠ "Simulation" and "Bad, device related"

"Simulation" signal status

An interlock signal is displayed differently depending on the "Separate evaluation for excluded
and simulated interlock signals (Page 164)" function and the status of the interlock (see
"Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 115)").

Signal status "Bad, device related" (value 16#00) or "Bad, process related" (value 16#28)
An interlock signal with this status is always processed as an active interlock signal in the block
and displayed with the following icons in the faceplate:

for 16#00 or

for 16#28 and

A motor protection signal (Trip parameter) with signal status 16#00 or 16#28 is used to
activate motor protection. This is indicated by "Motor protection" in the standard view of the
faceplates.
A torque-monitoring signal (TorqOpen, TorqClose parameters) with signal status 16#00 or
16#28 is used to activate torque monitoring for motor valve VlvMotL.

Signal status ≠ "Simulation" as well as "Bad, device related" and "Bad, process related"
Only signal states "Simulation", "Bad, device related" and "Bad, process related" have an effect on
the processing in the block; all others are only displayed with their relevant icon in the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

114 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.4.4 Forming the group status for interlock information

Forming the group status for interlock information

A group status for interlock information is required for:
• Interlock state for:
– Interlocked
– Not interlocked
– Disabled

Group status for the interlock state

All the effective interlock states are combined and displayed in the block icon. The interlock
states are displayed with the following prioritization:
1. Function interlocked, shown in the block icon with a closed padlock

2. Function not interlocked, shown in the block icon as an open padlock

3. Function disabled, shown in the block icon as a crossed-out, closed padlock

Overview: Display for the interlock status in faceplate

If the Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 164) function is not
enabled (Feature bit =0), the bypass signals in the structures Permission, Protection, and
Interlock are not evaluated.
Interlocks are shown in the faceplate as follows:

Parameter: Parameter: Value: Status: Button Icon Icon

BypProt Perm_En2) or Permission2) Permission2) or
Prot_En2) or or Protection2) or
Intl_En 2) or Protection 2)
Intlock2)
or
PermSf_En PermitSafePos
Intlock 2)
PermitSafe‐
Pos
x x X 16#FF - - -
x 0 x x - - -
0 1 1 16#00 Visible

0 1 1 16#28 Visible

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 115
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameter: Parameter: Value: Status: Button Icon Icon

BypProt Perm_En2) or Permission2) Permission2) or
Prot_En2) or or Protection2) or
Intl_En 2)
or Protection2) Intlock2)
or
PermSf_En PermitSafePos
Intlock 2)
PermitSafe‐
Pos
0 1 0 16#60 Visible

0 1 1 16#60 Visible

0 1 0 ≠ 16#FF Visible Status based on

priority
0 1 1 ≠ (16#FF, Visible Status based on
16#60, 16#00, priority
16#28)
1 (for local 1 x ≠ 16#FF Visible Status based on
mode and simu‐ priority
lation only)

Comments on table:
• X: The value is irrelevant for the display of the icon.
• : Blocks with directional interlock and Feature2.Bit16 = 1: "Perm_En", "Intl_En",
2)

"Prot_En", "Enable", "Interlock" and "Protection" also include the direction

Note
If values are forced in the block, this is indicated in the block icon by a crossed-out, closed
padlock.

If the Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 164) function is
enabled (Feature bit =1), the bypass signals in the structures Permission, Protection, and
Interlock are evaluated. The bypass signals can be read from the upstream interlock block at the
output Bypass.
Excluded interlock signals are shown in the faceplate as follows:

Parameter: Status: Bypass: Button Icon

Perm_En or 2)
Permission or 2)
Permission or 2)

Prot_En2) or Protection2) or Protection2) or

Intl_En2) Intlock2) Intlock2)
x 16#FF x - -
0 x x - -
1 ≠ 16#FF 0 Visible 1)
1 ≠ 16#FF 1 Visible 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

116 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Comments on table:
• X: The value is irrelevant for the display of the icon.
• 1): Icon corresponding to the status of the interlock signal (for 16#80 no icon)
• : Blocks with directional interlock and Feature2.Bit16 = 1: "Perm_En", "Intl_En",
2)

"Prot_En", "Enable", "Interlock" and "Protection" also include the direction

2.1.4.5 Rapid stop for motors

Rapid stop for motors

Rapid stop has the highest priority in all operating modes (manual and automatic mode as well
as local mode) and operating states (such as the forcing of states). It is activated via the
faceplate. This depends on the setting at the Feature bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 182).

Note
"Small" blocks do not feature rapid stop.
The "rapid stop" function is supported only by "Large" blocks.

You issue the command for rapid stop state using the RapidStp = 1 input parameter.
When you click on the "Rapid Stop" button in the faceplate, the drive stops immediately, shown
as follows in the faceplate:

5DSLGVWRS

The R_StpAct = 1 output parameter is set to implement the rapid stop function for local
mode. You need to interconnect this parameter with the corresponding channel block and in the
I/O to realize the rapid stop function in the hardware.
Rapid stop is unlocked for all operating modes using the "Reset" button in the faceplate
(RstOp = 1); in CFC it is unlocked using the RstLi = 1 input parameter. In automatic mode,
the unlocking can also be performed via a 0-1 edge transition in the control if Feature.Bit9
= 1.
Rapid stop can be selected even with the motor in stop state. In this case, the motor start is
prevented.

2.1.4.6 Bypassing signals

Bypassing signals
With this function, you can flag a block as bypassed. If the bypass function is active, the output
parameter BypassAct will be set from the block. With a connection from BypassAct to an
input parameter BypLixx of an interlock block, you can bypass the corresponding input of the
interlock block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 117
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If the block is set to bypass, the bypass information bit of the process output and the limit switch
points listed in the following table are set. If you connect one of this listed parameter with bypass
information bit to an interlock input Inx, you can use the bypass information bit to switch the
interlock signal in bypass. For this in the interlock block the corresponding bypass enable bit
BypEn.Inx and the Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated
interlock signals (Page 164) have to set.
Additionally, you can define over the Feature bit Substitution value is active if the block is in
bypass (Page 202) if the block shall use the process value or a substitution value in case of an
active bypass.

Block Process value/ Process value/ Parameter with bypass information bits
signal signal
MonAnL PV_Out BypPV PV_Out, PV_AH_Act, PV_WH_Act,
PV_TH_Act, PV_AL_Act, PV_WL_Act,
PV_TL_Act, GradHUpAct,
GradHDnAct, GradLAct
PIDConL, PID‐ PV_Out BypPV PV_Out, PV_AH_Act, PV_WH_Act,
ConR, and PID‐ PV_TH_Act, PV_AL_Act, PV_WL_Act,
StepL PV_TL_Act, ER_AH_Act, ER_AL_Act
MonDiL Out BypIn Out
TotalL Out BypOut Out, OutAH_Act, OutWH_Act,
OutTH_Act, OutAL_Act, OutWL_Act,
OutTL_Act

With the parameter BypLiOp, you can decide whether the switching on/off will be done by the
input parameters which are connected in CFC or by the faceplate from an operator.
• BypLiOp = 0: In the "Parameter view", the operator can switch on/off the bypass function
over the parameter BypPVOp or RstBypOp. If BypLock = 1, you cannot make any change
to the parameters BypPVOp or ResBypOp. The button for switching the bypass functionality
on/off in the "Parameter view" is deactivated.
• BypLiOp = 1: With a connection of the parameter BypPVLi or RstBypLi, the bypass
function will be switched on/off.

2.1.5 Form signal status

2.1.5.1 Forming and outputting signal status for blocks

General information on forming and outputting the signal status

The process values of the function blocks are generated and transferred along with a signal
status as a structured variable. This contains a statement about the signal quality. The function
blocks determine the appropriate signal status for their process outputs depending on the signal
status of the process inputs, which are involved in calculating the process outputs. If multiple
process inputs are involved in calculating a process output, the signal status is formed according
to prioritization defined by function block groups. The highest priority is the signal status with
the value 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

118 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The blocks are grouped into the following function block groups:
• Technologic blocks (Page 119)
• Digital logic blocks (Page 121)
• Analog logic blocks (Page 122)
• Redundancy blocks (Page 123)
• Blocks with configurable status prioritization (Page 124)
• Interlock blocks (Page 126)
• Mathematical blocks (Page 128)
• PCS 7 channel blocks (Page 129)
• Channel blocks for field devices (Page 129)
All blocks of a group use the same priority specifications and form the signal status of the process
outputs based on them.

Note
The status / quality of control inputs for logic functions and parameters have no influence on the
status / quality of process values and logic functions of the blocks.
The status / quality of process values inherit the results of mathematic and logic functions, which
are directly related to the process value.
The status/quality of process values immediately inherit the results of monitoring and limiting
functions directly related to the process value.

2.1.5.2 Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks

Forming the signal status for technology blocks

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
In technology blocks, a group status is formed from the input parameters (see description of the
relevant blocks) according to the priority table below (highest priority is 0). This group status is
displayed in the status bar of the faceplate and of the block icon.
The group status is set to 16#68 (Uncertain, device related) with an undefined signal status at
a control input, which is involved in the formation of the group status.

Signal status Priority Value Meaning

icon
0 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value,
simulation, last valid value)
1 16#00 Bad, device related

2 16#28 Bad, process related

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 119
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Signal status Priority Value Meaning

icon
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

Interconnectable output parameters for limits (for example, PV_AH_Act) that can be
influenced directly by an interconnectable input parameter (for example, PV) inherit the status
from the associated output parameter (for example, PV_Out).
If an output parameter for limits is influenced directly by several interconnectable input
parameters (limit monitoring), it receives the status of the input parameter with the highest
priority (see overview above). Thus, for example, the control deviation is formed from the
setpoint (SP) and the process value (PV). The output parameter for limits ER_AH_Act, for
example, which signals an active violation of the high limit for the error signal, has a signal status
based on the group status formed from the process value and setpoint (ER).

Evaluation of the signal status in case of interlocks in technology blocks

The signal states of the interconnectable input parameters of the interlocking and protective
signals are treated exactly like process values with the following exceptions:
• The signal status is displayed in the faceplate at the buttons for calling the series-connected
interlocking blocks.
• If the input signal has "Simulation" status and the input signal is therefore inactive (for
example, Protect = 1), the input signal in this case is interpreted as a bypassed signal and
is displayed by the icon for bypassing:

• If the input signal has "Simulation" status and the input signal is therefore inactive (for
example, Protect = 0), the input signal in this case is interpreted as a simulated signal and
is displayed by the icon for simulation:

• If the input signal has the "Bad, device related" or "Bad, process related" signal status, this is
evaluated as an active input signal, regardless of its value, i.e. safety interlock signal
(Protect = 1) that is inactive due to its value, triggers a safety interlock when its status is
"Bad, device related" or "Bad, process related".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

120 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Display of the signal status in the faceplate and block icon for technology blocks
The signal status is displayed for each individual input parameter in the faceplate next to the
process values or the interlock buttons. The group status is displayed in the block icon and in the
group display of the faceplate.

Note
The interlocks and additional values are not included in the formation of the group status.

2.1.5.3 Forming and outputting the signal status of digital logic blocks

Forming the signal status of digital logic blocks

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The status for the result of the output is formed within digital logic blocks from all input
parameters, according to the following priority table (highest priority is 0)

Signal status Priority Value Meaning

icon
0 16#00 Bad, device related

1 16#28 Bad, process related

2 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐

ue, simulation, last valid value)
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

The group status is set to 16#68 (uncertain, device-related), with an undefined signal status at
a control input that is involved in forming the group status.
A signal status 16#FF at a control input is not used for the calculation of the group status. If all
relevant control inputs are 16#FF, the group status is 16#80.
If only one process input is decisive for calculating the output value, the status of the process
input is transferred to the status of the output.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 121
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Special notes for the Andxx blocks

• If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all input signals.
• If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all input signals,
which have a value of 0.

Special notes for the Orxx blocks

• If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all input signals,
which have a value of 1.
• If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all input signals.

Special notes for the Xor04 block

The worst signal status of all input parameters is always selected and output with the Out output
parameter.

2.1.5.4 Forming and outputting the signal status of analog logic blocks

Forming the signal status of analog logic blocks

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The signal status of the Out output value within the block is taken directly from the Inx input
value.

Special notes for the CompAn02 block

This block evaluates the signal status of the two input parameters In1 and In2 as shown in the
following table.

Signal status Priority Value Meaning

icon
0 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐
ue, simulation, last valid value)
1 16#00 Bad, device related

2 16#28 Bad, process related

3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

122 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.5.5 Forming and outputting the signal status of redundancy blocks

Forming the signal status of redundancy blocks RedAn02 and RedDi02

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The signal status is evaluated according to the following priority:

Signal status Priority Value Meaning

icon
0 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐
ue, simulation, last valid value)
1 16#80 Good

2 16#A4 Maintenance request

3 16#78 Uncertain, process related

4 16#68 Uncertain, device related

5 16#28 Bad, process related

6 16#00 Bad, device related

The output value is generated based on the signal status of the process value with the above
table of priorities. In addition, the output parameters SimAct, Uncertain, and LossRed are
still set according to the signal status.

In1.ST In2.ST Out.ST Out.Value SimAct.Va Uncertain LossRed.V

lue .Value alue
16#80 16#80 16#80 In1 0 0 0
16#80 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#80 16#A4 16#80 In1 0 1 0
16#80 16#78 16#80 In1 0 1 0
16#80 16#68 16#80 In1 0 1 0
16#80 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#80 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#60 16#80 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#60 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#A4 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#78 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#68 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#28 16#60 In1 1 1 1
16#60 16#00 16#60 In1 1 1 1
16#A4 16#80 16#80 In2 0 1 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 123
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

In1.ST In2.ST Out.ST Out.Value SimAct.Va Uncertain LossRed.V

lue .Value alue
16#A4 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#A4 16#A4 16#A4 In1 0 1 0
16#A4 16#78 16#A4 In1 0 1 0
16#A4 16#68 16#A4 In1 0 1 0
16#A4 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#A4 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#78 16#80 16#80 In2 0 1 0
16#78 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#78 16#A4 16#A4 In2 0 1 0
16#78 16#78 16#78 In1 0 1 0
16#78 16#68 16#78 In1 0 1 0
16#78 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#78 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#68 16#80 16#80 In2 0 1 0
16#68 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#68 16#A4 16#A4 In2 0 1 0
16#68 16#78 16#78 In2 0 1 0
16#68 16#68 16#68 In1 0 1 0
16#68 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#68 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#28 16#80 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 1
16#28 16#A4 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#78 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#68 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#28 16#28 In1 0 1 1
16#28 16#00 16#28 In1 0 1 1
16#00 16#80 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 1
16#00 16#A4 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#78 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#68 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#28 16#28 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#00 16#00 In1 0 1 1

2.1.5.6 Forming and outputting the signal status for blocks with configurable status
prioritization

Forming the signal status for blocks with configurable status priority
For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

124 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The SelPrio parameter is used for this block to define the priority setting for linking the
individual states. You have the option between the following specifications:

Priority SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio =

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0

16#60 16#60 16#60

16#80 16#A4 16#80 16#A4 16#80
1

16#00 16#00 16#00 16#A4 16#A4

16#80 16#80 16#80
2

16#28 16#28 16#28 16#60 16#60 16#78

16#A4 16#A4
3

16#00 16#00 16#00 16#78

16#68 16#68 16#68 16#68
4

16#78 16#78 16#78 16#28 16#28 16#28 16#28 16#68

5

16#60 16#60 16#00 16#28

16#A4 16#68 16#68 16#68
6

16#78 16#78 16#78 16#60 16#00

16#80 16#A4 16#80

Special notes for the MuxAn03 block

The status priority for this block, which is used by the block to process the status of the PV1 ...
PV3 process value inputs, can be set with the SelPrio parameter.

Note
The parameter SelPrio can take a value from 0 to 7 . SelPrio = 6 is set by default.
If you enter a value greater than 7, the setting for 7 is used. If you enter a value lower than 0,
the setting for 0 is used.

For information on evaluating the status of the process value inputs, refer to the section
MuxAn03 functions (Page 2351).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 125
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.5.7 Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock blocks

Forming the signal status for interlock blocks

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The block determines the signal status of the output signal, based on the signal status of the
input values from the configured logical operation according to the following table (highest
priority is 0):

Signal status icon Priority Value Meaning

0 16#00 Bad, device related

1 16#28 Bad, process related

2 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐

ue, simulation, last valid value)
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

No icon 6 16#80 Good

No icon - 16#FF Input is not connected

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

126 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

General rules
• If a given input causes a signal change at the output, the signal status of the input with the
highest priority (worst signal status) is set at the output, since each input can influence the
output:
– Logical AND operation (logic = 1):
If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all
interconnected input signals.
– Logical OR operation (logic = 0):
If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all
interconnected input signals.
• If several inputs have the same priority and the output therefore cannot be changed, the
signal status of the input with the lowest priority (highest signal status) is set at the output,
since the output is uniquely determined by the signal with the best signal status:
– Logical AND operation (logic = 1):
If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all
interconnected input signals, which have a value of 0.
Note
With Feature.Bit23 = 1 (evaluation signal status), input signals with a bad signal
status (16#28 or 16#00) are processed with the value 0, regardless of their actual value

– Logical OR operation (logic = 0):

If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all
interconnected input signals, which have a value of 1.
• If no inputs are interconnected, the signal status of the output is set to simulation (16#60).

Display of the signal status in the faceplate and block icon for interlocking blocks
The signal status is displayed for each individual parameter (except for the analog values) in the
faceplate next to the process values.
If you bypass a signal, it is displayed in the faceplate of the interlocking block next to the button
for excluding, as well as in the block icon as follows.

Note
If an excluded interlock signal can become switchover-relevant, the status of the output Out.ST
is set to simulation 16#60, as long as it is not forced by other interlock inputs to Bad, device-
related 16#00 or Bad, process-related 16#28.
An excluded interlock input has no influence on the status when the Separate evaluation for
excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 164) function is enabled.

The currently valid status for the output signal is also displayed in the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 127
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.5.8 Forming and outputting the signal status for mathematical blocks

Forming the signal status for mathematical blocks

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The status for the result of the output is formed within mathematical blocks from all process
inputs involved in the calculation, according to the following table (highest priority is 0)

Signal status Priority Value Meaning

icon
0 16#00 Bad, device related

1 16#28 Bad, process related

2 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value, sim‐

ulation, last valid value)
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

The group status is set to 16#68 (uncertain, device-related), with an undefined signal status at
a control input that is involved in forming the group status.
A 16#FF signal status at a control input is not used for the calculation of the group status. If all
relevant control inputs are 16#FF, the group status in the search for the worst group status is
16#80 and 16#00 in the search for the best group status.
If only one process input is decisive for calculating the output value, the status of the process
input is transferred to the status of the output.

Note
Special notes for the Integral mathematical block
Due to its application area (time integral, I-component for the configuration of a controller), the
Integral block generates the signal status like the technological blocks.

Special notes for the mathematical blocks Addxx, Mulxx, Div02 and Sub02
If the result of the mathematic operation is a floating-point number that cannot be displayed,
the result of the status is set to 16#28. Floating-point numbers that cannot be displayed are
labeled in the CFC with #+Inf (+ infinite), #-Inf (- infinite) or with #NaN (not a number).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

128 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.5.9 Forming and outputting the signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks

Forming the signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks can assume the following values:

Signal status Value Meaning

icon
16#80 Good

16#78 Uncertain, process related:

Limitation of input parameter PV_In is active (analog output
channel blocks only)
16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value, simulation, last
valid value)
16#00 Bad, device related (value not valid)

16#A4 Maintenance required, maintenance demanded

16#68 Uncertain, device related

2.1.5.10 Forming and outputting the signal status for channel blocks for field devices

Forming the signal status for channel blocks (field devices)

For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).
The signal status of channel blocks for field devices can assume the following values:

Signal status Value Meaning

icon
16#80 Good

16#78 Uncertain, process related

16#68 Uncertain, device related

16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value, simulation,

last valid value)
16#28 Bad, process related

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 129
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Signal status Value Meaning

icon
16#00 Bad, device related (value not valid)

16#A4 Maintenance required, maintenance demanded

2.1.6 Error handling

2.1.6.1 Error handling

Error handling
The channel and technologic blocks feature error handling routines. A distinction must be made
between the following areas:
• Error numbers
• External process control error (CSF)
• Process-specific errors
• Invalid signal states
• Mode switchover error
• Errors in channel blocks

Error numbers
Most blocks have an output parameter ErrorNum that can be used to output internal error
states of the block as error numbers.
With some blocks, input parameters are checked for permissible values. They are therefore only
used to prevent the output value from remaining invalid when the input value is once again in
the valid range. If an invalid value is detected, and the corresponding output value is held at the
last displayed value instead of an invalid value being displayed. If blocks do not have this check,
an invalid value can appear at the output. However, a valid value is displayed again at the output
as soon as the input values of the block have changed correspondingly.
Any value set over an interconnection or as a result of a parameter assignment that is outside the
range of values (e.g. "Not a Number") is not processed by the block algorithm. The last valid value
is processed instead.
In addition to the errors stated above, a limit violation is also signaled for example. Each error
number is assigned to a specific error.
If there is more than one error, all error numbers have the same priority. The routine always
displays the error number of the error most recently detected in a block cycle.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

130 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

External process control error (CSF)

An external process control error always lies outside the process - it exists in the form of device
or other hardware faults. If, for example, a run-time error occurs at a valve, there is an error or
fault in the pneumatic system.
A process control error is output if an external error is set at the input CSF. You can enable this
output function, for example, by interconnecting output Bad of the channel block with input
CSF of the technologic block.
The error message "$$BlockComment$$ External error occurred" is output at CSF = 1.
This state is visualized in the group display by an "S" character in the faceplate overview and in
the block icon.
With motor, valve and dosing blocks, there is also the possibility that the block switches to error
processing. Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 164) must be set for this. The device goes into error processing and moves the drive to the
neutral position or switches the dosing operation to off for a doser. If the dosing operation is
already finished, it remains in the completed state. Resetting the error is described in Resetting
the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49).

External error (FaultExt)

The FaultExt input can be used to pass an external error without the generation of a message.
The device goes into error processing and moves the drive to the neutral position or switches the
dosing operation to off for a doser. If the dosing operation is already finished, it remains in the
completed state. Separate messages can be generated by interconnecting the external error
to ExtMsgx messages that can be freely selected. Resetting the error is described in Resetting
the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49).

Process-specific errors
Process-specific errors can have the following causes:
• Runtime monitoring: If the feedback signals do not match the control settings after a selected
time has expired, a process-related error is output.
• Feedback monitoring: Refer to the Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 106) section for more on
this.
If the block algorithm detects a monitoring error while monitoring is enabled, the corresponding
output parameter is set to 1 in the block. The "$$BlockComment$$ Feedback error xxx" error
message is also output, where xxx, for example, stands for the valve.
This state is visualized in the group display by an "S" character in the faceplate overview and in
the block icon.
The block must be reset after the monitoring error was cleared and if automatic mode is set.

Invalid input signals

This error is output if inconsistencies are detected between associated I/Os. The close and open
commands cannot be output simultaneously to the valve, for example.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 131
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If the block algorithm detects an invalid combination of input signals, an error number
(ErrorNum) is output that depends on the block type.
In the case of motors, valves and batches, the faceplates’ standard view will additionally output
the text “invalid signal”.

Mode switchover error

This error is reported if you change the mode of the block from:
• Manual to automatic mode or
• Local mode to automatic mode
and the previous and target state are inconsistent (bumpless switchover). You can only change
the block mode if the subsequent state corresponds with the previous state.
Bumpless switchover can be activated / deactivated using the Feature connection on the
Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 186) or
Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers (Page 186) bit.
Bumpless switchover from local to automatic mode is undertaken using the LocalSetting
parameter, as described in section Local mode (Page 88).
In the standard view of the faceplate, the text "Changeover error" is displayed in the event of an
unwanted switchover with bumps.
The block retains local mode if the operator changes the mode from local to automatic and the
error mentioned above occurs. The block changes to manual mode if the mode is changed from
local to automatic over interconnected inputs and the error mentioned above occurs.

Errors in channel blocks

The following errors may be displayed by the channel blocks:
• Channel error
• Device or module fault
• Higher-level error
• Invalid measuring range

2.1.6.2 Outputting group errors

Outputting group errors

The GrpErr output parameter assembles the faults of a block and makes them available to you.
A group error is compiled from the following error information:
• Feedback errors (static or dynamic feedback monitoring)
• External error (CSF and FaultExt)
• Motor protection (only for motors)
• Module errors (only for hardware controllers)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

132 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

• I/O access errors (only for hardware controllers)

• Parameter assignment errors (only for hardware controllers)
For information on how the signal is formed for the group error at the GrpErr output
parameter, refer to the corresponding block descriptions in the "Functions" chapter.

Note
The signal status of the individual signals is not taken into consideration for forming the group
error. The outputs therefore always have the status, 16#80.

2.1.7 Ramp function

2.1.7.1 Using setpoint ramp

Using setpoint ramp

Starting at the current internal setpoint, the setpoint can be set to a target setpoint value over
a ramp-shaped function. In the faceplate, you can start the function in ramp view (SP_RmpOn
= 1)).

3RVLWLYHFKDQJH 1HJDWLYHFKDQJH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

Use the SP_RmpModTime input parameter or the ramp view of the faceplate to specify whether
the setpoint ramp is defined by time or by gradients:
• If you select time (SP_RmpModTime = 1): The ramp of the setpoint is calculated
automatically by the block so that after the ramp has started (SP_RmpOn = 1), the setpoint
will reach the target setpoint (SP_RmpTarget) after the selected time (SP_RmpTime).
• If you select gradients (SP_RmpModTime = 0): The inclination of the ramp matches the
selected rates of change SP_UpRaLim (positive) or SP_DnRaLim (negative).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 133
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Once the setpoint has reached the target setpoint, the function is terminated automatically
(SP_RmpOn = 0). The ramp trip can be prematurely aborted in the faceplate by setting
SP_RmpOn = 0.
Requirements for using a setpoint ramp

Block Setpoint Gradient limit Operating mode

Controller Internal Off Automatic
OpAnL Internal Off
MotSpdCL Internal Off

If the requirements are not fulfilled during the ramp trip, the ramp trip is automatically canceled.

Note
Special note for the MotSpdCL block
In the case of an interlock, a monitoring error, motor protection or rapid stop, the motor is
switched off and the internal ramp setpoint is reset to the starting setpoint of the ramp trip.

2.1.7.2 Gradient limit of the setpoint

Gradient limit of the setpoint

The gradient limit is activated via the SP_RateOn = 1 input parameter.
The values are set at the SP_UpRaLim and SP_DnRaLim parameters depending on the
TimeFactor.
• TimeFactor = 0: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Second, Unit of ramp time is Second
• TimeFactor = 1: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Minute, Unit of ramp time is Minute
• TimeFactor = 2: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Hour, Unit of ramp time is Hour
• SP_UpRaLim sets the gradient high limit
• SP_DnRaLim sets the gradient low limit

Note
ParametersSP_UpRaLim and SP_DnRaLim are always evaluated according to their magnitude.

With the Feature Bit Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 199), you can also use the
parameters SP_RmpModTime and SP_RmpTime in the gradient limit function. If this Feature
Bit = 1 and SP_RmpModTime = 1 is parameterized, the ramp rate is calculated with a change of
setpoint such that the new value of the setpoint will reach after the time of SP_RmpTime.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

134 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

External setpoint
If the external setpoint (SP_ExtAct.Value = 1) is switched on, the linkable values
SP_LiUpRaLim, SP_LiDnRaLim, SP_LiRmpTime, of SP_UpRaLim, SP_DnRaLim,
SP_RmpTime respectively will be used. The values will be active only if they are connected
(SP_LiX.ST <> 16#FF).

Displaying active limitation

A gradient limit is indicated at the following output parameters:
• SP_UpRaAct = 1: Gradient has a high limit
• SP_DnRaAct = 1: Gradient has a low limit

2.1.7.3 Using a manipulated variable ramp

Using a manipulated variable ramp

Starting at the current internal manipulated variable, the manipulated variable can be brought
to a target value in the form of a ramp. In the faceplate, you can start the function in ramp view
(MV_RmpOn = 1)).

3RVLWLYHFKDQJH 1HJDWLYHFKDQJH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

Use the MV_RmpModTime input parameter or the ramp view of the faceplate to specify whether
the manipulated variable ramp is defined by time or by gradients:
• If you select time (MV_RmpModTime = 1): The gradients of the manipulated variable are
calculated automatically by the block so that after the ramp has started (MV_RmpOn = 1),
the manipulated variable will reach the target value (MV_RmpTarget) after the configured
time (MV_RmpTime).
• Specification with gradients (MV_RmpModTime = 0): The ramp slope matches the
configured rates of change MV_UpRaLim (positive) or MV_DnRaLim (negative).
Once the manipulated variable has reached the target value, the function is terminated
automatically (MV_RmpOn = 0). The ramp trend can be prematurely aborted in the faceplate
by setting MV_RmpOn = 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 135
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Requirements for using a manipulated value ramp:

Block Manipulated Gradient limit Operating

variable mode
VlvAnL without auxiliary valve Internal Off Manual
VlvAnL with auxiliary valve Internal Off

If the requirements are not fulfilled during the ramp trip, the ramp trip is automatically canceled.

2.1.7.4 Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable

Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable

The gradient limit is activated via the MV_RateOn = 1 input parameter.
The values are set at the MV_UpRaLim and MV_DnRaLim parameters depending on the
TimeFactor.
• TimeFactor = 0: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Second, Unit of ramp time is Second
• TimeFactor = 1: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Minute, Unit of ramp time is Minute
• TimeFactor = 2: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Hour, Unit of ramp time is Hour
• MV_UpRaLim sets the gradient high limit
• MV_DnRaLim sets the gradient low limit

Note
Parameters MV_UpRaLim and MV_DnRaLim are always evaluated according to their magnitude.

With the Feature Bit Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 199), you can also use the
parameters MV_RmpModTime and MV_RmpTime in the gradient limit function. If this Feature
Bit = 1 and MV_RmpModTime = 1 is parameterized, the ramp rate is calculated with a change of
manipulated variable such that the new value of the manipulated variable will reach after the
time of MV_RmpTime.

External maniputaed variable

If the external maniputaed variable (MV_ExtAct.Value = 1) is switched on, the linkable
values MV_LiUpRaLim, MV_LiDnRaLim, MV_LiRmpTime, of MV_UpRaLim, MV_DnRaLim,
MV_RmpTime respectively will be used. The values will be active only if they are connected
(MV_LiX.ST <> 16#FF).

Displaying active limitation

A gradient limit is indicated at the following output parameters:
• MV_UpRaAct = 1: Gradient has an high limit
• MV_DnRaAct = 1: Gradient has a low limit

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

136 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.8 Internal/external setting

2.1.8.1 Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30.

Dynamic deactivation of the dead band by the PV settling time

You can use this Feature bit to improve the PV settling time in the range of the dead band.
The deadband is deactivated until the PV settles more in the center than at the edges of the dead
band. The probability that the controlled variable is within the dead zone time is increased, and
further control actions are no longer necessary. This leads to reduced wear and less energy
consumption.
Bit = 0: Dead band width is constant
Bit = 1: The dead band is deactivated for the PV settling time. When the PV settling time is over,
the dead zone gets the value of the DeadBand parameter.

Note
If Feature.Bit30 = 1 is set, the ConPerMon block has to be connected with the controller. The
blocks PIDConL or PIDConR monitor this by checking the status signal of MeanMV.ST. In case
of Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78 the dynamic deactivation of deadband is not
possible and the output ErrorNum will be set to 52.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 137
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.8.2 Setpoint specification - internal/external

Setpoint specification internal & external

Some blocks have a function that allows setpoints to be specified. This specification is carried out
either by means of a CFC/SFC program or by means of the faceplate (operator). With doser blocks
and frequency converters, the operator can specify the internal setpoint value (SP_Int) or a
higher-level open-loop control will specify an external setpoint value (SP_Ext). In principle, the
blocks operate according to the same scheme:

63B/L2S

63B/L2S  63B/L2S 

)DFHSODWH RU6)& &)&6)&

63B,QW2S  63B([W2S  63B,QW/L  63B([W/L 

63B,QW 63B([W

First you define whether the setpoint specification is to be carried out by means of a CFC/SFC
program or by means of the faceplate. In the next step you specify whether the internal or the
external setpoint is to be used.
Setpoint specification by means of faceplate or interconnection

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

138 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With the SP_LiOp parameter, you define whether the setpoint will be set by a CFC/SFC program
or using the faceplate.
• Parameterize Sp_LiOp with 0 so that the setpoint specification is carried out by means of the
faceplate.
• Parameterize SP_LiOp with 1 so that the setpoint specification is carried out by means of a
CFC / SFC program.
Setpoint specification internal & external
You have to set the corresponding parameters depending on how the setpoint specification is to
be carried out.
If the setpoint is set in the faceplate (SP_LiOp = 0), you have to set the parameter:
• SP_IntOp = 1 in order to achieve an internal setpoint specification by means of the
faceplate.
• SP_ExtOp = 1 to have an external setpoint set in the faceplate.
If both signals are set, SP_IntOp = 1 has priority.
If the setpoint is set by a CFC / SFC program (SP_LiOp =1), you have to set the parameter:
1. SP_IntLi = 1 to have an internal setpoint set by a CFC / SFC program.
2. SP_ExtLi = 1 in order to achieve an external setpoint specification by means of a CFC / SFC
program.
Note
For PIDConL, PIDStepL, FmCont, FmTemp: If both signals are set, SP_IntLi = 1 has
priority.

Bumpless switchover from external to internal setpoint

The parameter SP_TrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal setpoint tracks the external setpoint
to achieve a Bumpless switchover from the external to the internal setpoint. This allows
unwanted jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

2.1.8.3 Manipulated variable specification - internal/external

Manipulated variable specification internal and external

The VlvAnl block provides a function for specifying manipulated variables. This specification is
carried out either using a CFC/SFC program or using a faceplate (operator).
If a auxiliary valve is used for operation, it is possible to switch between internal and external in
the both manual and automatic mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 139
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If no auxiliary valve is used for operation, the external manipulated variable is used for automatic
mode and the internal manipulated variable is used for manual mode. It is not possible to switch
between internal and external.

Note
If no auxiliary valve is used and either the "Open" or "Close" command is active, a new
manipulated variable (internal or external) only takes effect after the change. In automatic
mode, the manipulated variable is ignored as long as the "Open" or "Close" command is pending.

Manipulated variable specification using a faceplate or interconnection

You can use the MV_LiOp parameter to determine if the manipulated variable should be set by
a CFC/SFC program or via the faceplate.
• Set MV_LiOp to 0 for manipulated variable specification to be performed with the faceplate.
• Set MV_LiOp to 1 for manipulated variable specification to be performed by a CFC/SFC
program.

Manipulated variable specification internal and external

You need to set the corresponding parameters depending on the selected method for
manipulated variable specification.
If the manipulated variable is to specified via the faceplate MV_LiOp = 0, you have to set the
parameter:
• MV_IntOp = 1 in order to achieve internal manipulated variable specification via the
faceplate.
• MV_ExtOp = 1 in order to achieve external manipulated variable specification via the
faceplate.
If both signals are set, the most recently active state is retained.
If the manipulated variable is set by a CFC/SFC program (MV_LiOp = 1), you have to set the
parameter:
• MV_IntLi = 1 to have an internal manipulated variable set by a CFC/SFC program.
• MV_ExtLi = 1 in order to achieve an external manipulated variable specification by a CFC/
SFC program.
If both signals are set, MV_IntLi = 1 has priority.

Note
It is only possible to switch between internal and external when operating with a auxiliary valve.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

140 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bumpless switchover of the manipulated variable from external to internal

The parameter SP_TrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal setpoint tracks the external setpoint
to achieve a Bumpless switchover from the external to the internal setpoint. This allows
unwanted jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

Forming the manipulated variable externally

With external manipulated variable specification, the manipulated variable is restricted to
the MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim limits and sent to the MV_ExtOut output.

2.1.9 Configurable response using the Feature I/O

2.1.9.1 Configurable functions using the Feature I/O

Configurable functions using the Feature I/O

Some blocks have an input called Feature. This input can be used to influence the way in which
the block works.
The Feature bits are assigned in the following order:

Bit number Meaning Block

0 Set startup characteristics (Page 150) AV, Average, CountOh,
CountScL, DeadTime, Deriva‐
tive, DoseL, FmCont, FmTemp,
Integral, Lag, MeanTime, Mod‐
PreCon, MonAnL, MonAnS, Mon‐
Di08, MonDiL, MonDiS, MotL,
MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, OpAnL, Pcs7AnOu,
Pcs7DiOu, PIDConL, PIDConR,
PIDStepL, RateLim, Ratio,
ShrdResS, TotalL, VIv2WayL, VI‐
vAnL, VIvMotL, VIvL, VlvS
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 190) ConPerMon, CountOh,
CountScL, DoseL, Event,
EventNck, EventTs, FmCont,
ModPreCont, MonAnL, Mo‐
nAnS, MonDi08, MonDiL, Mon‐
DiS, MotL, MotS, MotRevL, Mo‐
tRevSpdL, OpAnL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpTrig, PIDConL, PIDConR,
PIDStepL, Ratio, SelA16In, To‐
talL, VIv2Way, VIvAnL, VIvL,
VlvS, VIvMotL
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 211) MotL, MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
MotSpdCL, VlvS, VlvL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 141
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 174) DoseL, FmCont, FmTemp, Mod‐
PreCon, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, PIDConL,
PIDConR, PIDStepL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS, VIvMotL, Se‐
lA16In
Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16,
(Page 164) OpDi01, OpDi03
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 175) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevl,
MptSpdCL, MotSpdL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VIvMotL
Control priority in the event of invalid or not plausible input commands DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
(Page 189) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvL, VlvS, VlvMotL, VlvAnL,
VlvPosL,
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 211) SelA16In, SelAn16L
Disable limit act output when limit value message is disabled (Page 212) MonAnL, MonAnS, PIDConS, AV,
CountOh, CountScL, TotalL,
PumpMon
Bypass over both connection BypLix OR Inx (Page 215) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 180) DoseL, FMCont, FMTemp, Mod‐
PreCon, MotL, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, PIDConL,
PIDStepL, VIv2WayL, VIvAnL,
VIvL, VIvMotL, SelA16In
Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 197) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvMotL, VlvPosL
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 211) CntOhSc, CountScL, CountOh,
TotalL

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

142 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

5 Specifying the dosing type (Page 159) DoseL
Control via auxiliary valve (Page 185) VIvAnL
Alarm setpoint difference (Page 184) MotSpdCL
Specifying switching mode (Page 181) MotSpdL
Use the last value following a complete download as the current value TotalL
during startup of the block (Page 167)
Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate SelA16In
(Page 170)
Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 170) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
Limit output Out (Page 156) Polygon
Setting the scaling for the process values (Page 161) FbDrive
Activate LowCutOff (Page 168) Pcs7AnIn
Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 155) OpDi01, OpDi03
DoseL, MotL,MotRevL,MotS,
MotSpdCL,MotSpdL,Vlv2WayL,V
lvAnL,VlvL,VlvS, VlvMotL
Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status (Page 200) MeanTime
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 211) PIDConS, PIDConR, PIDConL, PID‐
StepL, FmTemp, FmCont, MPC
10x10, KalFit, ModPreCon, Time‐
Trig, AV, MonAnL, MonAnS,
MonDiL, MonDi08, MonDiS
Timestamp calculation (Page 213) Pcs7DiIT
Reversal of control direction for fail-open valves (Page 214) Pcs7AnOu
6 Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts (Page 175) DoseL
Block as summing unit or integrator (Page 156) TotalL
Disabling opening and closing (Page 171) VIvAnL
Substitute value switch in the event of an error (Page 162) Polygon
Failure handling (Page 150) FbDrive
Vibrate after torque monitoring (Page 192) VlvPosL
Ramp rate calculation (Page 193) PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
MotSpdCL, OpAnL, FMTemp,
FMCont
External/internal selection specification (Page 197) SelA16In
Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode MotSpdCL
(Page 200)
Scalable measuring range (Page 205) Pcs7AnIn
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 211) DoseL
Enable External time (Page 214) TimeTrig

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 143
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

7 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 158) MotRevL, MotSpdCL
Summing characteristics continuous or triggered (Page 187) TotalL
Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale (Page 157) DoseL
Ramp rate calculation (Page 193) VlvAnL
Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator (Page 199) SelA16In
Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor (Page 200) MotSpdCL
2 decimal points (scalable measuring range) (Page 206) Pcs7AnIn
Behavior in the case of Bus failure (Page 211) FbDrive, FbSwtMMS
Switch to AS time if ExtTimeQc <> 16#80 or 16#60 (Page 214) TimeTrig
Use connectable inputs OpenLi, StopLi, CloseLi with CtrlLiOp (Page 215) PIDStepL
8 Unit for the rate of change (Page 160) RateLim
Sealing the valve (Page 189) DoseL
Reporting with BATCH parameters (Page 169) Event, EventTS
Sealing the valve (Page 189) VlvMotL
Switch to substitute value (Page 161) FlowCorr
Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 183) MonAnL, PIDConL, PIDConR
Forcing commands in the Local mode (Page 201) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvMotL, VlvPosL, DoseL
Inverter enable (Page 203) MotSpdCL
Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart (Page 204) ModPreCon, MPC10x10
Status output calculation (Page 204) Integral
Variants of CPI calculation (Page 205) ConPerMon
3 decimal points (scalable measuring range) (Page 206) Pcs7AnIn
AS time enable or Disable (Page 215) TimeTrig
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
(Page 176) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS, VIvMotL
Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 202) MonAnL, MonDiL, PIDConL, PID‐
ConR, PIDStepL, TotalL
Enable external message (Page 202) EventTs, Event16Ts
Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks (Page 208) FbSwtMMs, FbDrive
Button mode with triggered local control commands (Page 212) MotL, MotSpdCL, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, Vlv2WayL, VlvL,
VlvPosL, VlvMotL

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

144 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

10 Exiting local mode (Page 191) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS, VIvMotL
Condition monitoring information at MOD_Blocks (Page 157) FbAnIn, FbAnOu, FbDiIn,
FbDiOu, FbAnTot, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiOu,
Pcs7Cnt1, Pcs7Cnt2, Pcs7Cnt3,
FmCont, FmTemp
Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks (Page 157) FbAnIn, FbAnOu, FbAnTot,
FbDiIn, FbDiOu, FbDrive,
FbEnMe, FbSwtMMS, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7Cnt1, Pcs7Cnt2,
Pcs7Cnt3, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT,
Pcs7DiOu, FmCont, FmTemp,
Pcs7AITC, Pcs7DiCnt
Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
(Page 202) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL , Vlv2WayL,
VlvL, VlvS, VlvMotL, VlvPosL,
VlvAnL, DoseL, OpAnL, OpAnS,
OpDi01, OpDi03, OpTrig
11 Stopping dosing at a flow alarm (Page 149) DoseL
Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 166) MotL, MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
MotSpdCL, VlvL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL
Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 199) PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL
Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message DoseL, FmCont, FmTemp, PID‐
block (Page 204) ConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL, Mon‐
Di08, MonAnL, MonDiL, MotL,
MotSpdCL, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
VlvL, VlvMotL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvAnL, VlvPosL
Understeering / underflow for measuring range 0...10V (Page 212) Pcs7AnIn
12 Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode (Page 155) DoseL
Control zone with specified I component (Page 174) PIDConL
Motor feedback is not available (Page 170) VlvMotL, VlvPosL
Position feedback signals are active (Page 182) Vlv2WayL
Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 199) MotSpdCL, VlvAnL, OpAnL
Disable limit act output when limit value message is disabled (Page 212) PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
ConPerMon, DoseL, VlvPosL,
MotSpdCL, FmCont, FmTemp,
VlvAnL
Selecting the Feature Bit when Namur Off = 1 (Page 215) Pcs7AnIn
13 Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity (Page 181) DoseL
Control zone with frozen I component (Page 173) PIDConL
Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 182) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvMotL
Resetting the Pending Error in Local Mode 1 and 3 (Page 213) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdcL,
MotSpdL, VlvMotL, VlvPosL,
Vlv2WayL, VlvL.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 145
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 182) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VIvMotL
External control deviation (Page 163) PIDConL
Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1 (Page 203) DoseL
With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes (Page 210) PIDConR
Stop position if direction of command changes to an interlocked direction MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
(Page 219) VlvMotL, VlvPosL, VlvAnL
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" ModPreCon, PIDConL, PIDConR,
operating mode (Page 179) PIDStepL, VIvAnL
Frequency converter with separate device feed (Page 164) MotSpdL
Frequency converter with separate device feed (Page 164) DoseL
Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback VlvMotL
signal (Page 201)
Difference MV Rbk is monitored also in end position (Page 219) VlvAnL
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 179) ModPreCon, PIDConL, PIDConR,
PIDStepL, VIvAnL
Process value with separate scale range (Page 175) OpAnL
Setpoint specification with own scale and unit of the parameter (Page 184) MotSpdCL
Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 183) MotRevL, VlvAnL, MotSpdL
Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 208) DoseL
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and DoseL, MotL, MotRevL,
dosers (Page 186) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VIvMotL
With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated varia‐ PIDConR
ble limit (Page 196)
Resynchronization after startup (Page 216) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
VlvAnL, VlvPosL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpAnL
18 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL
(Page 186)
Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 164) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS, VIvMotL
Resynchronization after out of service or after simulation (Page 216) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
VlvAnL, VlvPosL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpAnL
19 Enabling program mode (Page 172) PIDConR
Reset even with locked state (Page 178) MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VlvMotL
Resynchronization after CSF (Page 217) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
VlvAnL, VlvPosL

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

146 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

20 Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and PIDConR
amplification of the differentiator (Page 185)
Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 203) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
VlvPosL, Vlv2WayL
Resynchronization with StateTrkOn input (Page 217) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
VlvAnL, VlvPosL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpAnL
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
(Page 185) MotSpdL, VlvMotL, VlvL,
Vlv2WayV, VlvAnl, DoseL
Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 156) PIDConR
First-in detection response to deactivation (Page 190) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 173) AssetM, AV, ConPerMon, Coun‐
tOh, CoutnScL, DoseL, Event,
EventTs, FmCont, FmTemp, Mo‐
nAnL, MonDi08, MonDiL, MotL,
MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
OpAnL, PIDConL, PIDConR, PID‐
StepL, TotalL, VIv2WayL, VIvAnL,
VIvL, VIvMotL
23 Evaluation of signal status (Page 154) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process DoseL
(Page 160)
SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDConS, PID‐
(Page 195) StepL, FmTemp, FmCont
Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 208) CntOhSc, CountOh, CountScL,
TotalL, MonAnL, MonAnS, MotL,
MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VlvAnL, VlvMotL, VlvPosL
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 172) ConPerMon, CountOh,
CountScL, DoseL, FmCont,
FmTemp, GainSched, Intlk02,
Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16, Mod‐
PreCon, MonAnL, MonAnS, Mon‐
Di08, MonDiL, MonDiS, MotL,
MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, OpAnL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpTrig, PIDConL, PIDConR,
PIDStepL, Ratio, SelA16In, To‐
talL, Vlv2WayL, VlvAnL, VlvL,
VlvS, VlvMotL, KalFilt
With acknowledge overdosage (Page 193) DoseL
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 187) ConPerMon, DoseL, FmCont,
FmTemp, MonAnL, MonAnS,
MonDiL, MonDiS, MotL, MotS,
MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 147
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode ConPerMon, FmCont, FmTemp,
(Page 190) PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL, AV,
MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL,
VlvMotL, MotSpdCL, VlvAnL,
DoseL, CountOh, CountScL, To‐
talL, MonAnL, MonAnS,
CntOhSc, PIDConS
27 Selecting values associated with messages (Page 169) Event, EventNck, EventTs
Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 192) MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VIv2WayL,
VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS, VIvMotL
Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity (Page 172) DoseL
Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks (Page 208) FbAnIn, FbAnOu, FbAnTot,
FbDiIn, FbDiOu, FbDrive,
FbEnMe, FbSwtMMS, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7Cnt1, Pcs7Cnt2,
Pcs7Cnt3, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT,
Pcs7DiOu, Pcs7AITC, Pcs7DiCnt
28 Output invalid raw value (Page 188) Pcs7AnIn, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT,
Pcs7AITC, Pcs7DiCnt
Disabling operating points (Page 158) AssetM, AV, ConPerMon, Coun‐
tOh, CountScL, DoseL, FmCont,
MonAnL, PIDConL, PIDStepL, VI‐
vAnL, FmTemp, PIDConR, MotL,
MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
TotalL, VlvMotL
Reading messages (Page 160) FbDrive
29 Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 162) FbAnIn, FbDiIn, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT, Pcs7AITC,
Pcs7DiCnt
Signaling limit violation (Page 184) AV, ConPerMon, CountOh,
CountScL, DoseL, FmCont,
FmTemp, MonAnL, MotL, Mo‐
tRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, PID‐
ConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL, TotalL,
VIvAnL, VlvMotL
Transmission of status information of devices (Page 188) FbDrive, FbSwtMMS
Output substitute values in case of communications error (Page 206) Rcv_AnaVal, Rcv_DigVal

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

148 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block

30 Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 167) FbAnIn, FbDiIn, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT, Pcs7AITC,
Pcs7DiCnt
Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation (Page 161) FbAnOu, FbDiOu, Pcs7AnOu,
Pcs7DiOu, FbDrive, FbSwtMMS
Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
(Page 176) MotSpdL, MotspdCL, VlvL, VlvS,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL, Vlv2WayL,
CountScL, CountOh, CntOhSc;
TotalL
Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time PIDConL, PIDConR
(Page 154)
Output last values in case of communications error (Page 207) Rcv_AnaVal, Rcv_DigVal
31 Activating recording of the first signal (Page 163) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 178) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, MotspdCL, VlvL, VlvS,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL, Vlv2WayL
Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 208) FmCont, FmTemp, PIDConL, PID‐
ConR, PIDConS, PIDStepL, Con‐
PerMon
Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad (Page 210) Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7DiOu, FbAnOu,
FbDiOu

See also
Flow setpoints in percent (Page 159)
Use an internal or external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity (Page 166)
Polygon functions (Page 2310)

2.1.9.2 Stopping dosing at a flow alarm

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 11

Stopping dosing at a flow alarm

You can use this Feature bit to enable stopping dosing at a flow alarm.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, dosing is not stopped when a flow alarm occurs
Bit = 1: Enabled, dosing is stopped when a flow alarm occurs

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 149
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.3 Failure handling

Feature bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 6

Failure handling
Use this Feature bit to configure "Failure handling" in the case of device failure.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Commands Local and Ackn only active
Bit = 1: All commands active

See also
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 141)

2.1.9.4 Set startup characteristics

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 0

Set startup characteristics

With this Feature bit, you set the startup characteristics of the function blocks, for example, for:
• Motors, valves and controllers
• Channel blocks
• Monitoring blocks, e.g. MonAnL and MonDiL.
• Mathematical and analog logic blocks
• The OpAnL, OpAnS, OpDi01, and OpDi03 block
• The TimeTrg block
• Dosing block DoseL
• Counter blocks
• The Average block
• The TimeTrig block
• The Trigger block

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

150 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.

Note
This Feature bit has no function in the "Out of service" operating mode. The process tag
remains in the "Out of service" operating mode after a warm restart of the CPU.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

Note
With a Run-Stop-Run transition of the CPU and internally pending messages, non-stuck-through
messages with time stamps and auxiliary values beginning with RunUpCycle occur for blocks
with the startup characteristic Feature bit = 0 after expiration of the RunUpCycle counter
in the following cases:
• Alarm, warning or tolerance messages from the operating points (motor, valve, dosing,
controller and analog monitoring blocks)
• Feedback errors (motor and valve blocks)
• Output signals of digital process tags (MonDiL, MonDi08)
• Flutter limits violated (MonDiL)
The restart routines of the blocks reset the following outputs in OB100:
• Operating point outputs xx_AH_Act, xx_AL_Act, xx_WH_Act, xx_WL_Act,
xx_TH_Act, xx_TL_Act or GradHUpAct, GradHDnAct, GradLAct
• Feedback error outputs MonDynErr and MonStaErr
• Output binary signals Out, Out1..8 for MonDiL or MonDi08
• Flutter suppression FlutAct for MonDiL
This causes an outgoing message when initializing Alarm8_P in OB100 and an incoming
message after expiration of the RunUpCycle counter on the cyclic interrupt level.

Note
During a complete download with AS stop, the blocks (with Feature.Bit0 = 1) cannot resume
operation in their previous mode and control when restarted.

Set startup characteristics for motors, valves and controllers

Bit = 0: Starting the block in manual mode and in neutral position. With controllers, the setpoint
is set to (SP_Int) internally. See also the section Neutral position for motors, valves and
controllers (Page 56) for more on this.
The controller blocks PIDConL, PIDConS, PIDConR, PIDStepL, ModPreCon, MPC10x10, and the
valve block VlvAnL have the additional Feature.Bit16, Neutral position manipulated variable
takes effect at startup (Page 179), which specifies whether the neutral position is approached

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 151
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Starting the block with the last stored values, in other words in the last operating mode
set (manual, automatic or local mode) and at the last valid position.

Note
Special note following complete download to the CPU
Following a complete download to the CPU, the motor protection signal Trip is evaluated
during the initial run as good (=1).
When a motor protection signal is pending, this causes a non-struck-through message with time
stamp and auxiliary values beginning with RunUpCycle after the complete download and after
expiration of the RunUpCycle counter.

Startup characteristics for the ShrdResS block

Bit = 0: The output command interface is reset to 0.
Bit = 1: The block leaves the output command interface unchanged.

Defining the startup characteristics for channel blocks

Bit = 0: The channel block uses either the process value PV_In or the value of SimPV_In as the
startup value, depending on the setting of the input parameter SimOn (PV_In = PV_Out
or SimPV_In = PV_Out).
Bit = 1: The channel block uses the value StartVal as the startup value
(StartVal = PV_Out).

Defining the startup characteristics for monitoring blocks

Bit = 0: The most recently stored values are reset on startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently used value at the output parameter Out is output on startup.

Defining the startup characteristics for mathematical, analog logic blocks

Bit = 0: The Out output parameter is reset to 0 on startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently saved value is output at the Out output parameter on startup.

Defining startup characteristics for the OpAnL/OpAnS blocks

Bit = 0: The internal setpoint is used for startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently saved value is output at the Out output parameter on startup.

Defining startup characteristics for the OpDi01/OpDi03 blocks

Bit = 0: The output parameters Out or Out1...Out3 will be reset on startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently used value at the output parameter Out or Out1...Out3 is outputted
on startup.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

152 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Defining the startup characteristics for dosing block DoseL

Bit = 0: On startup, the dosing is ended and reset to the value specified in the input parameter.
For example, the dribbling quantity is reset to input DribbIn.
Bit = 1: On startup (no complete download), dosing continues with the most recently stored
value.
For example, the learned dribbling quantity in output DribbOut can further used.
Messages can be suppressed for a short time after startup. You can set the number of cycles
using the input parameter RunUpCyc.

Note
Advanced configuration of the startup characteristics for the dosing block
Note that you can further affect the startup characteristics of the dribbling quantity via
the Feature2.Bit7 as a function of this Feature.Bit0. Refer to the sectionUse the last
value following a complete download as the current value during startup of the block
(Page 167)

Defining the startup characteristics for counter blocks

Bit = 0: On startup, the counter is stopped and reset to the value specified in the input parameter.
Bit = 1: On startup, counting continues with the most recently stored value.
Input parameters for the startup characteristics of the counter blocks:
• Block CountOh: Input parameter PresetTime
• Block CountScL: Input parameter PresetVal
• Block TotalL: Input parameter PresetVal
Messages can be suppressed for a short time after startup. You can set the number of cycles
using the input parameter RunUpCyc.

Note
Advanced configuration of the startup characteristics for the counter blocks
Note that you can further affect the startup characteristics via the Feature.Bit5 as a function
of this Feature.Bit0. Refer to the section Use the last value following a complete download
as the current value during startup of the block (Page 167).

Defining startup characteristics for the Average block

Bit = 0: At startup, averaging begins with the value that is currently at the input parameter (Out
= In, NumCycles = 1).
Bit = 1: When starting-up, the last Out and NumCycles values saved are used as the last value
for averaging (Out ≠ In).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 153
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Defining startup characteristics for the TimeTrig block

Bit 0 =0: Periodic trigger and single trigger can be shut off. The trigger pulse Trigger is reset.
Bit 0 =1: The activation of the periodic trigger and single trigger as well as the single trigger point
are retained.
The InPerTrigOn, InSglTrigOn and InSglTrigDT inputs are applied for this. If you want to use the
reset for a complete download, you must read back the marked parameters in addition to the
operated and monitored parameters before a complete download.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

2.1.9.5 Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30.

Dynamic deactivation of the dead band by the PV settling time

You can use this Feature bit to improve the PV settling time in the range of the dead band.
The deadband is deactivated until the PV settles more in the center than at the edges of the dead
band. The probability that the controlled variable is within the dead zone time is increased, and
further control actions are no longer necessary. This leads to reduced wear and less energy
consumption.
Bit = 0: Dead band width is constant
Bit = 1: The dead band is deactivated for the PV settling time. When the PV settling time is over,
the dead zone gets the value of the DeadBand parameter.

Note
If Feature.Bit30 = 1 is set, the ConPerMon block has to be connected with the controller. The
blocks PIDConL or PIDConR monitor this by checking the status signal of MeanMV.ST. In case
of Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78 the dynamic deactivation of deadband is not
possible and the output ErrorNum will be set to 52.

2.1.9.6 Evaluation of signal status

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

154 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Evaluation of signal status

You can use the Feature bit to specify if the signal status of the inputs is to be checked for the
values 16#00 or 16#28. The signal status of the inputs itself remains unchanged here.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No evaluation of the signal status for 16#00 or 16#28.
Bit = 1: the signal status is determined, an input with ST = 16#00 or 16#28 is forwarded with
value = 0. The "Negate signal" function at the input of the block has no influence on the reaction
in this case.

2.1.9.7 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals

Feature / Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature / Feature2 bit: 5

Family
Family: Operate number of the Feature bit: 5
Family: Control, drives, dosage number of the Feature2 bit: 5

Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals

You can use the Feature / Feature2 bit to specify if the signal status of the interlock inputs
is to be checked for the values 16#00 or 16#28. The signal status of the inputs itself remains
unchanged here.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: the signal status is determined, an input with ST = 16#00 or 16#28 is forwarded with
value = 0.
Bit = 1: No evaluation of the signal status for 16#00 or 16#28.

2.1.9.8 Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode

Use this Feature bit to enable automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, no automatic post dosing is started for underdosing in automatic mode.
Bit = 1: Enabled, automatic post dosing is started for underdosing in automatic mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 155
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.9 Block as summing unit or integrator

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Specifying the summing unit or integrator function mode

You can define the summing response of the block via this Feature bit.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The block operates as a summing unit.
Bit = 1: The block operates as an integrator.

Note
Special note for the summing unit
Note that the characteristics of the block as a summing unit (Feature.Bit6 = 0) can be further
affected via the Feature.Bit7.
Refer to the section: Summing characteristics continuous or triggered (Page 187).

2.1.9.10 Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 21

Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible

Use this Feature bit to switch all operator controls for the external setpoint to visible in the
faceplates for the OS operator. This is always required when the external setpoint should actually
be used, for example, for slave controllers in cascade and ration controlling.
The default setting is 0, which keeps the faceplate as clear as possible for simple applications.
Bit = 0: The operator controls for the external setpoint are not visible in the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The operator controls for the external setpoint are visible in the faceplate.

2.1.9.11 Limit output Out

Feature bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 5

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

156 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Limit output Out

Use this Feature bit to define the limit for the output Out.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Beyond the end interpolation points, the Out output is extrapolated based on the first
two or last two interpolation points.
Bit = 1: The Out output is limited to the first and last interpolation point.

See also
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 141)

2.1.9.12 Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale

Use this Feature bit to activate calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated
Bit = 1: Calculation activated.
The flow is determined by the change to the dosing quantity per second.

2.1.9.13 Condition monitoring information at MOD_Blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 10
Bit = 0: Not forwarded
Bit = 1: forwarded

2.1.9.14 Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 10

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 157
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Transferring condition monitoring information to the Maintenance Station

With this Feature bit, the data which is entered at the parameters MS_Ext and TextRef will
be transferred to the corresponding driver block and the same data will be displayed on the asset
faceplate of the Maintenance Station. For more information, refer to the Maintenance
Handbook.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Data will not be transferred.
Bit = 1: Data will be transferred.

2.1.9.15 Disabling operating points

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 28

Disabling operating points

You can use this Feature bit to determine if the operating point function of a limit for disabling
the message (MsgLock = 1) should also be disabled.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Operating point is not suppressed
Bit = 1: Operating point is suppressed

2.1.9.16 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Direct changeover between forward and reverse

With this Feature bit, you can enable direct reversal of the direction of motors.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Direct reversal of the direction is disabled.
You can only change the direction of the motor by first stopping and starting the motor again in
the required direction. The motor can only be started again after the time set in the IdleTime
parameter has elapsed.
Bit = 1: Direct changeover is enabled.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

158 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

You can reverse the motor direction directly. The motor block reverses the direction
automatically. The motor is stopped and is started in the other direction when the time set in the
IdleTime parameter has elapsed.

Note
In case of automatic / local mode and Bit = 0:
If additional Feature2.Bit3 =1 Control priority in the event of invalid or not plausible input
commands is active, an automatic / local command for reverse direction is still possible. The
motor stops for the time of IdleTime (minimum one cycle) then the reverse automatic / local
command is plausible and a change of direction take place automatically.

2.1.9.17 Specifying the dosing type

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Specifying the dosing type

You can specify the dosing type to be used for the block using this Feature bit.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Flow
Bit = 1: Scales

2.1.9.18 Flow setpoints in percent

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Flow setpoints in percent

You can use this Feature bit to specify if the doser block should display the flow setpoints in the
faceplate as percentages.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated. The display of the flow setpoints is made in the unit specified with the
PV_Unit parameter.
Bit = 1: Activated: The display of the flow setpoints is made in the unit %.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 159
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.19 Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process

You can use this Feature bit to specify how the doser should react dependent on the signal
status.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Dosing process does not stop with bad signal status of the process value PV.
Bit = 1: Dosing process stops with bad signal status of the process values PV. The doser is also
set to the "Off" state (see state diagram: DoseL functions (Page 1318)).
See also the following section:
• Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118)

2.1.9.20 Unit for the rate of change

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Specifying the unit for the rate of change

You can use this Feature bit to specify the unit for the rate of change:
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: unit for the rate of change in the unit of measurement to or from the field device
Bit = 1: unit for the rate of change as a percentage to or from the field device

2.1.9.21 Reading messages

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 28

Use of the input data

You can use this Feature bit to specify the format for reading messages.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Messages are read as PV freely configurable

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

160 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Messages are read as MsgNamur

Note
This Feature bit is only used when "Telegram type 20" and the "PZD 6" parameter are active.

2.1.9.22 Setting the scaling for the process values

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 5

Calculation for the outputs CurrentLi, Power1Li, Power2Li, FreeLi

Feature.Bit5 defines whether the PZDINXScale is used for the calculation for the other
process values.
Bit = 0: xxxx.Value := (PZDXIn*(100/16384.0));
Bit = 1: xxxx.Value := (PZDXIn*(( PZDInXScale.HIGH- PZDInXScale.LOW)/16384.0))+
PZDInXScale.LOW;

2.1.9.23 Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30

Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation

Use this Feature bit for channel blocks to specify which value is to be output during the block-
external simulation (Simulating signals (Page 66)).
The default setting is 1.
Bit = 0: If process value input has the status 16#60, the output value will be set to the input value.
Bit = 1: If process value input has the status 16#60, the output value will be set to “0”.

2.1.9.24 Switch to substitute value

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 161
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Switch to substitute value

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether a substitute value should be applied or the last
valid value should be retained when certain conditions occur.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Retain last valid value
Bit = 1: Apply the substitute value

See also
Output invalid raw value (Page 188)
Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 167)

2.1.9.25 Substitute value switch in the event of an error

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Substitute value switch in the event of an error

You can specify the substitute value activation at errors using this Feature bit.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No substitute value switch
Bit = 1: The substitute value SubV_In is output at Out for ErrorNum ≠

See also
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 141)

2.1.9.26 Output substitute value if raw value is invalid

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Output substitute value if raw value is invalid

Use this Feature bit to activate output of the substitute value (input parameter SubsPV_In)
for channel blocks if there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase (input
parameter PV_ST 16#4C..4F).
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

162 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the substitute
value is not output.
Bit = 1: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the substitute
value is output. The signal status of the output value is set to "Manipulated value (for example,
substitute value, simulation, last valid value).
If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the output parameter
Bad = 1 is set automatically.

Prioritizing the Feature bits for channel blocks:

You need to assign parameters for three Feature bits for the response to an invalid raw value
for the channel blocks.
If more than one of these Feature bits are set (=1), the following priority applies:
• Output invalid raw value (Page 188) (Feature.Bit28 = highest priority)
• Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Feature.Bit29)
• Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 167) (Feature.Bit30 = lowest
priority)
The raw value is output of none of the Feature.Bit28, Feature.Bit29 or
Feature.Bit30 is set.

2.1.9.27 Activating recording of the first signal

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 31

Activating recording of the first signal

Use this Feature bit to activate recording of the first signal with interlock blocks. Please also
refer to the section Recording the first signal for interlock blocks (Page 60).
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Recording of the first signal is deactivated.
Bit = 1: Recording of the first signal is activated.

2.1.9.28 External control deviation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 163
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

External control deviation

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the external control deviation is to be activated.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The external control deviation is deactivated, the internal control deviation is active.
Bit = 1: The external control deviation is activated.

2.1.9.29 Activating error state for external process control error CSF

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 18

Activating error state for external process control error CSF

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block should switch to the error state at an
external process control error CSF =1.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: : Block does not go to error state with process control error CSF = 1.
Bit = 1: Activated: Block goes to error state with process control error CSF = 1.

2.1.9.30 Frequency converter with separate device feed

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Frequency converter with separate device feed

You can use this Feature bit to specify if a frequency converter with a separate device feed or
the inverter enable should be used.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Motor without device feed or without inverter enable
Bit = 1: Frequency converter with separate device feed or with inverter enable

2.1.9.31 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals

Feature bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 2

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

164 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals

You can use this Feature bit to set the reaction of the block to an interlock signal of an interlock
block that is excluded or simulated.
The default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Switch-relevant excluded and simulated interlock signals are processed with the status
16#60 and are displayed as simulated or excluded, depending on the interlock status.
Bit = 1: Excluded and simulated interlock signals are evaluated separately. All excluded interlock
signals in a sequence of interlock blocks are displayed as excluded. Switch-relevant simulated
interlock signals are processed with the status 16#60 and displayed as simulated.

Note
If the Feature Bit is enabled, the signal cannot be inverted via CFC during interconnections at
the inputs, as, otherwise, the bypass display would not update.
The interlocking inputs of the following blocks are affected:
• Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16: In01, In02, …
• DoseL, Vlv2WayL: Permit, Interlock, Protect
• MotL, VlvL: Permit, Interlock, Protect,PermitSafePos
• MotRevL, MotSpdCL: Permit, Interlock, Protect , PermRev, IntlRev,
ProtRev, PermitSafePos
• MotSpdL: Permit, Interlock, Protect , PermSp2, IntlSp2, ProtSp2,
PermitSafePos
• VlvAnL,VlvMotL, VlvPosL: Permit, Interlock, Protect , PermCls, IntlCls,
ProtCls, PermitSafePos
• MotS, VlvS, OpDi01, OpDi03, PIDConL, PIDConR: Interlock
The inversion of the interlocking signals occurs via the InvIn01, InvIn02, … inputs on the
interlocking blocks.

See also
OpDi01 functions (Page 433)
OpDi03 functions (Page 448)
Intlk02 functions (Page 1970)
Intlk04 functions (Page 1984)
Intlk16 functions (Page 2016)
Intlk08 functions (Page 1999)
MotL functions (Page 1388)
MotS functions (Page 1425)
MotRevL functions (Page 1454)
MotSpdL functions (Page 1573)
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1665)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 165
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

VlvL functions (Page 1708)

VlvMotL functions (Page 1774)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1828)
MotSpdCL functions (Page 1504)
VlvS functions (Page 1744)
DoseL functions (Page 1318)
Influence of the signal status on the interlock (Page 114)
Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 115)
Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock blocks (Page 126)

2.1.9.32 Use an internal or external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Use an internal and external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity
Use this Feature bit to determine whether the doser processes the internal and external
setpoint for the fine dosing quantity in an absolute manner and is displayed or operated in an
absolute manner in the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated. The internal and external I/Os as well as the display and operation of the
fine dosing quantity setpoint are processed in the % unit.
Bit = 1: Activated: The internal and external I/Os as well as the display and operation of the fine
dosing quantity setpoint are processed in the unit that was set using the parameter DQ_Unit.

2.1.9.33 Activating the run time of feedback signals

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 11

Activating the run time of feedback signals

Use this Feature bit to activate the run time of feedback signals.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated: Tracking of feedback for simulation immediately after the trigger signal.
Bit = 1: Activated: Tracking of feedback for simulation after the trigger signal and expiration of
the monitoring time (MonTiDynamic). The feedback signals are generated after expiration of
the monitoring time.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

166 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.34 Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30

Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid

Use this Feature bit to activate output of the last valid value for channel blocks if there is an
invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase (input parameter PV_ST =
16#4C..4F).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the last valid
value is not output.
Bit = 1: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the last valid
value is output. The signal status of the output value is set to local "Manipulated value (for
example, substitute value, simulation, last valid value).
If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the output parameter
Bad = 1 is set.

Prioritizing the Feature bits for channel blocks:

You need to assign parameters for three Feature bits for the response to an invalid raw value
for the channel blocks.
If more than one of these Feature bits are set (=1), the following priority applies:
• Output invalid raw value (Page 188) (Feature.Bit28 = highest priority)
• Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 162) (Feature.Bit29)
• Output the last valid value if raw value is invalid (Feature.Bit30, lowest priority)
The raw value is output of none of the Feature.Bit28, Feature.Bit29 or
Feature.Bit30 is set.

2.1.9.35 Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup
of the block

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5
Number of the Feature2 bit: 7

Use the last value during startup of the block after a complete download of the CPU
You can use this Feature bit to define the startup characteristics of the block as a function of
the Feature bit 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 167
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

This Feature bit is used on the following parameters:

• Block TotalL: OldOut, OldCntOut
• Block CountScL: OldOut
• Block CountOh: OldDays, OldHours, OldMinutes, OldSeconds
• Block DoseL: OldDribbOut
For the settings on Feature.Bit0, refer to the section: Set startup characteristics (Page 150).

Note
If you want to use this function, you must read back the marked parameters in addition to the
operated and monitored parameters before a complete download.

The default setting is 0.

Bit = 0: Define the startup characteristics as a function of Feature.Bit0:
• Counter blocks:
– Feature.Bit0 = 0: The block is set to the default value (input parameter Preset) during
startup.
– Feature.Bit0 = 1: On startup, counting continues with the most recently stored value.
• Block DoseL:
– Feature.Bit0 = 0: The dosing is ended, and the dribbling quantity is set to
input DribbIn.
– Feature.Bit0 = 1: On startup, dosing works with the most recently stored value
of DribbOut.
Bit = 1: During startup of the block after a complete download, the last value (Oldxxx) is used
as the current value regardless of Feature.Bit0 ( Set startup characteristics (Page 150)).

2.1.9.36 Activate LowCutOff

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Activate LowCutOff
You use this Feature bit to activate the use of LowCutOff bits.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Low signal cut-off - OFF (default)
Bit = 1: Low signal cut-off - ON

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

168 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.37 Selecting values associated with messages

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Selecting values associated with messages

Use this Feature bit to select which values associated with messages are to be output.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The signal status of the binary input is output as the value associated with messages.
Bit = 1: The associated analog value is output as the value associated with messages.

2.1.9.38 Reporting with BATCH parameters

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8
Reporting with BATCH parameters
You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block transfers the BATCH parameters
• BatchID: Batch ID
• BatchName: Batch name
• StepNo: Batch step number
Are transferred as associated values to the OS during messaging.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The block does not transfer any BATCH parameters to the OS.
Bit = 1: The block transfers BATCH parameters to the OS.

Note
Information about the setting "Bit = 1:
The Event block can no longer transfer the In8.ST or AV8.Value as an associated value.
The EventTS block can no longer transfer the signal status of the signal In7 and In8 or InTS7
and InTS8 as an associated value.

You will find more information in the following chapters:

• Event messaging (Page 2043)
• EventTs messaging (Page 2069)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 169
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.39 Motor feedback is not available

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Motor feedback is not available

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether or not motor feedback should be available.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Motor feedback is available.
Bit = 1: Motor feedback is not available. The motor feedback is derived from the control signals
internally in the block; this disables the monitoring of the motor feedback.

2.1.9.40 Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether only interconnected input values In01
to In16 (status not equal to 16#FF) should be displayed in the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Display all input values.
Bit = 1: Display only interconnected input values (status not equal to 16#FF) and in case inputs
are not connected, the faceplate size should shrink to the last connected input.

2.1.9.41 Activate OS_Perm bits

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate

You use this Feature bit to activate the use of additional OS_Perm bits in the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: OS_Perm bits XXX inactive
Bit = 1: OS_Perm bits XXX active

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

170 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With XXX:

Block OS_Perm.BitX
Intlk02 16-17
Intlk04 16-19
Intlk08 16-23
Intlk16 16-31

Feature.Bit OS_Perm.Bit OS_Perm.Bit OS_Perm.Bi Operation ex‐ Operation ex‐

5 0 1 t16 clusion "Set" clusion "Reset"
In01 In01
0 1 1 x Yes Yes
0 1 0 x Yes No
0 0 1 x No Yes
1 1 1 0 Yes Yes
1 1 1 1 Yes Yes
1 0 1 0 No Yes
1 0 1 1 Yes Yes
1 1 0 0 Yes No
1 1 0 1 Yes Yes
1 0 0 1 Yes Yes
1 0 0 0 No No

2.1.9.42 Disabling opening and closing

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Disabling the Open and Close commands

Only applicable when no auxiliary valve is used (bit 5 = 0)
Bit = 0: Open and Close commands affect control valve
Bit = 1: Disable the Open and Close commands

Note
Feature bit 6 = 1 only when Feature bit 5 = 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 171
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.43 Enabling local operator authorization

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 24

Enabling local operator authorization

You can use this Feature bit to enable local permission for a technologic block.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled
Bit = 1: Enabled
For information on this operator permission, refer to the section Operator control permissions
(Page 290).

2.1.9.44 Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity

With this Feature bit, you can enable configuration of the dribbling quantity during dosing.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, the dribbling quantity can only be configured in the "End" state or with the
automatic determination of the dribbling quantity (DribbCor = 1).
Bit = 1: Enabled, the dribbling quantity can always be configured, but not in the "Dribbling" state.
The automatic determination of the dribbling quantity must be switched off (DribbCor = 0).

2.1.9.45 Enabling program mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 19

Enabling program mode

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether or not the controller block should be used for
program mode.
Default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The block is not intended for program mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

172 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: The block can be used for program mode. The operator control elements required for this
are then visible in the faceplate.

Note
This Feature bit only applies to the PIDConR block.

What is the program mode?

Program mode provides primary controller functions (external Advanced Control software
package), which run on an external PC as an OPC client, the option of using the control from the
controller function block and specifying the setpoint or manipulated variable from a remote
location.

2.1.9.46 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 22

Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call

You can use the Feature bit to determine if the acknowledgment and error status of the
message call at the block output should be updated.
The default setting is 0.
• Bit = 0: The MsgErr, MsgStat and MsgAckn block outputs are set to the default settings
and not updated. The block will run faster with this setting.
• Bit = 1: The MsgErr, MsgStatand MsgAckn block outputs re updated based on the
feedback of the lower level message blocks. The lower level message blocks are called every
other cycle as long as an acknowledgment is expected or error information is pending.

2.1.9.47 Control zone with frozen I component

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 13

Freezing the I component for control with control zone

You can use this Feature bit to specify how the controller should react to control zone
operation. The I component must be enabled for this TI <> 0.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The I component is set in such a way that the manipulated variable reacts bumplessly
when the error signal reoccurs in the control zone.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 173
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: If the error signal is outside the control zone, the I component is frozen internally. When
it enters the control zone, the controller starts with the value of the I component that was in
effect when it left the control zone.
The reaction depends on additional Feature bits and controller settings. See also the following
section:
• Using control zones (Page 224)

2.1.9.48 Control zone with specified I component

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Specifying I component for control with control zone

You can use this Feature bit to specify how the controller should react to control zone
operation. The I component must be enabled for this TI <> 0.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The I component is set in such a way that the manipulated variable reacts bumplessly
when the error signal reoccurs in the control zone.
Bit = 1: If the error signal is outside the control zone, the I component is set internally as follows:
• I_Part := MV_Offset.
The reaction depends on additional Feature bits and controller settings. See also the following
section:
Using control zones (Page 224)

2.1.9.49 Resetting the commands for changing the mode

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 2

Resetting the commands for changing the mode

Using this Feature bit, you define how the block handles the incoming control commands:
• SP_IntLi and SP_ExtLi for controllers
• AutModLi and ManModLi for controllers, drives, and dosage block
• SaPo_Ext for KalFilt block
• OffLi, UpLi, and DnLi for TotalL block
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

174 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: The control commands are not reset by the block. If there are two pending control
commands for changing mode, the mode is not changed. In this case, the note text "Invalid
command" is displayed in the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The control commands are reset by the block. This, for example, ensures that if a control
command is sent from the SFC, the command is reset automatically after a step is exited.

2.1.9.50 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 3

Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings

With this Feature bit, you select how the block handles commands for the control settings (for
example motor on) via the interconnected input parameters.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The control commands are not reset by the block. If there are two commands relating to
the control settings at the same time, the status of the control settings is retained. In this case,
the "Invalid signal" message is displayed in the standard view of the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The control commands are reset by the block. This, for example, ensures that if a control
command is sent from the SFC, the command is reset automatically after the step is exited.

2.1.9.51 Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts

Use this Feature bit to enable resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, the dosing quantity is not reset when dosing starts
Bit = 1: Enabled, the dosing quantity is reset when dosing starts.

2.1.9.52 Process value with separate scale range

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 16

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 175
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Process value with separate scale range

You can use this Feature bit to assign a separate scale range to the process value. The default
setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Apply scale range from SP.
Bit = 1: PV has a separate scale range.

See also
Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 56)
Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 179)
Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of the
block (Page 167)

2.1.9.53 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Resetting with automatic commands (e.g. OpenAut, CloseAut)

With this Feature bit, you define that an automatic control with its input commands
(e.g. OpenAut, CloseAut) also resets an interlock protection or an error.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No resetting.
Bit = 1: Reset an interlock protection or an error with a 0-1 edge change in the inputs for
automatic commands (e.g. OpenAut, CloseAut).

2.1.9.54 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 30

Set reset depending on the operating mode (motor, valve and dosing blocks)
When the "Protection" interlock, feedback error ("Status error", "Control error") or "Motor
protection" signal is present again, use this Feature bit to specify if a reset can be made
depending on the mode only by the operator in manual mode or only by the automatic I/Os in
automatic mode.
Resetting to manual mode is enabled with Feature.Bit31 (Activating reset of protection /
error in manual mode (Page 178)). Also refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or
errors (Page 49) chapter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

176 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.

Bit = 0: Reset does not depend on the operating mode
Bit = 1: In manual mode, manual reset by the operator is only possible if Feature.Bit31 is set,
otherwise no reset is required in manual mode.
In automatic mode, reset can only be made with automatic I/Os, regardless of
Feature.Bit31. This is performed either with a 0-1 edge transition at the RstLi input or,
when Feature.Bit9 is set, with a 0-1 edge transition at the automatic inputs, for example
OpenAut, CloseAut.

Note
Rapid stop is unlocked for all operating modes using the "Reset" button in the faceplate
(RstOp = 1); in CFC it is unlocked using the RstLi = 1 input parameter.

Note
The local operating mode does not depend on this Feature Bit and has a separate reset
mechanism.

Resetting the dosing mode depending on the operating mode (dosing blocks)
You can also use this Feature bit to set whether or not the reset of the dosing quantity is
dependent on the operating mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Reset does not depend on the operating mode
Bit = 1:In manual mode, only a manual reset by the operator is possible at the input RstDQ_Op.
In automatic mode, a reset is only possible by a 0-1 edge transition at the input RstDQ_Li.

Note
The operating mode Local is independent of this Feature bit. The dosing quantity can be reset
by the operator at the input RstDQ_Op or via a 0-1 edge transition at the input RstDQ_Li.

Set reset depending on the LiOp parameter (counter blocks)

You can use this Feature Bit to determine whether the setting or resetting to a default value
should be made dependent on the LiOp parameter.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Setting or resetting to a default value does not depend on the LiOp parameter.
Bit = 1: Setting or resetting to a default value depends on the LiOp parameter.
LiOp =0: Setting or resetting to a default value can only be made via the faceplate or at the
parameter for the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 177
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

LiOp =1: Setting or resetting to a default value can only be made at the parameter for
interconnections.

2.1.9.55 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 31

Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode

Use this Feature bit to specify whether a reset is necessary once the "Protection" interlock
signal, feedback errors ("Runtime error", "Control deviation"), or "Motor protection" are present
again. See also the following section: Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 49).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No reset required in manual mode.
Bit = 1: Reset required in manual mode. The reset is performed using the "Reset" button
(RstOp = 1) or, in CFC, using the input parameter RstLi.

Note
Rapid stop is unlocked for all operating modes using the "Reset" button in the faceplate
(RstOp = 1); in CFC it is unlocked using the RstLi = 1 input parameter.

Note
The local operating mode has a separate reset mechanism.

2.1.9.56 Reset even with locked state

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 19

Reset even with locked state

With this Feature bit, you specify if it is possible to perform a reset with an active "Protection"
or "Motor protection" type interlock. This can be used, for example, to reset hardware interlocks.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No reset is possible with a "Protection" type interlock or with active motor protection.
Bit = 1: Reset is possible with a "Protection" type interlock or with active motor protection.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

178 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.57 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 16

Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup

You can use this Feature bit to specify if the block should go to the neutral position at startup.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: The block does not go to the neutral position at startup
With control valve VlvAnL, the main valve is closed and the auxiliary valve (if configured) opened.
Bit = 1: The block goes to the neutral position at startup
With control valve VlvAnL, the main valve and auxiliary valve (if configured) go to the neutral
position.
You can find more information in Section Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 56).
Note:
Feature.Bit16 is only effective when Feature.Bit0 = 0.

2.1.9.58 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating
mode

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
You can use this Feature bit to specify if the block should go to the neutral position when it
transitions to the "Out of service" operating mode.
Default position is "0".
Bit = 0: The block does not go to the neutral position at the transition to the "out of service"
operating mode.
Bit = 1: The block goes to the neutral position at the transition to the "out of service" operating
mode.
Refer to the Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 56) section for more
information.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 179
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.59 Setting switch or button mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 4

Setting switch or button mode (input signal as pulse signal or as static signal)
You can use this Feature bit to determine whether a separate interconnectable 1-active control
input has to be used for every automatic command of the block or two automatic commands are
assigned to a control input.
The Feature bit impacts the following control inputs for automatic mode in the form of a pulse
(push-button operation) or a static signal (switch operation):
• Starting and stopping a motor
• Opening and closing a valve
• Switching modes: Automatic and Manual (parameters AutModLi and ManModLi)
• Setpoint specification: Internal and External (parameters SP_ExtLi and SP_IntLi)
is given in the form of a pulse (pushbutton operation) or a static signal (switching mode).

Note
The input commands are checked for plausibility. For more information, see Error handling
(Page 130), e.g. MotL error handling (Page 1396) and Feature2.Bit3 (Control priority in the
event of invalid or not plausible input commands (Page 189)).

You can find the commands for controlling the block in the relevant section on block operating
modes. They are always the parameters that are used for the automatic operation of a block.
Bit = 0: Button mode: Each automatic command is assigned to a control input. This has a latching
reaction and is 1-active.
Example with a motorMotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• FwdAut = 1 for the command "Start forward"
• RevAut = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
• StopAut = 1 for the stop command and
• AutModLi = 1 for setting "Automatic" operating mode
• ManModLi = 1 for setting "Manual" operating mode
Bit = 1: Switching mode: two static automatic commands are assigned to a control input.
Example with a motorMotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• FwdAut = 1 for the command "Start forward"
• RevAut = 1 for the command "Start backwards" and
• FwdAut = 0 and RevAut = 0 for the stop command

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

180 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

• AutModLi = 1 for setting "Automatic" operating mode

• AutModLi = 0 for setting "Manual" operating mode
The StopAut and ManModLi control inputs are irrelevant in this case.

2.1.9.60 Specifying switching mode

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Specifying switching mode

Use this Feature bit to specify switching mode for the motor block.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Switching mode "On over speed 1" with the SwOverTi > 0 parameter
Bit = 1: Switching mode "Off over speed 1" with the SwOverTi > 0 parameter

Note
This Feature bit is only used with the SwOverTi > 0 parameter. Refer also to the MotSpdL
functions (Page 1573) section for more on this.

2.1.9.61 Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 13

Enable: Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity

Use the Feature bit to specify the response for detecting the creep rate in the dosing quantity.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, the creep rate is only detected in the dosing quantity over the limit CR_AH_Lim
(high alarm for creep rate). With CR_AH_En = 0, the creep rate has no effect on the dosing
quantity calculation.
Bit = 1: Enabled, the creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity.

Note
Creep rate is the flow in the states "End", "Off", and "Pause".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 181
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.62 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

Enabling rapid stop via faceplate

You can use the Feature bit "Enable rapid stop via faceplate" to specify if the OS operator can
use rapid stop for the block via the standard view of the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The "Rapid stop" button is not visible in the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The OS operator can use the button for rapid stop.

2.1.9.63 Position feedback signals are active

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Position feedback signals are active

You can use this Feature bit to activate the position feedback signals (FbkP1 and FbkP2) and
deactivate the separate valve feedback signals (FbkV0, FbkV1 and FbkV2). In the trend view
and preview, the position feedback signals and control signals Pos0Out, Pos1Out,
Pos2Out are used for display.
Default: 0
Bit = 0: The valve feedback signals FbkV0, FbkV1, FbkV2 are active. The position feedback
signals FbkP1, FbkP2 are deactivated.
Bit = 1: The position feedback signals FbkP1, FbkP2 are activate. The valve feedback signals
FbkV0, FbkV1, FbkV2 are deactivated.

Note
SafeV0, SafeV1, SafeV2 and DefPos1, DefPos2 are only used for configuring the icon
displays in the OS.

2.1.9.64 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 13

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

182 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor

You can use this Feature bit to activate a separate monitoring time for stopping the motor.
The default setting is 0.
bit = 0: A monitoring time for starting and stopping the motor
Bit = 1: Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor

2.1.9.65 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed

Feature bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 16

Separate interlock for each direction or position

You can use this Feature bit to enable the use of the "Separate interlock for each direction,
position, or speed" function.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: One interlock for each direction, position, or speed.
Bit = 1: Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed.

2.1.9.66 Separate delay times for each alarm

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Separate delay times for each alarm

You can use this Feature bit to activate the alarm delay type Two time values for each individual
limit (Page 232).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 232) is deactivated.
Bit = 1: The alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 232) is activated.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)
Two time values per limit pair (Page 231)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 183
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.67 Signaling limit violation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Signaling limit violation

With this Feature bit, you specify how limit violation should be sent to the respective limit
outputs.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Output value of the limit output = 1 (1 active)
Bit = 1: Output value of the limit output = 0 (0 active)

Note
To learn about the parameters with which you can influence this behavior, refer to the
description of the connections for the respective blocks.

2.1.9.68 Alarm setpoint difference

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Setpoint difference should be alarmed

Use this Feature bit to activate alarming when a setpoint difference occurs.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled: The message for the ExtMsg2 and ExtMsg3 parameters are output.
Bit = 1: Enabled: The messages for the ER_H_Lim or ER_L_Lim parameter are output instead
of the message parameters ExtMsg2 and ExtMsg3.

2.1.9.69 Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 16

Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit

You can use this Feature bit to specify the display area and the unit of the setpoint specification.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

184 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.

Bit = 0: Setpoint specification and readback value have the same display area (RbkOpScale,
RbkUnit)
Bit = 1: The setpoint specification has a separate display area and a custom unit (SP_OpScale,
SP_Unit)

2.1.9.70 Control via auxiliary valve

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Control via a auxiliary valve

You can use this Feature bit to specify if control should be performed by a auxiliary valve.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Control without auxiliary valve / no auxiliary valve present
Bit = 1: Control via auxiliary valve

2.1.9.71 Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and
amplification of the differentiator

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 20

Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and amplification of the
differentiator
Use this Feature bit to enable bumpless change to proportional gain Gain, derivative action
time TD and gain of the differentiator in automatic mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The bumpless switchover is deactivated.
Bit = 1: The bumpless switchover is activated.

2.1.9.72 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 21

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 185
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Enable bumpless switchover to automatic mode for operator only

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether bumpless switchover to automatic mode for
valves, motors and dosing unit should be enabled only if switching via the faceplate is in effect,
or whether switching using interconnectable inputs AutModLi and ManModLi (ModLiOp =
1) is also possible.
The default setting is 0
Bit = 0: The function "Bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors and dosers"
works when switching via the faceplate and switching using interconnectable inputs AutModLi
and ManModLi (ModLiOp = 1).
Bit = 1: Bumping switchover can be activated via the inputs AutModLi and ManModLi
(ModLiOp = 1)

2.1.9.73 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 18

Changeover with or without P step change when the internal setpoint is not in tracking mode
Use this Feature bit to specify if a changeover should occur with or without a P step change
when the internal setpoint (SP_TrkPv = 0) does not track the process value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Changeover without P step change (bumpless)
Bit = 1: Changeover with P step change (not bumpless)
For more detailed information, refer to the description of Manual and automatic mode for
control blocks (Page 81).

2.1.9.74 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 17

Bumpless switchover
You can use this Feature bit to enable the bumpless switchover from local/manual mode to
automatic mode.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Bumpless switchover is disabled. You can switch from local/manual mode to automatic
mode at any time.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

186 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Bumpless switchover from local/manual mode to automatic mode is enabled. A

switchover from local/manual mode to automatic mode is only possible if the control settings of
the local/manual mode and automatic modes match. If switchover occurs at a different point in
time, this is indicated in the faceplate with the text "Switchover error".
Refer to the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 84) section for
more on this.
A second Feature bit is used to specify if pure bumpless switchover to automatic mode is only
possible via the faceplate or if switching is also possible via the interconnectable parameters
AutModLi and ManModLi (ModLiOp = 1).
Refer to the section Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only
(Page 185).

2.1.9.75 Summing characteristics continuous or triggered

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Define summing characteristics

You can use this Feature bit to define the summing characteristics of the block as a function
of the Feature.Bit6 = 0. If you have set the Feature.Bit6 = 1, this Feature bit has no
function.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Triggered summing characteristics.
Bit = 1: Continuous summing characteristics.

2.1.9.76 Suppression of all messages

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 25

Suppression of all messages

You can use this Feature bit to determine whether all messages of the block are to be
suppressed.
Bit = 0: Process messages are suppressed.
Bit = 1: All messages are suppressed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 187
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.77 Output invalid raw value

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 28

Output invalid raw value

Use this Feature bit to activate output of the invalid raw value for channel blocks.
Default setting is 1
Bit = 0: The invalid raw value is not output. Either the substitute value (Feature bit Output
substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 162)) or the last valid value (Feature bit
Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 167)) is output.
Bit = 1: The invalid raw value is output. The signal status of the output value is set to "Bad, device
related" or "Bad, process related".
If there is no valid raw value the output parameter Bad = 1 is set automatically.

Prioritizing the Feature bits for channel blocks:

You need to assign parameters for three Feature bits for the response to an invalid raw value
for the channel blocks.
If more than one of these Feature bits are set (=1), the following priority applies:
• Output invalid raw value (Feature.Bit28 = highest priority)
• Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 162) (Feature.Bit29)
• Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 167) (Feature.Bit30 = lowest
priority)
The raw value is output of none of the Feature.Bit28, Feature.Bit29 or
Feature.Bit30 is set.

Note
FbAnOu
With V9.1 SP2, the channel block supports also the output of an invalid raw value for inputs Rbk,
PosD, RCasOut. To ensure backward compatibility the default is "0" and not "1".

2.1.9.78 Transmission of status information of devices

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

188 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Transmission of status information of devices

You can use this Feature bit to specify if status information of the device should be transferred
to the upstream diagnostics block.
The default setting is 1.
Bit = 0: No transfer of status information.
Bit = 1: Transfer status information of the device to the upstream diagnostics block.

2.1.9.79 Control priority in the event of invalid or not plausible input commands
Feature2 Bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 3

Control priority in the event of invalid or not plausible input commands

You can use this function to define the control priority in the event of invalid or not plausible
input commands.
Default setting: 0
Bit = 0: In the event of invalid or not plausible input commands, the control output is retained.
Bit = 1: In the event of invalid or not plausible input commands, the control output switches to
the "neutral position".

Note
To Bit = 1:
A change of direction in automatic / local mode with block MotRevL, MotSpdCL is possible
although the Feature.Bit7 =0 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse is
not parameterized. The motor stops for the time of IdleTime (minimum one cycle) then the
reverse automatic / local command is plausible and a change of direction take place
automatically.

2.1.9.80 Sealing the valve

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Sealing the valve

You can use this Feature to enable the valve sealing function. The torque shutoff is then also
evaluated when the valve is closed.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: "Seal valve" function is disabled.
Bit = 1: "Seal valve" function is enabled.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 189
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.81 First-in detection response to deactivation

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 21

First-in detection response to deactivation

You can use this Feature Bit to define the first-in detection response of the interlock blocks
depending on the FirstInEn = 0 input parameter.
The default setting is 0.
• Bit = 0: When first-in detection is deactivated via FirstInEn = 0, the output
parameter FirstIn is reset.
• Bit = 1: When first-in detection is deactivated via FirstInEn =0, the output
parameter FirstIn is maintained. When first-in detection is activated for the first time by an
edge change of FirstInEn 0->1, the output parameter FirstIn is reset.

2.1.9.82 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode
Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 26

Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode

You can use this Feature bit to specify the reaction of the switching points to the "Out of
service" operating mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Last state of the switching points before switching to the "Out of service" operating mode
is retained.
Bit = 1: The state of the switching points is reset to "Good".

Note
The Feature "Changes signal status of outputs in OOS" has higher priority over the Feature
"Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode".

2.1.9.83 Reaction to the out of service mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

190 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Reaction to the out of service mode

You can use this Feature bit to define the reaction of the technologic block based on the
interconnectable input parameter OosLi = 1.
The default setting is 0.
• Bit = 0: The symbol for the "In progress" status (see below) appears in the block icon and in
the faceplate of the assigned technologic block. A 0-1 edge transition at the input
parameter OosLi has no further influence on the reaction of the technological block; the
previous status is retained. No switch to the "Out of service" mode is performed.
• Bit = 1: The mode switches to "Out of service" assuming that the block is "On" or "Manual"
mode. If this is not the case, the mode does not change. The symbol for the "In progress" (see
below) status also appears in the block icon and in the faceplate of the assigned technologic
block regardless of the mode change. No message is output to indicate whether or not the
mode change took place.
The status display for "In progress" appears as follows:

A 1-0 edge transition at the input parameter OosLi has no influence on the reaction of the
technologic block, the previous status is retained.
See also the section Release for maintenance (Page 72) for more on this.

2.1.9.84 Exiting local mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 10

Reaction to exiting local mode

Use this Feature bit to define how "Local mode" is be exited with LocalSetting = 1
or LocalSetting = 2 and if the mode is not specified by AutModLi or ManModLi.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Exiting local mode in manual mode (bumpless because the control signals are
continuously adjusted).
Bit = 1: When local mode is exited, the mode changes back to the last mode that was active prior
to local mode (not bumpless).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 191
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

For more detailed information, refer to the description of Local mode (Page 88).

Note
Functionality of "Feature.Bit10" is supressed over "Feature.Bit17"
When Feature.Bit17=1 and Feature.Bit10=1 , after a change from “Automatic Mode” to
“Local Mode” the block leaves the “Local Mode” in case of not matching commands to "Manual
Mode" and not to "Automatic mode".

2.1.9.85 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4

Use this Feature bit to specify the display of interlocks with LocalSetting 2 or 4 at the
faceplate and at the block output LockAct .
The default setting is 0
Bit = 0: LocalSetting 2 and 4 crossed out locks are displayed in the standard view.
LockAct is not set with interlock.
Bit = 1: LocalSetting 2 and 4 locks are displayed in the standard view according to the
interlock. LockAct is set according to interlock. This setting is used for hardware interlock.

Note
A decreasing motor protection (Trip.Value=0) is displayed at the output
parameter LockAct, regardless of the Feature bit setting.
This Feature bit is also applicable for the LocalSetting 5 in VlvS.

2.1.9.86 Vibrate after torque monitoring

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 6

Vibrate after torque monitoring

You can use this Feature2 bit to determine whether vibration should be started after a torque
monitoring error TorqOpen or TorqClose.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No vibration.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

192 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Vibration is started after a torque monitoring error.

2.1.9.87 With acknowledge overdosage

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 24

With acknowledge overdosage

You can use this Feature2 bit to change the acknowledgment behavior of overdosage and
underdosage.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: After an overdosage is identified, the block changes directly to the “End” state.
Bit = 1: After an overdosage is identified, the block changes and continues to be in the “Off” state.
An acknowledgment is necessary to change the dosing state to “End”. In the standard view,
status display shows the state “Ack Dos End”.

2.1.9.88 Ramp rate calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6 (7 for VlvAnL)

Define ramp gradient after a change of ramp target value

You can use this Feature bit in the standard functions “Using setpoint ramp” or “Using a
manipulated variable ramp” to define the new ramp gradient after a change of ramp target value
during a ramp trip.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0:
New ramp gradient is calculated with the start point of ramp trip and the new ramp target value.
Ramp mode =Gradient:
Ramp gradient stays Constant. Ramp Trip is aborted, if new ramp target value crosses the
instantaneous ramp trip value. After an abort the setpoint is tracked to the ramp target value.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 193
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Ramp gradient changes if new ramp target value is at the other side of the start point. Ramp Trip
is not aborted.

• SP_RmpTarget: Ramp target value

• SP: Setpoiont
• SP_RmpOn: Ramp On/Off
Ramp mode =Duration:
Ramp gradient will be adapted. Ramp Trip is aborted,if new ramp target value crosses the
instantaneous ramp trip value. After an abort the setpoint is tracked to the ramp target value.
The remaining ramp time is adapted (not reset), because the calculation of ramp gradient
depends on start point and causes the increase of remaining ramp time.

• SP_RmpTarget: Ramp target value

• SP: Setpoiont
• SP_RmpOn: ramp On/Off
• SP_RemRT: Remaining ramp time

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

194 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1:
Ramp rate is calculated with the actual SP or MV and the new ramp target value.
Ramp mode =Gradient:
Ramp gradient stays Constant . Ramp Trip is not aborted,if new ramp target value crosses the
instantaneous ramp trip value.

• SP_RmpTarget: Ramp target value

• SP: Setpoiont
• SP_RmpOn: ramp On/Off
Ramp mode =Duration:
Ramp gradient will be adapted. Ramp Trip is not aborted,if new ramp target value crosses the
instantaneous ramp trip value. The ramp remaining time is completely reset with every change
of ramp target value.

• SP_RmpTarget: Ramp target value

• SP: Setpoiont
• SP_RmpOn: ramp On/Off
• SP_RemRT: Remaining ramp time

2.1.9.89 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 195
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the setpoint follows the process value in
"manual mode" with tracking (SP_TrkPV = 1). You can specify this function in case of setpoint
is external or limited.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Setpoint follows process value (SP = PV) irrespective of whether setpoint is external or
limited.
Bit = 1: If the setpoint is external, setpoint follows the external setpoint (SP = SP_Ext) and will
be limited to the external limits (SP_ExHiLim and SP_ExLoLim). If the setpoint is internal,
setpoint follows the process value (SP = PV) and will be limited to the internal limits
(SP_InHiLim and SP_InLoLim).

2.1.9.90 With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 17

With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit
When switching to the automatic mode (manually, by tracking, forced tracking, or program
mode with manipulated variable specification) or when the controller is initialized by
the InitPid input, the integral action (reset) is moved to preserve bumpless operation in case
of an impending control deviation. The greater the control deviation and the controller gain, the
greater is this shift. The result may be that the integral action is set far outside the manipulated
variable limits. If the control deviation decreases after switching to the automatic mode, it may
happen that in controllers with large TI values, the manipulated variable stays within the limit
for a longer duration.
You can use this Feature bit to accelerate the return of the integral action from the limit. In case
of a pending control deviation, the integral action is moved only in the direction of the control
range to the extent that the manipulated variable can remove itself quickly and bumplessly from
the manipulated variable limits (MV_HiLim/MV_LoLim).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Without accelerated return of the integral action.
Bit = 1: With accelerated return of the integral action when the integral action and the
manipulated variable are outside or at the manipulated variable limits.

Note
In regular control mode, the integral action cannot move outside the manipulated variable limits
because the manipulated variable is limited first and then fed back to the reset memory (see also
anti-windup in PIDConR functions (Page 1109)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

196 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.91 External/internal selection specification

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

External/internal selection specification

You can use this Feature bit to switch from the faceplate between internal and external
selection of the inputs In01 to In10 (SelInt or SelExt).
The default setting is 0.
• Bit = 0:

LiOp = 0 Selection of In01 to In16 is internal; SelInt is active and can be used via faceplate.
LiOp = 1 Selection of In01 to In16 is external; SelExt is active and can be used via inter‐
connection.

• Bit = 1:

LiOp = 0 With the input parameter SelIntOp or SelExtOp, you can change the selection
between internal (SelInt) and external (SelExt) via faceplate.
LiOp = 1 With the input parameter SelIntLi or SelExtLi, you can change the selection
between internal (SelInt) and external (SelExt) via interconnection.

2.1.9.92 Setting switch or button mode for local commands

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 4

Setting switch or button mode for local commands (input signal as pulse signal or as static signal)
You can use this Feature2 bit to determine whether a separate interconnectable 1-active
control input has to be used for every local command of the block or two local commands are
assigned to a control input.
The Feature2 bit affects the following control inputs for local mode in the form of a pulse
(pushbutton operation) or a static signal (switching mode):
• Starting and stopping a motor
• Opening and closing a valve

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 197
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Note
• The input commands are checked for plausibility. For more information, see Error handling
(Page 130), e.g. MotL error handling (Page 1396) and Feature2.Bit3 (Control priority in
the event of invalid or not plausible input commands (Page 189)).
• With Feature2.Bit9 =1 (Button mode with triggered local control commands
(Page 212)), the local input commands for button mode always need a 0->1 trigger to
activate the control output signal.

You can find the commands for controlling the block in the relevant section on block operating
modes. They are always the parameters that are used for the local operation of a block.
Bit = 0: Button mode: Each local command is assigned to a control input. This has a latching
reaction and is 1-active.
1. Example with a motor MotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• FwdLocal = 1 for the command "Start forward"
• RevLocal = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
• StopLocal = 1 for the stop command
Bit = 1: Switching mode: two static local commands are assigned to a control input.
2. Example with a motor MotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• FwdLocal = 1 for the command "Start forward"
• RevLocal = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
• FwdLocal = 0 and RevLocal = 0 for the stop command
The StopLocal control input is irrelevant in this case.
3. Example with motor MotSpdL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• Spd1Local = 1 for the command Motor to run with Speed1
• Spd2Local = 1 for the command Motor to run with Speed2
• Spd1Local = 0 and Spd2Local = 0 for the stop Command
4. Example with motor MotSpdCL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• FwdLocal = 1 for the command "Start forward"
• RevLocal = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
• FwdLocal = 0 and RevLocal = 0 for the stop command
5. Example with VlvPosL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• OpenLocal = 1, Command for Valve to "Open”
• CloseLocal = 1, Command for Valve to "Close”
• OpenLocal = 0 and CloseLocal = 0 for the stop command

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

198 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

6. Example with Vlv2WayL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
• Pos1Local = 1, Command for Valve1 to "Open"
• Pos2Local = 1, Command for Valve2 to "Open"
• Pos1Local = 0 and Pos2Local = 0, Command for "Position 0" (neutral position),
7. Example with VlvL
• OpenLocal = 1, Command for Valve to "Open"
• OpenLocal = 0, Command for Valve to "Close"
With Feature2.Bit4 = 1, two static local commands are assigned to a control input.

2.1.9.93 Gradient limitation with time duration

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit:
• 11 for PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL
• 12 for MotSpdCL, VlvAnL, and OpAnL

Gradient limitation with time duration

You can use this Feature bit to ramp up or ramp down the setpoint SP respectively MV as a
function of time duration. With this Feature bit, the gradient limitation function can also work
with the time duration.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Gradient limitation works only with the gradient values: SP/MV_UpRaLim, SP/
MV_DnRaLim
Bit = 1: Gradient limitation also works with the time duration with the following parameters: SP/
MV_RmpModTime, SP/MV_RmpTime.

2.1.9.94 Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator

You can use this Feature bit to reserve the analog input 1 (In01) for the operator.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Operator cannot use the analog input 1 (In01).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 199
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Operator can change the value of analog input 1 (In01) if the input is not connected and
OS_Perm.Bit22 is set to 1.

2.1.9.95 Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 6

Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode
You can use this Feature2 bit to enable the input of a setpoint for the operator in the "Local"
mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Operator cannot change the setpoint in the "Local" mode.
Bit = 1: Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate in the "Local" mode.

2.1.9.96 Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 7

Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor

You can use this Feature2 bit to define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The setpoint is retained after the motor is stopped.
Bit = 1: After the motor is stopped, the setpoint will be set to SP_Off. If the motor is started and
the setpoint is in internal mode, the setpoint will be set to the low limitation SP_LoLim. Up to
this value, the internal setpoint can be changed. In case the setpoint is external after the start
of the motor, the setpoint will be changed directly to the external setpoint. The low limitation
will be limited downwards to SP_Off and will be written back if the limitation is reached.

2.1.9.97 Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

200 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status

You can use this Feature bit to specify that the block holds its output value if the input signal
status is bad (16#00 or 16#28).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Default state of the block.
Bit = 1: Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status.

2.1.9.98 Forcing commands in the Local mode

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 8

Forcing commands in the Local mode

You can use this Feature2 bit to specify whether forcing commands is possible in the "Local"
modes "1" and "3".
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: In the "Local" mode, forcing commands is not possible.
Bit = 1: In the "Local" mode, forcing commands is possible.

2.1.9.99 Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal
With this Feature bit, you can specify whether the motor stop in end position depends only on
the corresponding feedback signal or on both feedback signals.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Motor stop in end position depends on two feedback signals (FbkOpen and FbkClose).
For example, motor stop in the end position "Open" depends on both feedback signals "Opened"
and "Closed". In this case, FbkOpen = 1 and FbkClose = 0 are parameterized such that the drive
output control of the motor "Open" is reset.
Bit = 1: Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal. For
example, motor stop in the end position "Open" depends only on the feedback signal "Opened".
In this case, only FbkOpen = 1 is parameterized such that the drive output control of the motor
"Open" is reset.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 201
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.100 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass

You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block uses the process value or a
substitution value in case of an active bypass.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Block will use the process value (PV/In/Out).
Bit = 1: Block will use the substitution value (BypPV/BypIn/BypOut).

2.1.9.101 Enable external message

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Enable external message

You can use this Feature bit to specify if you want to use the quality code of Inx/InTSx or the
external values ExtValxx as the associated value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Use quality code of Inx or InTSx as the associated value.
Bit = 1: Use external values ExtValxx as the associated value.

2.1.9.102 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature/Feature2 bit: 10

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values

You can use this Feature/Feature2 bit to consider the bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28)
in the parameter for the automatic commands or external values to move the block into the
neutral position.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: A bad signal status will not be considered.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

202 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: A bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) in the automatic commands or external values will
be considered from the block. The block goes to a defined neutral position.

2.1.9.103 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 20

Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4

You can use this Feature bit to disable the tracking of feedback signals in the "Local" mode
setting 2 and 4.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Calculation of impulse controls in LocalSetting 2 and 4.
Bit = 1: Disable calculation of Impulse controls in LocalSetting 2 and 4.

2.1.9.104 Inverter enable

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Inverter enable
You can use this Feature bit to specify whether, after the activation of Feature.Bit15
(Feature.Bit15 = 1), a frequency converter with a separate device infeed is to be used or the
inverter enable.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Frequency converter with separate device infeed
Bit = 1: Inverter enable

2.1.9.105 Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1

You can use this Feature bit to specify the start of scale dosing.
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 203
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: Start scale dosing independent of standstill.

Bit = 1: Start scale dosing only with StandStill = 1

2.1.9.106 Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart

You can use this Feature bit to determine whether the history of MV and DV moves will be
deleted after CPU restart or block restart.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The history of MV and DV will be deleted only after CPU restart if OB100 is running.
Bit = 1: The history of MV and DV will be deleted after CPU restart and also after a block restart
(Restart = 1), if user DBs/FCs will be loaded in controller.

2.1.9.107 Status output calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Status output calculation

You can use this Feature bit to define how the block calculates the status of output Out.
Bit = 0: The Status output is calculated with actual status input In.ST and the last status output
Out.ST. The block makes a worst status calculation like technological blocks over the whole
integration. With function "Tracking values" (OutTrkOn = 1) the status is reset to OutTrk.ST.
Bit = 1: The Status output is equal to status input (Out.ST = In.ST).

2.1.9.108 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 11

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

204 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block
With this Feature/Feature2 bit, you can suppress the message lock with the
parameter MsgLock and the switchover to the “Out of service” mode for a connected message
block (EventTs, Event16Ts). Only the connected block over the parameter EventTsIn is
concerned. This allows generating messages also in the case of MsgLock = 1 or during a
switchover to the "Out of Service" mode in the main block. For example, if the main block goes
to the “Out of service” mode, the switchover can be messaged over a connection from the main
block output OosAct to an input Inx of EventTs/Event16Ts.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No suppression.
Bit = 1: A message lock with the parameter MsgLock and a switchover to the “Out of service”
mode are supressed for connected message block over EventTsIn.

2.1.9.109 Variants of CPI calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Variants of CPI calculation

With this Feature bit, you can choose between the two variants of CPI calculation.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Approximate calculation with reduced computing power consumption.
Bit = 1: More precise calculation corresponding to mathematical definition of variance.

Note
If you change the variant of calculation, the limits CPI_AL_Lim and CPI_WL_Lim may have to
be adapted.

2.1.9.110 Scalable measuring range

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Scalable measuring range

With this Feature bit, the scalable measuring range is activated. This Feature bit is used by
the driver generator according to the information from the HW Config / STEP 7 attribute and
therefore this Feature bit is set by the driver wizard.
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 205
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: Scalable measuring range is not active.

Bit = 1: Scalable measuring range is active.

2.1.9.111 2 decimal points (scalable measuring range)

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

2 decimal points (scalable measuring range)

With this Feature bit, the measuring range resolution is set to 2 decimal points. This Feature
bit is used by the driver generator according to the information from the HW Config / STEP 7
attribute and therefore this Feature bit is set by the driver wizard.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Measuring range resolution is not set to 2 decimal points.
Bit = 1: Measuring range resolution is set to 2 decimal points.

2.1.9.112 3 decimal points (scalable measuring range)

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

3 decimal points (scalable measuring range)

With this Feature bit, the measuring range resolution is set to 3 decimal points. This Feature
bit is used by the driver generator according to the information from the HW Config / STEP 7
attribute and therefore this Feature bit is set by the driver wizard.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Measuring range resolution is not set to 3 decimal points.
Bit = 1: Measuring range resolution is set to 3 decimal points.

2.1.9.113 Output substitute values in case of communications error

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

206 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Output substitute values in case of communications error

Use this Feature bit to specify if substitute values are to be outputted in case of communication
error.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Substitute values are not outputted in case of communication error.
Bit = 1: Substitute values are outputted in case of communications error

Note
FbAnOu
With V9.1 SP2, the channel block supports also the output a substitute value for Rbk. In case of
a invalid Rbk raw value the substitute vakue SubstRbk is output.

2.1.9.114 Output last values in case of communications error

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Output last values in case of communications error

Use this Feature bit to specify if last values are to be outputted in case of communication error.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Last values are not outputted in case of communication error.
Bit = 1: Last values are outputted in case of communications error.

2.1.9.115 Dosing controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

The dosing controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode

You can specify the dosing controls Ctrl, P_Ctrl, Ctrl2, P_Ctrl2 after the start of scale
dosing using this Feature bit.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: After start of scale dosing the controls are active and independent of StandStill.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 207
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: After start of scale dosing the controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode
(StandStill = 0).

Note
After start of scale dosing during taring mode (StandStill = 0) the display area in the
standard view shows "Taring".

2.1.9.116 Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks

Use this Feature bit to deactivate the evaluation of the first run detection in parameter DXCHG1
for channel blocks in case of manually configuration of the parameter Mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Activates the evaluation of the first run detection in parameter DXCHG1.
Bit = 1: Deactivates the evaluation of the first run detection in parameter DXCHG1.

2.1.9.117 Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks

Use this Feature bit to specify how PCS 7 driver generator proceeds with the connected
hardware.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: PCS 7 driver generator uses PCS 7 Basis Library metadata and function blocks.
Bit = 1: PCS 7 driver generator uses metadata and function blocks from an additionally installed
AddOn Library.

2.1.9.118 Limits disabled in faceplate

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

208 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Blocks: CntOhSc, CountOh, CountScL, TotalL, MonAnL, MonAnS, MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvAnL, VlvMotL, and VlvPosL
Number of the Feature bit: 16
Blocks: DoseL
Number of the Feature bit: 31
Blocks: FmCont, FmTemp, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDConS, PIDStepL, and ConPerMon

Limits disabled in faceplate

You can use this Feature bit to make the limits visible but disabled in faceplate when limits are
disabled.
The default setting is 0.

Bit = 0: Limits are invisible in faceplate when disabled from block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 209
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Limits are visible but disabled in faceplate when disabled from block.

2.1.9.119 Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 31

Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad

You can use this feature bit to specify that if the input value is invalid (signal status is 16#00 or
16#28), the output value is retained.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Invalid input value is output.
Bit = 1: Last input value is held at the output. Signal status of output value is set to "Manipulated
value " (16#60).

2.1.9.120 With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern change

You can use this Feature bit to define the PID behavior after a change of mode SP intern/extern
(SP_ExtAct). This means MV makes a jump or not.
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

210 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: No PID initialization after a change of mode SP intern/extern (SP_ExtAct). If the

setpoint intern is different to SP extern, MV makes a jump to reach the new setpoint faster.
Bit = 1: With PID initialization after a change of mode SP intern/extern (SP_ExtAct). MV makes
no jump, but the process needs more time to reach the new setpoint.

2.1.9.121 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature bit:
• 3 for SelA16In, SelAn16L
• 4 for CntOhSc, CountScL, CountOh, TotalL
• 5 for PIDConS, PIDConR, PIDConL, PIDStepL, FmTemp, FmCont, MPC 10x10, KalFit,
ModPreCon, TimeTrig, AV, MonAnL, MonAnS, MonDiL, MonDi08, MonDiS
Number of the Feature2 bit:
• 1 for MotL, MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvS, VlvL, Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL,
VlvPosL
• 6 for DoseL
Refer the section "Out of service mode" of the respective blocks to know about the applicable
outputs.

Changes signal status of outputs in OOS

This Feature bit changes the signal status of outputs in Out of service mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Default state of the block.
Bit = 1: Signal status of the respective output parameters changes to 16#60.

Note
Number of the Feature bit is different for various families of the blocks. The Feature
"Changes signal status of outputs in OOS" has higher priority over the Feature "Reaction of the
switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode".

2.1.9.122 Behavior in the case of Bus failure

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 211
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Behavior in the case of Bus failure

With this Feature bit, you can set the signal status of all output signals to 16#68 in the case of
Bus failure (ModErr = 1).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The signal status of all output signals is set to 16#00 ("Bad, device related").
Bit = 1: The signal status of all output signals is set to 16#68 ("Uncertain, device related").

2.1.9.123 Button mode with triggered local control commands

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 9

Button mode with triggered local control commands

You can use this to change the behavior of local mode with local commands (LocalSetting =1 or
3). The precondition is - Button mode: Feature2.Bit4 = 0.
Bit = 0: Button mode with static input commands - After a plausibility control, the local input
commands are active.
Bit = 1: Button mode with triggered input commands - The local input commands always trigger
a 0->1 switching before the control output signal is active. If a block changes into local mode
from another mode or to an error state, then a trigger is necessary.

2.1.9.124 Understeering / underflow for measuring range 0...10V

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 11

Activate understeering / underflow for measuring range 0...10V

You can use this Feature bit to activate understeering / underflow handling for measuring
range 0...10V.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: understeering / underflow handling for measuring range 0...10V - OFF (default).
Bit = 1: understeering / underflow handling for measuring range 0...10V - ON.

2.1.9.125 Disable limit act output when limit value message is disabled

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 12

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

212 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Number of the Feature bit: 3

Disable limit act output when limit value message is disabled

You can use the Feature/Feature2 bit to disable the limit value act output (xx_xx_Act)
when the limit value message (xx_xx_MsgEn) is disabled.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Limit active output is not disabled when limit value message is disabled
Bit = 1: Limit active output is disabled when limit value message is disabled

2.1.9.126 Resetting the Pending Error in Local Mode 1 and 3

Feature bit
Number of the Feature2 Bit: 13
Resetting Pending Error in Local Mode 1 & 3.
With this Feature bit, you define you can define whether the Pending Errors can be resetted by
using the faceplate/RstLi or not.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Resetting of pending errors cannot be possible via faceplate/RstLi.
Bit = 1: Resetting of pending errors can be possible via faceplate/RstLi.

2.1.9.127 Timestamp calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Timestamp calculation
The calculation of the time stamp TS_Out has been improved. You can select
via Feature.Bit5 whether the CPU time or the IO time is used.
• Bit5=0: IO time stamp (default setting)
• Bit5=1: CPU time stamp

Note
Modifications are done in the Pcs7DiIT block prevent invalid time stamping error messages.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 213
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.128 Reversal of control direction for fail-open valves

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Reversal of control direction for fail-open valves

Feature.Bit5 = 1 turns around the control direction of scaled input PV_In.Value
or SimPV_In.Value.
Example, with Scale.Low = 0 and Scale.High = 100 :
• With Feature.Bit5 = 1, PV_In.Value = 0 leads to PV_Out.Value = 16#6C00.
• With Feature.Bit5 = 1, PV_In.Value = 100 leads to PV_Out.Value = 0.
• With Feature.Bit5 = 0, PV_In.Value = 0 leads to PV_Out.Value = 0.
• With Feature.Bit5 = 0, PV_In.Value = 100 leads to PV_Out.Value = 16#6C00.

2.1.9.129 Enable External time

Feature bit
Number of Feature Bit: 6
Enable External time
With this function you can enable/disable External time.
Default = 0.
Bit = 0: External time is enabled to be used for trigger.
Bit = 1: External time is disabled.

2.1.9.130 Switch to AS time if ExtTimeQc <> 16#80 or 16#60

Feature bit
Number of Feature Bit: 7
Switch over to AS time when Signal status of External time is bad i.e., if if ExtTimeQc <> 16#80
or 16#60
With this function you can switch to AS time if the signal status of the external time is bad.
Default = 0.
Bit = 0: No switch to AS time.
Bit = 1: Switch to AS time.
Feature bit 7 is effective only when External time is enabled (Feature bit6 =1).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

214 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.131 AS time enable or Disable

Feature bit
Number of Feature Bit: 8
AS time enable or Disable.
With this function you can activate AS Time or the CPU time.
Default = 0.
Bit = 0: AS time disabled.
Bit = 1: AS time enabled.

2.1.9.132 Use connectable inputs OpenLi, StopLi, CloseLi with CtrlLiOp

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7
Use connectable inputs OpenLi, StopLi, CloseLi with CtrlLiOp
You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block uses the inputs OpenLi, StopLi,
CloseLi as a function of CtrlLiOp or ModLiOp.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: OpenLi, StopLi, CloseLi are used as a function of ModLiOp.
Bit = 1: OpenLi, StopLi, CloseLi are used as a function of CtrlLiOp.

2.1.9.133 Selecting the Feature Bit when Namur Off = 1

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12
With Feature.Bit12 = 1 and NamurOff = 1
• Exceeding of the limit defined at input parameter HighLimit, leads to PV_HiAct.Value=1.
• Undershooting of the limit defined at input parameter LowLimit, leads
to PV_LoAct.Value=1.
Regardless Feature.Bit12, PV_HiAct.Value and PV_LoAct.Value will be set in case of
nominal range is left.

2.1.9.134 Bypass over both connection BypLix OR Inx

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 3

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 215
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With this Feature bit you can use both connected bypass information BypLix, Inx to bypass an
interlock input.
The default setting is 0
Bit3 = 0: BypLix.Value is used to bypass an interlock input.
Prerequisite: BypLix <> 16#FF
With a change of BypLix.Value the bypass of an interlock input BypInx is set to
BypLix.Value.
Bit3 = 1: BypLix.Value, Inx.Bit1 are used to bypass interlock inputs.
Prerequisite: BypLix <> 16#FF, Feature Bit2 =1, BypEn.Inx = 1
With a change of BypLix.Value, Inx.Bit1 the bypass of an interlock input BypInx is set to
"BypLix.Value OR Inx.Bit1". Both inputs are false to reset the bypass. After that operator
can change bypass over faceplate.
With changes of BypLix.Value or Inx.Bit1 the input BypInx is tracked. After that operator can
change again bypass over faceplate.

2.1.9.135 Resynchronization after startup

Feature/Feature2 Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 17
Drives (Feature2bit17) : MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL
Operate blocks (Featurebit17): OpDi01, OpDi03, OpAnL
You can use the Feature bit "Resynchronization after startup" to track controls and block
state after CPU startup through feedback signals and readback value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Startup without Resynchronization
Bit = 1: Startup with Resynchronization: The control outputs and block state are tracked through
the feedback signals and readback value.

2.1.9.136 Resynchronization after out of service or after simulation

Feature/Feature2 Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 18
Drives: MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL
After leaving "Out of service" mode or after leaving simulation function you can use the
Feature2 bit to track controls and block state through feedback signals and readback value.
Operate blocks: OpDi01, OpDi03, OpAnL
After leaving "Out of service" mode you can use the Feature bit to track controls and block state
through feedback signals and readback value.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

216 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.

Bit = 0: Without Resynchronization
Bit = 1: Resynchronization after leaving "Out of service" mode or after leaving simulation
function.

2.1.9.137 Resynchronization after CSF

Feature2 Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 19
Drives: MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL
After a control system fault (input CSF 1->0) you can use the Feature2 bit to track controls and
the block state through feedback signals and readback value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Without Resynchronization
Bit = 1: Resynchronization after a control system fault

2.1.9.138 Resynchronization with StateTrkOn input

Feature/Feature2 Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 20
Drives (Feature2bit20) : MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL
Operate blocks (Featurebit20): OpDi01, OpDi03, OpAnL
After a trigger (0->1) at StateTrkOn input, you can use the feature bit to track controls and the
block state through feedback signals and readback value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Without Resynchronization
Bit = 1: Resynchronization after a trigger with StateTrkOn input

2.1.9.139 Control with output StopCtrl and state “No Cmd”

Feature2 Bit 21
Feature2 bit: MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL
Number of the feature bit: 21

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 217
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Control with output StopCtrl and state "No Cmd"

You can use this feature bit if the control outputs together with StopCtrl should be able to realize
the "No Cmd" mode. In this case all control outputs are reset.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Control position "No Cmd" is not used.
Bit = 1: The control outputs with StopCtrl are able to use the control position "No Cmd".

Using StopCtrl with control position "No Cmd"

Some actors or sometimes a subordinate building block structure need for every position a
separate static control output. The following motors and valves have the control output StopCtrl
to realize the stop control separately: MotL, MotRevL, MotSpCL, MotSpdL, VlvL
Normally the value of the output StopCtrl is the opposite of the control outputs which activate
the drive.

MotL StopCtrl = NOT Start

MotRevL StopCtrl = NOT Fwd AND NOT Rev
MotSpdCL StopCtrl = NOT Fwd AND NOT Rev
MotSpdL StopCtrl = NOT Spd1 AND NOT Spd2
VlvL StopCtrl = NOT Ctrl

Sometimes after a resynchronization it is not possible to see in which position and condition the
valve or the motor is, because the feedback signals are not plausible. In this case you have the
opportunity with Feature2 Bit21 Control with output StopCtrl and state “No Cmd” to
parameterize that the drive can control the position/state “No Cmd”.

Controls “No Cmd” Not plausible combinations

MotL StopCtrl =0, Start =0 FbkStart =0, FbkStop =0,
FbkStart =1, FbkStop =1
MotRevL StopCtrl = 0, Fwd =0, Rev =0 FbkFwd =0, FbkRev =0, FbkStop =0
FbkFwd =1, FbkRev =1, FbkStop =1

FbkFwd =1, FbkRev =1, FbkStop =0

FbkFwd =0, FbkRev =1, FbkStop =1
FbkFwd =1, FbkRev =0, FbkStop =1
MotSpdCL StopCtrl = 0, Fwd =0, Rev =0 See MotRevL
MotSpdL StopCtrl = 0, Spd1 =0, Spd2 =0 FbkSpd1 =0, FbkSpd2 =0, FbkStop =0
FbkSpd1 =1, FbkSpd2 =1, FbkStop =1

FbkSpd1 =1, FbkSpd2 =1, FbkStop =0

FbkSpd1 =0, FbkSpd2 =1, FbkStop =1
FbkSpd1 =1, FbkSpd2 =0, FbkStop =1
VlvL StopCtrl =0, Ctrl =0 FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =0,
FbkOpen =1, FbkClose =1

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

218 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.140 Stop position if direction of command changes to an interlocked direction

Feature bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 14
Feature2 bit: MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VlvMotL, VlvPosL, VlvAnL
Stop position if direction of command changes to an interlocked direction/speed
For the function direction/speed-dependent interlocking (Feature2 Bit16 =1), you can use this
Feature bit to specify the behavior of control after a change of command from one direction/
speed in an interlocked one.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The drive continues to run in the current direction/speed.
Bit = 1: The drive changes in the Stop position.

2.1.9.141 Difference MV Rbk is monitored also in end position

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 15
Difference MV-Rbk is monitored also in end position
You can use this feature bit to monitore the difference MV-Rbk in end positions. Valve with large
monitored end position ranges are possible.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Without monitoring the difference MV-Rbk in end positions
Bit = 1: With monitoring the difference MV-Rbk in end positions
The PosReached output depends on the feature bit. With Feature2 Bit15 =1 only if the
difference MV-Rbk is also within the PosDeadBand, the end position is reached.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 219
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.10 Functions for controllers

2.1.10.1 Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes

Alarm delay for blocks with the function "Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes"
This type of alarm delay is used when temporary violations of set alarm thresholds of the control
deviation are to be suppressed at setpoint step changes. The alarm delay is parameterized at the
following inputs:

Parameter for the delay Explanation

time
ER_AH_DFac Delay factor at positive setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AH_Lim
ER_AL_DFac Delay factor at negative setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AL_Lim

The effective delay time is calculated from the delay factor and the setpoint difference and is
specified at the output parameter:

Parameter Explanation
ER_A_DCOut Effective delay time at setpoint step changes for incoming alarms during
control deviation monitoring

Calculation of the output parameter ER_A_DCOut

ER_A_DC is assigned by default to the output before a setpoint change.
ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC
In the case of a setpoint change in the positive direction during automatic mode, the output is
calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)
In the case of a setpoint change in the negative direction during automatic mode, the output is
calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, -1*ER_AL_DFac * Setpoint difference)
When the loop control has stabilized again, meaning (ER_AL_Lim + ER_Hyst) <= ER <=
(ER_AH_Lim – ER_Hyst), and the delay time for outgoing alarms ER_A_DG has expired, the
output is reset again to ER_A_DC: ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC.

Note
After a setpoint jump the function "Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step
changes" always only affects the limit to the direction of the setpoint jump and not to the
opposite limit. If the deviation value ER reaches the opposite limit (loop is overshooting), the
switch-on delay of the opposite side acts ER_A_DCOut =ER_A_DC, ER_AH_DC.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

220 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Activating the alarm delay

The alarm delay factors have a default value of 0, meaning that the function is deactivated.
Specify a delay factor > 0 in order to use the function.

Pending alarms
Pending alarms are output at the output parameters ER_AL_Act and ER_AH_Act.

Activating and deactivating the function

The function is deactivated (default) when ER_AH_DFac = 0.0 and ER_AL_DFac = 0.0.

2.1.10.2 Inverting control direction

Inverting control direction

For some processes (for example cooling processes), negative control gain is necessary. This is
achieved by the inverting the control direction by means of the input parameter NegGain = 1.
The gain is always entered positively at the input parameter Gain . If there is an inversion, this
is indicated at the output parameter GainEff by a negative number.

2.1.10.3 Error signal generation and dead band

Error signal generation and dead band

The signal error is formed from the effective setpoint SP and the process value PV and is
available at the ER output.The ER Output will be calculated as follows:
1. Without Deadband
ER = SP - PV_Out
PIDConR (ER =PV_Out - SP)
2. With Deadband
ER = SP - (PV - Deadband)
In the case of activated error signal generation (only at block PIDConL, Feature.Bit14), ER is
formed by ER_Ext.
To suppress disturbances in the steady state, you can assign a dead band (Deadband):
• Deadband = 0: Dead band is disabled
• Deadband ≠ 0: Dead band is enabled
With a negative dead band (Deadband < 0.0), calculation is continued internally with this
value

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 221
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

(5

>'HDGEDQG@

6339B2XW(5B([W
>'HDGEDQG@

A dead zone in the controller can help reduce the movements of the actuator and thus reduce
the energy consumption and wear of the actuator. This applies especially to mechanical
actuators, such as valves and pumps. The dead zone may also required in order to avoid small,
stable, continuous oscillations (working movement), which are caused by the quantization of
the control actions in the control loop.

Note
Calming the control signals via dead band is only possible when no structure splitting is active,
i.e. when PropFacSP = 1 and DiffToFbk = 0. Controller actions in the feedback branch
directly process the measured actual value instead of the control deviation and are therefore not
affected by the dead band.

• Remaining control deviations smaller than the dead band are ignored by the controller, i.e.
it does nothing even it can. Therefore, steady states of the actual value can occur, the average
time of which significantly differs from the setpoint.
• When such steady states occur at the edges of the dead zone, it must be expected that even
the smallest problems will cause control intervention (i.e. actuator energy consumption).
• Large dead zones have a negative effect on the control response of the control loop for
setpoint changes. This is because the controller "stops work", for example, in the rising phase
of a positive step response when entering the dead band. This can lead to creeping settling
time, or cause the controller to be activated again when the actual value exceeds the high
limit of the dead band in the form of an overshoot.
• After a fault event that leads to exiting the dead band, the controller brings the actual value
back only to the edge of the dead band, which has the above-mentioned disadvantages.
By setting Feature.Bit30, you can activate dynamic adjustment of the dead band. This
allows you to benefit from the advantages of a dead band without having to tolerate the above-
mentioned disadvantages.
When large control deviations occur (i.e. the dead band is exited), it is temporarily deactivate
until the controller returns the actual value to the proximity of the setpoint. The controller also
demonstrates control response for setpoint changes without a dead band in this way.
There is then a wait until it can be assumed that the process has settled on operating point. Only
then is the dead band activated again. When it is reactivated, the manipulated variable is set to
the mean of a sliding time window. This ensures that the actual value to be controlled settles
more in the middle of the dead band than at the edges. This avoids unnecessary shifting of the
mean value of the controlled variable from the setpoint, and thus poor stationary control
performance. The probability that the controlled variable is within the dead zone time is

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

222 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

increased, and further control actions are no longer necessary. This leads to reduced wear and
less energy consumption.

Note
If Feature.Bit30 = 1 is set, the ConPerMon block has to be connected with the controller. The
blocks PIDConL or PIDConR monitor this by checking the status signal of MeanMV.ST. In case
of Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78 the dynamic deactivation of deadband is not
possible and the output ErrorNum will be set to 52.

Configuration and commissioning

• Use a process tag type that contains the ConPerMon function block for monitoring the
control performance in addition to the controller.
• Check whether the additional interconnections between the monitoring block and controller
are available:
– PIDConL.MV_Mean:= ConPerMon.MV_Mean
– PIDConL.SettliTime:= ConPerMon.SettliDeadBand
• Put the controller into operation as usual with the PID Tuner, and then initialize the
ConPerMon block.
• Perform a setpoint step with activated control performance monitoring and without dead
band (PIDConL.DeadBand:=0). Various characteristics of the step response can be
determined by the ConPerMon block in this way. Check if the determined settling time at
the ConPerMon.SettliTime output parameter appears plausible.
• Specify the width of the dead band at the PIDConL.DeadBand input parameter.
• Check the actuating signal signal in the steady state of the control loop. Has the desired
calming of the signal form been achieved?
• Activate Feature.Bit30.
• Check the control response of the control loop. If the control loop has not sufficiently settled
as expected near the center of the dead band after a setpoint change, it may help to increase
the value of the PIDConL.SettliTime input parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 223
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Notes on selecting the width of the dead band

The width of the dead band primarily depends on the desired precision of the control, in other
words, after the maximum, permanent, control deviations permissible by process engineering
and after the change of the manipulated variable based on a minimum possible change of the
manipulated variable (caused, for example, by a switching actuator). With regard to the
minimization of control interventions, the following adjustment rules help to select the dead
band wide enough that unavoidable variances of the control variables due to measurement
noise or quantization noise do not lead to permanent control movements:
• Assuming a normal distribution of the statistical control variables around the setpoint, two
to three times the standard deviation of the actual value in the steady state is used as the
width of the dead band. This information can be obtained from the control loop monitoring
block: PIDConL.DeadBand:= (2...3)*ConPerMon.RefStdDev.
• If working movements in the control loop are systematically caused by the manipulated
variable quantization, for example, due to a pulse width modulation with a defined minimum
pulse duration and pulse period, a step controller with defined minimum step size or an
electro-pneumatic positioner, the width of the dead band depends on the manipulated
variable quantization multiplied by the process gain.
Example: A control signal resolution of 5% for temperature regulation with the process gain
1.5°C/% means that only temperatures in a grid of 5%, 1.5°C/% = 7.5°C can be reached
exactly. The dead band must then be selected wide enough sp that at least one grid point falls
within the dead band in which the process can remain in a steady-state, i.e. DeadBand >
3.8°C in this case.

2.1.10.4 Using control zones

Using control zones

The control zone function is mainly used for temperature processes in which the time lag is small
compared to the recovery time (no more than a tenth of the recovery time). This is typically the
case when the temperature controller accesses the actuator directly (e.g. heating, steam valve),
and typically not the case with master controllers of cascade interconnections (e.g. control of
the internal temperature of a reactor via the shell temperature).
The control zone can result in large overshoots in processes with an excessively large time lag.
During commissioning with the PCS 7 PID-Tuner, you can check whether the process order is
smaller than 2 and the process type "VZ2 model" is displayed. An initial approach for
dimensioning the control zone: ConZone= MV_HiLim/Gain.
If ConZone > 0, the controller works with a control zone; if ConZone <= 0, the "control
zone" function is deactivated. With a negative control zone, an error ID is output at the

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

224 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

ErrorNum parameter. When the control zone is enabled, the controller operates according to
the following algorithm:
• If the process value PV exceeds the setpoint SP by more than ConZone, the value MV_LoLim
is output as the manipulated variable (controlled mode, in order to return to the control zone
as fast as possible).
• If the process value PV falls below the setpoint SP by more than ConZone, MV_HiLim is
output (controlled mode).
• (Only possible with PIDConL, not with FmTemp) In controlled mode of the control zone and
when the I component is enabled (TI<>0), the I component can be set in a variety of ways
when the control zone is entered, depending on three Feature bits:

Feature.Bit1 Feature.Bit1 Feature.Bit1 Response

2 3 8
0 0 0 I_Part := MV.Value -P_Part -FFwd ; The controller oper‐
ates bumplessly when entering automatic control mode. (This corre‐
sponds to the reaction up to V9.0)
0 0 1 I_Part := MV.Value -FFwd ; A P jump of the manipulated
variable occurs when entering automatic control mode (use only in
exceptional cases)
1 x x I_Part := MV_Offset.Value; The controller starts with the default
value MV_Offset as I component when entering automatic control
mode
0 1 x I component is frozen. When it enters the control zone, the controller
starts with the value of the I component that was in effect when it left
the control zone. This can be useful for continuous processes, where
it can be assumed that the controller is at the same operating point
as it was when it left the control zone, nearly in a steady state.

x = any
The I component is always set to MV_Offset when the I component is disabled (TI=0). I.e.: The
control zone operates with the specified I_Part := MV_Offset with P or PD controlling.
Freezing of the I component with IntHoldPos or IntHoldNeg has no effect during
controlled mode due to the control zone.
• If the process value PV stays within the control zone (ConZone), the manipulated variable
assumes the value of the PID algorithm (automatic closed-loop mode).
Note
The change from controlled closed-loop mode to automatic closed-loop mode is based on a
hysteresis of 20% of the control zone. Make sure that the control zone has an adequate width
before you manually activate the control zone. An insufficient width of the control zone leads
to oscillation of the manipulated variable and of the process value.

Advantages of the control zone:

Once the control zone is entered, the manipulated variable is quickly reduced by the applied D
component. The control zone is therefore only useful if the derivative component is activated.
Without the derivative component, only the reducing proportional component would reduce
the manipulated variable to any significant degree. The control zone speeds up settling without

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 225
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

overshoot or undershoot if the value of the output minimum or maximum manipulated variable
is a long way from the stationary manipulated variable required for the new operating point.

2.1.10.5 Setpoint limiting for external setpoints

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints

With this function you can limit the external setpoint to a range by means of the
parameters SP_ExHiLim (high limit) and SP_ExLoLim (low limit). If the setpoint lies outside
the range defined by you, it is limited to the valid range.
If the external setpoint lies on or above the limit SP_ExHiLim, this is displayed at the output
SP_ExHiAct = 1.
If the external setpoint lies on or below the limit of SP_ExLoLim, this is displayed at the output
SP_ExLoAct = 1.
The external setpoint limits can be tracked internally via the interconnection of the output
parameters SP_InHiOut or SP_InLoOut following SP_ExHiLim or SP_ExLoLim. You can
control the two limit pairs from the faceplate.

2.1.10.6 Tracking setpoint in manual mode

Tracking setpoint in manual mode

To allow a bumpless transfer to automatic mode, the setpoint tracks the process value. When
tracking,(SP_TrkPV = 1) the internal setpoint SP_Int is tracked to the process value PV.
Additional information on setpoint tracking is available in Manual and automatic mode for
control blocks (Page 81).

2.1.10.7 Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable

Manipulated variable tracking

You adjust the manipulated value (tracking) in order to implement a Bumpless switchover of
controllers. A typical use case is cascade control: If the assigned secondary controller is no longer
in automatic mode with external setpoint, the primary controller must track it.
To adjust the manipulated variable (tracking), you have to set the parameter MV_TrkOn = 1.
Now the manipulated variable is taken from the interconnected tracking value MV_Trk and
passed to the output MV. The MV output is limited to the MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim parameters.
Manual mode takes priority over tracking to allow a plant operator to set the controller to manual
mode using the faceplate even when tracking the manipulated variable and therefore continue
to normal operation.
The text "Tracking" is also displayed in the standard view of the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

226 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Activating forced tracking mode for the manipulated variable

Forced tracking is used to set the controller output of a higher-level controller to a value that can
be specified.
You can use forced tracking, for example, to implement a centralized emergency stop in the
plant. This can be put into effect regardless of the operating mode the controller is currently in.
To force adjustment of the manipulated variable (tracking), you have to set the parameter
MV_ForOn = 1. Now the manipulated variable is taken from the interconnected tracking value
MV_Forced and passed to the output MV.
With forced tracking, it is not possible to limit the manipulated variable, nor can the plant
operator change to manual mode in the faceplate. The text "Forced tracking" is also displayed in
the standard view of the faceplate.

Note
This function is not available for the FmCont, FmTemp, and ModPreCon blocks.

Limiting the value of a manipulated variable in automatic mode

In automatic mode, the manipulated variable is set to its automatic manipulated variable limits
as specified by the input parameters MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim and output at the output
parameter MV. Reaching the limit is then displayed at the output parameter MV_HiAct = 1 for
the high limit and MV_LoAct = 1 for the low limit.
Interconnecting the output parameter ManHiOut or ManLoOut to MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim
allows the automatic manipulated variable limits to tracked to manual manipulated variable
limits. You can keep both limit pairs in synch and control the manual manipulated variable limits
in the faceplate.

Limiting the value of a manipulated variable in manual mode

In manual mode, the manipulated variable is set to its manual manipulated variable limits as
specified by the input parameters ManHiLim and ManLoLim and output at the output
parameter MV.

See also
Forcing operating modes (Page 47)

2.1.10.8 Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables

Feedforward control and limitation

The feedforward control is used in order to compensate measurable disturbance variables, such
as temperature or pressure, that can have an effect on the process. In automatic mode, the
disturbance variable is added to the result of the PID algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 227
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The disturbance variable is connected to the FFwd Parameter. It is limited to the FFwdHiLim and
FFwdLoLim limits. If the disturbance variable is outside or at the limits, this is indicated by the
FFwdHiAct = 1 or FFwdLoAct = 1 output parameters.

2.1.10.9 Structure segmentation at controllers

Structure segmentation at controllers

In order to avoid jumps at the manipulated value (controller output) during setpoint changes,
proportional and derivative actions can be switched into the feedback path. I.e.: The
proportional action (proportionally) and the derivative action are then only influenced by the
process value.

3URS)DF63

B  
 *DLQ 7,   3URFHVV
63  V   09 39

V 7' 'LII7R)EN *DLQ

 3URS)DF63


7' V 'LII7R)EN

Switching proportional action into the feedback path

A proportion of the P action can be placed in the feedback using the PropFacSP parameter.
Setpoint jumps then only affect the proportional action proportionally.
PropFacSP = 0: Proportional action is completely in the feedback path. Setpoint jumps do not
affect the proportional action.
PropFacSP = 1: Proportional action is not in the feedback path. Proportional action is
affected by setpoint and process variable (default setting).

Switching derivative action into the feedback path

The parameter DiffToFbk can be used to switch the D action into the feedback path. Setpoint
jumps then no longer affect the derivative action directly.
DiffToFbk = 0: Derivative action is not in the feedback path. Derivative action is affected by
setpoint and process variable (default setting).
DiffToFbk = 1: Derivative action is in the feedback path. Setpoint jumps do not affect the
derivative action.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

228 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Implementation of the structure segmentation

The implementation of the structure segmentation differs from the figure shown above such
that changing PropFacSP does not change MV. Control behavior corresponds to the figure.

2.1.11 Messaging

2.1.11.1 Area of application of the alarm delays

Area of application
A sensible area of application for setting alarm delays can, for example, be a motor. When it is
started, an elevated starting current can occur and this could be reported depending on the
configured limit. Since this usually settles down to a value below the set limit, the alarm would
not make sense. In this case, the alarm delay that is intended to bridge the duration of the active
alarm is used.

Note
Alarms that are really wanted are, naturally, also delayed when an alarm delay is used. Therefore
select the delay period prudently!

Alarm delays in the Advanced Process Library

There are three block types with a different application of the alarm delay for:
• One time value for all limits (Page 230)
• One time value per limit pair (Page 230)
• Two time values per limit pair (Page 231)
• Two time values for each individual limit (Page 232)

Note
An alarm delay is displayed with the following symbol in the limit view and in the faceplate
overview:

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 229
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.11.2 One time value for all limits

Blocks with one time value for the alarm delay

This form of alarm delay is used for blocks without a unit designation in the name, for example,
ConPerMon.
The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.
The duration of the time delay is parameterized at the input AlmDelay. Parameter assignment
is always carried out in seconds.

Activating the alarm delay

The alarm delay is disabled by default (AlmDelay = 0). To use the function, set a delay time
[s] with the AlmDelay parameter.

2.1.11.3 One time value per limit pair

Blocks with one time value for the alarm delay per limit pair
The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

The alarm delay is configured at the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay time Explanation

XXX_A_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Alarm
XXX_Alarm_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_W_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Warning
XXX_Warning_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored

Activating the alarm delay

By default, the alarm delay is disabled for each limit, meaning that each individual parameter has
0 [s] pre-assigned.
To use the function, set a delay time [s] for each parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

230 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Pending alarms
Pending alarms, warnings, or tolerances are output at the corresponding output parameters:
• XXX_AH_Act = 1: Alarm limit (high) reached or violated
• XXX_AL_Act = 1: Alarm limit (low) reached or violated
• XXX_WH_Act = 1: Warning limit (high) reached or violated
• XXX_WL_Act = 1: Warning limit (low) reached or violated
If a message is active at one of these outputs, this is indicated by a 1.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

2.1.11.4 Two time values per limit pair

Blocks with two time values for the alarm delay per limit pair
The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

The alarm delay is configured at the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay time Explanation

XXX_A_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Alarm
XXX_Alarm_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_A_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Alarm
XXX_Alarm_DelayGoing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_W_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Warning
XXX_Warning_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_W_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Warning
XXX_Warning_DelayGoing
XXX: Value to be monitored

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 231
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameter for the delay time Explanation

XXX_T_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Tolerance
XXX_Tolerance_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_T_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Tolerance
XXX_Tolerance_DelayGoing
XXX: Value to be monitored

Activating the alarm delay

By default, the alarm delay is disabled for each individual pair, meaning that each individual
parameter has 0 [s] pre-assigned.
To use the function, set a delay time [s] for each parameter.

Pending alarms
Pending alarms, warnings, or tolerances are output at the corresponding output parameters:
• XXX_AH_Act = 1: Alarm limit (high) reached or violated
• XXX_AL_Act = 1: Alarm limit (low) reached or violated
• XXX_WH_Act = 1: Warning limit (high) reached or violated
• XXX_WL_Act = 1: Warning limit (low) reached or violated
• XXX_TH_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (high) reached or violated
• XXX_TL_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (low) reached or violated
If a message is active at one of these outputs, this is indicated by a 1.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

2.1.11.5 Two time values for each individual limit

Alarm delay for blocks with two time values for each individual limit
This form of alarm delay is used for the blocks PIDConL, PIDConR, and MonAnL.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

232 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.
The alarm delay is configured at the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay time Explanation

XX_AH_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Alarm (for high limit)
XX_AlarmHigh_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_AH_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Alarm (for high limit)
XX_AlarmHigh_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_AL_DC 1)
Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Alarm (for low limit)
XX_AlarmLow_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_AL_DG1) Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Alarm (for low limit)
XX_AlarmLow_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WH_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Warning (for high limit)
XX_WarningHigh_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WH_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Warning (for high limit)
XX_WarningHigh_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WL_DC1) Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Warning (for low limit)
XX_WarningLow_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WL_DG1) Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Warning (for low limit)
XX_WarningLow_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_TH_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Tolerance (for high limit)
XX_ToleranceHigh_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_TH_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Tolerance (for high limit)
XX_ToleranceHigh_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 233
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameter for the delay time Explanation

XX_TL_DC1) Delay time for incoming events of the class
• Tolerance (for low limit)
XX_ToleranceLow_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_TL_DG1) Delay time for outgoing events of the class
• Tolerance (for low limit)
XX_ToleranceLow_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
1)
In the "MonAnL" block, the inputs for a low delay time do not have the separate "L" letters
(e.g. XX_AL_DC: the input name is XX_A_DC).

Activating the alarm delay

By default, the alarm delay is disabled for each individual limit, meaning that each individual
parameter has 0 [s] pre-assigned.
To use the function, set a delay time [s] for each parameter.

Pending alarms
Pending alarms, warnings, or tolerances are output at the corresponding output parameters:
• XX_AL_Act = 1: Alarm limit (low) reached or violated
• XX_AH_Act = 1: Alarm limit (high) reached or violated
• XX_WL_Act = 1: Warning limit (low) reached or violated
• XX_WH_Act = 1: Warning limit (high) reached or violated
• XX_TL_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (low) reached or violated
• XX_TH_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (high) reached or violated
If a message is active at one of these outputs, this is indicated by a 1.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 47)
Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 183)

2.1.11.6 Generating instance-specific messages

Generating instance-specific messages

You can generate instance-specific messages for a binary signal of every block.
The number of interconnectable input parameters that can be used freely varies with relation to
the blocks. The X in the parameter name designates the position.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

234 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

You can specify the following messages for these instance-specific messages:
• Message class
• Priority of the message
• Message text
• Message auxiliary value
• Acknowledge behavior
Additional information is available in the descriptions of the message functionality of the
individual blocks and in the PCS 7 Configuration Manual Operator Station under "How to
configure the user-specific messages".

See also
Time stamp (Page 235)

2.1.11.7 Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter

The MsgLock = 1 parameter is used to selectively suppress the following messages
depending on Feature.Bit25:
• All messages at the block
or
• All messages at the block, except for process control messages (for example, CSF, motor
protection, feedback error) and external messages.
Messages already queued received the "outgoing" status with MsgLock = 1 .
You can find additional information on Feature.Bit25 in the section Suppression of all
messages (Page 187)

Note
With the block OpAnL, this function is independent of Feature.Bit25.

2.1.11.8 Time stamp

Time stamp
The time stamp is the assignment of time information to the status change of a binary process
signal. The status change of the signal is signaled together with the time information.
Use the EventTS block to report time stamped signals.
For more information on time stamping and how to configure it, please refer to the "PCS 7 - High-
Precision Time Stamping Function Manual".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 235
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Areas of application
Areas of application of the time stamp are for example:
• Accurately-timed detection of problems in process-related equipment. The time stamp
enables you to explicitly identify signals that indicate the cause of the failure of a process unit.
• Analysis of system-wide interrelationships
• Detection and reporting of the sequence of time-critical signal changes

Forming the time information

The time information is generated by one of the following methods and is specified at the block
by means of the input parameter TimeStampOn:
• TimeStampOn = 0: Use time stamp of the CPU (default)
• TimeStampOn = 1: Use time stamp of the I/O

Time stamping in the EventTS block

Connect the binary output parameter of another block (e.g. Pcs7DiIn) with a message input Inx
(x = 1 ... 8) of the EventTS block.
When the EventTS block recognizes a change in the signal state at this message input, it uses the
current time of the CPU as the time stamp. Only the signal changes that are slower than the cycle
time of the block can be detected.

High-precision time stamp in the process I/O

You have configured the hardware of your system for high-precision time stamping as explained
in the "PCS 7 - High-Precision Time Stamping Function Manual". The signal changes are
recognized in the I/O devices and the time stamp assigned to them. This data is available at the
output parameter TS_Out of the Pcs7DiIT block.
The high-precision time stamp is independent of the cycle time of the blocks. The actual time
resolution for two different status changes depends on your plant configuration and the
hardware you are using.
Interconnect the output parameter TS_Out of Pcs7DiIT with a message input InTSx(x =
1 ... 8) of the EventTS block.

Error handling
The system block ImDrvTs recognizes when the time stamp function in the I/O devices is
defective and forwards this information to the Pcs7DiIT block. This then forms the time stamp
using the current CPU time and sets the signal status of TS_Out output parameter to "Bad, due
to device". The EventTS block then uses the current time of the CPU as the time stamp. You can
find additional information in the "PCS 7 - High-Precision Time Stamping Function Manual".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

236 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.11.9 Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts

If the output parameter EventTsOut of the block EventTs or Event16Ts is connected to the
input parameter EventTsIn or EventTs2In of another block, the time-stamped messages of
the block EventTs or Event16Ts will be displayed at the connected block. The following
functionalities or parameters of the block are transferred to the connected message blocks:
• Maintenance release status (MS_Release)
• Operating mode "Out of service" (depends on Feature2.Bit11)
• Message lock with the parameter MsgLock (depends on Feature2.Bit11)
• Batch parameters (BatchEn, Occupied, BatchID, BatchName, and StepNo)
With Feature2.Bit11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message
block (Page 204), you can suppress the change to the “Out of service” mode and the message
lock over MsgLock.

2.1.12 Settings for operator control and monitoring

2.1.12.1 Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints

Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints
You specify the upper and lower area limits in the faceplate using interconnectable input
parameters for the following:
• Display areas (bar display)
• Operator input area (for example setpoint and manipulated value)
• Input area for the limit values
– Up to 7 numbers (including a decimal separator and a minus sign) are possible in the
faceplates
The interconnectable input parameter is a structured variable that contains two analog values.
Refer to the descriptions of the individual blocks for the relevant input parameters.

Using a structured variable for scaling

There are three possibilities with which you can influence the contents of the structured
variables, namely with:
• The corresponding channel function block, for example, the FbAnIn block
• A conversion block, for example, the StruScIn block
• Direct parameter assignment at the block input
Additional information on data types is available in the documentation of CFC and STEP 7.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 237
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.12.2 Opening additional faceplates

Opening additional faceplates

You can open standard views of other faceplates from various faceplate views. Here, you have
the following options:
• Two buttons that you can assign freely and that are used to call faceplates of other blocks.
• Two predefined buttons for calling faceplates with a fixed assignment to the controller blocks.
• Buttons predefined for interlock functions

Note
"Small" blocks
With "Small" blocks, you can call up only one faceplate from the standard view.

Freely assignable buttons

From the standard view and from the preview, you can use a button to open the standard view
of a block that can be selected freely. In order to use this function, in the CFC you need to
interconnect the SelFp1 input parameter for the button in the standard view or SelFp2 for the
button in the preview to any given output parameter of the block whose faceplate is to be
opened. This makes the buttons in the faceplates visible.

Note
You can only configure the button in the standard view (SelFp1) with interlock blocks. There
are no buttons with the GainSched block.

Button label
You can change the button labels in the "OS additional text" attribute to "SelFp1"/"SelFp2".

Note
There is also an alternative solution for labeling the buttons:
• Open the process picture in WinCC GraphicsDesigner.
• Open the object properties of the block icon.
• Under Configurations, assign the desired text to the attribute UserButtonText1 or
UserButtonText2.
The main difference between this solution and the first solution is that the labels are only
specified when the faceplate above the block icon is opened. This solution is therefore outdated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

238 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Predefined buttons for controller blocks

You can open the standard view for the following blocks from a controller standard view or
parameter view (for example PIDConL):
• ConPerMon (can be called from the standard view)
– To do this, you need to interconnect the output parameter CPI of the ConPerMon block
to the input parameter CPI_In of the controller block.
• GainSched (can be called from the parameter view)
– To do this, you need to interconnect the output parameter Link2Gain of the GainSched
block to the input parameter Gain of the controller block.
The labels of the buttons cannot be changed here.

Predefined buttons for interlocks

You can open the following interlock blocks from the standard view of the technology blocks:
• Activation enable
• Interlock without reset (interlock)
• Interlock with reset (protection)
The buttons intended for this are visible when the relevant input parameter (Permit, Intlock
or Protect) is interconnected to an interlock block.
You can open the standard view for the following faceplates from the standard view of the
interlock blocks:
• The blocks interconnected to the input values.
• The block interconnected to the output value.
The buttons intended for this are visible when the input parameters (for example In01) or the
Out output parameter of the interlock block is interconnected to a block that has a faceplate.

Note
Interconnection of the Out output parameter to multiple blocks is not permitted. The reason for
this is that a direct relationship must be established between the button in the faceplate and the
faceplate to be opened by it.

2.1.12.3 Labeling of buttons and text

Labeling of buttons and text

You can change the text of buttons (such as start/stop) for each specific instance. For binary
OpDiXX faceplates, you can also change the static text for the "x command" for each specific
instance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 239
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

To do this, you need to specify how the buttons are labeled yourself using the attributes "Text0"
and "Text1" in the object properties of the block. These texts are displayed in the standard view
and preview of the faceplate.

Block type Command button Block I/O for parameter assign‐

ment "Text 1"
DoseL Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
FmCont Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
Stop StopOp
FmTemp Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
Stop StopOp
MonDiL Process value Out
MonDiS Process value Out
MotL Start StartMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Permission stop PermitSafePos.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
MotRevL Start - -> FwdMan
Start < - - RevMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
Permission fwd Permit.Value
Permission rev PermRev.Value
Permission stop PermitSafePos.Value
Protection fwd Protect.Value
Protection rev ProtRev.Value
Interlock fwd Intlock.Value
Interlock rev IntlRev.Value
MotS Start StartMan
Stop StopMan
Interlock Intlock.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

240 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Block type Command button Block I/O for parameter assign‐

ment "Text 1"
MotSpdCL Start |-> FwdMan
Start < -| RevMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
Permission Permit.Value
Permission stop PermitSafePos.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
MotSpdL Start > Spd1Man
Start >> Spd2Man
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
Permission fast Permit.Value
Permission slow PermSp2.Value
Permission stop PermitSafePos.Value
Protection fast Protect.Value
Protection slow ProtSp2.Value
Interlock fast Intlock.Value
Interlock slow IntlSp2.Value
OpDi01 Interlock Intlock.Value
OpDi03 Interlock Intlock.Value
PIDConL Automatic AutModOp
Manual ManModOp
Program AdvCoOn
Out of service OosOp
External SP_ExtOp
Internal SP_IntOp
Interlock Intlock.Value
PIDConR Automatic AutModOp
Manual ManModOp
Program AdvCoOn
Out of service OosOp
External SP_ExtOp
Internal SP_IntOp
Interlock Intlock.Value
PIDStepL Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
Stop StopOp

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 241
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Block type Command button Block I/O for parameter assign‐

ment "Text 1"
VlvAnl Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
Permission Open Permit.Value
Permission Close PermCls.Value
Permit neutral pos. PermitSafePos.Value
Protection Open Protect.Value
Protection Close ProtCls.Value
Interlock Open Intlock.Value
Interlock Close IntlCls.Value
VlvL Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Permission Permit.Value
Permit neutral pos. PermitSafePos.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
Vlv2WayL Pos0 Pos0Man
Pos1 Pos1Man
Pos2 Pos2Man
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
VlvMotL Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
Permission Open Permit.Value
Permission Close PermCls.Value
Permit neutral pos. or Permission PermitSafePos.Value
stop
Protection Open Protect.Value
Protection Close ProtCls.Value
Interlock Open Intlock.Value
Interlock Close IntlCls.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

242 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Block type Command button Block I/O for parameter assign‐

ment "Text 1"
VlvPosL Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
Permission Permit.Value
Protection Protect.Value
Interlock Intlock.Value
Permission Open Permit.Value
Permission Close PermCls.Value
Permit neutral pos. or Permission PermitSafePos.Value
stop
Protection Open Protect.Value
Protection Close ProtCls.Value
Interlock Open Intlock.Value
Interlock Close IntlCls.Value
VlvS Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Interlock Intlock.Value

The default text is shown if no text is configured.

If the text is longer than can be displayed with the default font size, the font size is automatically
reduced until the text is fully shown. The smallest font size is 7 point.
Refer to the function description of the faceplate to learn which parameters are affected by this
function.

2.1.12.4 Displaying auxiliary values

Displaying auxiliary values

Up to two auxiliary values can be displayed in the standard view of some faceplates. This feature
can be used, for example, with motors to indicate the motor current and winding temperature.
To do so interconnect the value that you want to have displayed with the input parameters
UserAna1 or UserAna2.
In the object properties (I/Os > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text to be
displayed for these parameters in the standard view of the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 243
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.12.5 Selecting a unit of measure

Coded unit of measure

The parameter XXX_Unit is used to specify the unit of measure for the corresponding input
parameter (XXX stands for a specific parameter, for example, PV_Unit). Entry is carried out in
the form of a code. Exactly one unit of measure is assigned to each code and is displayed on the
faceplate.
You can interconnect the XXX_Unit input parameter of a technologic block with the XXXUnit
output parameter of an analog input channel block. At the analog input channel block, enter the
unit of measure at the XXXUnit input parameter (XXX stands for a specific parameter, for
example PV_InUnit, PVOutUnit).
If the parameter value of XXX_Unit is out of range (that is, the value is not defined), the
faceplate displays "!undef.!" in the place of unit.

Note
Special notes for channel blocks PCS7AnIn, PCS7AnOu, FbAnIn and FbAnOu
You can use the S7_enum attribute to display the unit in plain text in the CFC editor for these
blocks.

Note
In block icons, the update/refresh time of the units is 1 h. If the unit is changed from CFC, the new
unit will be visible in the block icon after 1 hour or if the process picture is reloaded. In faceplates,
the update/refresh time of the units is 5 seconds, so the new unit will be visible after 5 s.

Customer-specific units
It is possible to use units which differ from the IEC 61158-2 standard. You can define your own
units in the range 1 to 199 in an XML file.
The name of the XML should be APLCustomerUnits.xml and should be placed in the project path
in the folder "GraCS" on both server and client.
Below is an example to describe the content of the XML file APLCustomerUnits.xml:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

<UserDefinedUnits> <!-- Root node start -->
<!-- Define the first unit for different languages -->
<Unit id="1"> <!-- first node with unit ID 1 start -->
<Name lcid="1031">German1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. German1) in German -->
<Name lcid="1033">English1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. English1) in English -->
<Name lcid="1034">Spanish1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Spanish1) in Spanish -->
<Name lcid="1036">French1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. French1) in French -->
<Name lcid="1040">Italian1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Italian1) in Italian -->
<Name lcid="1041">Japanese1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Japanese1) in Japanese -->
<Name lcid="2052">Chinese1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Chinese1) in Chinese -->

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

244 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

</Unit> <!-- first node with unit ID 1 end -->

<!-- Define the second unit for different languages -->
<Unit id="2">
<Name lcid="1031">German2</Name> <!-- lcid="1031" is for German -->
<Name lcid="1033">English2</Name> <!-- lcid="1033" is for English -->
<Name lcid="1034">Spanish2</Name> <!-- lcid="1034" is for Spanish -->
<Name lcid="1036">French2</Name> <!-- lcid="1036" is for French -->
<Name lcid="1040">Italian2</Name> <!-- lcid="1040" is for Italian -->
<Name lcid="1041">Japanese2</Name> <!-- lcid="1041" is for Japanese -->
<Name lcid="2052">Chinese2</Name> <!-- lcid="2052" is for Chinese -->
</Unit>
<!-- similarly define other units up to unit id = 199-->
</UserDefinedUnits> <!-- Root node end -->

The "Unit id" value should be given to XXX_Unit parameter in the function blocks.

Note
The XML is read in only once when WinCC runtime is activated. If any changes are done in the
XML later, you must deactivate, close, and activate the WinCC runtime again to reflect the
changes.

Using the unit of measure with controllers for the ConPerMon block
For controller blocks, the current unit of measure is output via output parameter XX_UnitOut .
If you use the ConPerMon block, you must switch this output parameter with the corresponding
input parameter XXX_Unit on the ConPerMon block.

Using the S7_unit attribute

If you set the xxx_Unit parameter to 0, the entry is displayed by the S7_Unit attribute in the
faceplate and in the block symbol.

Overview of the units of measure

The units of measure are listed in the following tables:
List of the most commonly used units of measure in accordance with specification PROFIBUS PA
Profile for Process Control Devices up to version PNO V3.02.

Note
Due to space constraints on the system, not all units referred to can be displayed in totality. The
display of the measurement units is left-aligned. If you want to abbreviate the unit of
measurement, use the function Customer-specific units.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 245
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1000 K Kelvin
1001 °C Degrees Celsius
1002 °F Degrees Fahrenheit
1005 ° Degree
1006 ' Minute
1007 '' Second
1010 m Meter
1013 mm Millimeter
1018 ft Foot
1023 m2 Square meter
1038 L Liter
1041 hl Hectoliter
1054 s Second
1058 min Minute
1059 h Hour
1060 d Day
1061 m/s Meters per second
1077 Hz Hertz
1081 kHz Kilohertz
1082 1/s Per second
1083 1/min Per minute
1088 kg Kilogram
1092 t Metric ton
1100 g/cm 3
Grams per cubic centimeter
1105 g/L Grams per liter
1120 N Newton
1123 mN Millinewton
1130 Pa Pascal
1133 kPa Kilopascal
1137 bar Bar
1138 mbar Millibar
1149 mmH2O Millimeters of water1
1175 W·h Watt hour
1179 kW·h Kilowatt hour
1181 kcalth Kilocalories1
1190 kW Kilowatt
1209 A Ampere
1211 mA Milliampere
1221 A·h Ampere hour
1240 V Volt
1349 m3/h Cubic meters per hour
1353 L/h Liters per hour

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

246 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1384 mol Mol
1422 pH pH value

List of all units of measure in accordance with specification PROFIBUS PA Profile for Process
Control Devices up to version PNO V3.02.

Value Display Description

1000 K Kelvin
1001 °C Degrees Celsius
1002 °F Degrees Fahrenheit
1003 °R Degree Rankine
1004 rad Radian
1005 ° Degree
1006 ' Minute
1007 '' Second
1008 gon Gon
1009 r Revolution
1010 m Meter
1011 km Kilometer
1012 cm Centimeter
1013 mm Millimeter
1014 μm Micrometer
1015 nm Nanometer
1016 pm Picometer
1017 Å Angstrom 2
1018 ft Foot
1019 in Inch
1020 yd Yard
1021 mile Mile
1022 nautical mile Nautical mile
1023 m 2
Square meter
1024 km 2
Square kilometer
1025 cm2 Square centimeter
1026 dm 2
Square decimeter
1027 mm2 Square millimeter
1028 a Are
1029 ha Hectare
1030 in2 Square inch
1031 ft 2
Square foot
1032 yd2 Square yard
1033 mile 2
Square mile
1034 m3 Cubic meter
1035 dm3 Cubic decimeter
1036 cm 3
Cubic centimeter

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 247
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1037 mm3 Cubic millimeter
1038 L Liter
1039 cl Centiliter
1040 ml Milliliter
1041 hl Hectoliter
1042 in3 Cubic inch
1043 ft 3
Cubic foot
1044 yd3 Cubic yard
1045 mile 3
Cubic mile
1046 pint Pint
1047 quart Quart
1048 gal US gallon
1049 ImpGal Imperial gallon
1050 bushel Bushel
1051 bbl Barrel = 42 gallons
1052 bbl(liq) Liquid barrel = 31.5 gallons
1053 ft std.
3
Standard cubic foot
1054 s Second
1055 ks Kilosecond
1056 ms Millisecond
1057 μs Microsecond
1058 min Minute
1059 h Hour
1060 d Day
1061 m/s Meters per second
1062 mm/s Millimeters per second
1063 m/h Meters per hour
1064 km/h Kilometers per hour
1065 knot Knot
1066 in/s Inches per second
1067 ft/s Feet per second
1068 yd/s Yards per second
1069 in/min Inches per minute
1070 ft/min Feet per minute
1071 yd/min Yards per minute
1072 in/h Inches per hour
1073 ft/h Feet per hour
1074 yd/h Yards per hour
1075 mi/h Miles per hour
1076 m/s2 Meter/second squared
1077 Hz Hertz
1078 THz Terahertz
1079 GHz Gigahertz

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

248 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1080 MHz Megahertz
1081 kHz Kilohertz
1082 1/s Per second
1083 1/min Per minute
1084 r/s Revolutions per second
1085 rpm Revolutions per minute
1086 rad/s Radians per second
1087 1/s2 Per second squared
1088 kg Kilogram
1089 g Gram
1090 mg Milligram
1091 Mg Megagram
1092 t Metric ton
1093 oz Ounce
1094 lb Pound
1095 STon US ton (short ton)
1096 LTon British ton (long ton)
1097 kg/m3 Kilograms per cubic meter
1098 Mg/m 3
Megagrams per cubic meter
1099 kg/dm3 Kilograms per cubic decimeter
1100 g/cm 3
Grams per cubic centimeter
1101 g/m 3
Grams per cubic meter
1102 t/m3 Metric tons per cubic meter
1103 kg/L Kilogram per liter
1104 g/ml Grams per milliliter
1105 g/L Grams per liter
1106 lb/in 3
Pounds per cubic inch
1107 lb/ft3 Pounds per cubic foot
1108 lb/gal Pounds per US gallon
1109 STon/yd3 US tons per cubic yard
1110 °Twad Degree Twaddell
1111 °Baum (hv) Degree Baumé (heavy)
1112 °Baum (lt) Degree Baumé (light)
1113 °API Degrees API
1114 SGU Specific gravity units
1115 kg/m Kilograms per meter
1116 mg/m Milligrams per meter
1117 tex Tex
1118 kg·m 2
Kilograms per square meter
1119 kg·m/s Kilograms per meter per second
1120 N Newton
1121 MN Meganewton
1122 kN Kilonewton

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 249
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1123 mN Millinewton
1124 μN Micronewton
1125 kg·m /s2
Kilograms per square meter per
second
1126 N·m Newton meter
1127 MN·m Meganewton meter
1128 kN·m Kilonewton meter
1129 mN·m Millinewton meter
1130 Pa Pascal
1131 GPa Gigapascal
1132 MPa Megapascal
1133 kPa Kilopascal
1134 mPa Millipascal
1135 μPa Micropascal
1136 hPa Hectopascal
1137 bar Bar
1138 mbar Millibar
1139 torr Torr
1140 atm Atmosphere
1141 psi Pounds per square inch
1142 psia Pounds per square inch (absolute)
1143 psig Pounds per square inch (gauge)
1144 g/cm2 Grams per square centimeter
1145 kg/cm 2
Kilograms per square centimeter
1146 inH2O Inches of water
1147 inH2O (4°C) Inches of water at 4 degrees Celsius
1148 inH2O (68°F) Inches of water at 68 degrees Fah‐
renheit
1149 mmH2O Millimeters of water1
1150 mmH2O (4°C) Millimeters of water at 4 degrees
Celsius1
1151 mmH2O (68°F) Millimeters of water at 68 degrees
Fahrenheit1
1152 ftH2O Feet of water1
1153 ftH2O (4°C) Feet of water at 4 degrees Celsius1
1154 ftH2O (68°F) Feet of water at 68 degrees Fah‐
renheit1
1155 inHg Inches of mercury
1156 inHg (0°C) Inches of mercury at 0 degrees Cel‐
sius
1157 mmHg Millimeters of mercury
1158 mmHg (0°C) Millimeters of mercury at 0 de‐
grees Celsius
1159 Pa·s Pascal second

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

250 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1160 m2/s Square meters per second
1161 P Poise
1162 cP Centipoise
1163 St Stokes
1164 cSt Centistokes
1165 N/m Newtons per meter
1166 mN/m Millinewtons per meter
1167 J Joule
1168 EJ Exajoule
1169 PJ Petajoule
1170 TJ Terajoule
1171 GJ Gigajoule
1172 MJ Megajoule
1173 kJ Kilojoule
1174 mJ Millijoule
1175 W·h Watt hour
1176 TW·h Terawatt hour
1177 GW·h Gigawatt hour
1178 MW·h Megawatt hour
1179 kW·h Kilowatt hour
1180 calth Calorie (thermo chemical)1
1181 kcalth Kilocalorie (thermo chemical)1
1182 Mcalth Megacalorie (thermo chemical)1
1183 Btuth British thermal unit1
1184 datherm Decatherm
1185 ft·lbf Foot pound
1186 W Watt
1187 TW Terawatt
1188 GW Gigawatt
1189 MW Megawatt
1190 kW Kilowatt
1191 mW Milliwatt
1192 μW Microwatt
1193 nW Nanowatt
1194 pW Picowatt
1195 Mcalth/h Megacalorie per hour1
1196 MJ/h Megajoule per hour
1197 Btuth/h British thermal units per hour1
1198 hp Horsepower
1199 W/(m·K) Watts per meter kelvin
1200 W/(m ·K) 2
Watts per (square meter kelvin)
1201 m2·K/W Square meters kelvin per Watt
1202 J/K Joules per kelvin

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 251
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1203 kJ/K Kilojoules per kelvin
1204 J/(kg·K) Joules per (kilogram kelvin)
1205 kJ/(kg·K) Kilojoules per (kilogram kelvin)
1206 J/kg Joules per kilogram
1207 MJ/kg Megajoules per kilogram
1208 kJ/kg Kilojoules per kilogramm
1209 A Ampere
1210 kA Kiloampere
1211 mA Milliampere
1212 μA Microampere
1213 nA Nanoampere
1214 pA Picoampere
1215 C Coulomb
1216 MC Megacoulomb
1217 kC Kilocoulomb
1218 μC Microcoulomb
1219 nC Nanocoulomb
1220 pC Picocoulomb
1221 A·h Ampere hour
1222 C/m3 Coulombs per cubic meter
1223 C/mm3 Coulombs per cubic millimeter
1224 C/cm 3
Coulombs per cubic centimeter
1225 kC/m3 Kilocoulombs per cubic meter
1226 mC/m 3
Millicoulombs per cubic meter
1227 μC/m3 Microcoulombs per cubic meter
1228 C/m2 Coulombs per square meter
1229 C/mm 2
Coulombs per square millimeter
1230 C/cm2 Coulombs per square centimeter
1231 kC/m2 Kilocoulombs per square meter
1232 mC/m2 Millicoulombs per square meter
1233 μC/m 2
Microcoulombs per square meter
1234 V/m Volts per meter
1235 MV/m Megavolts per meter
1236 kV/m Kilovolts per meter
1237 V/cm Volts per centimeter
1238 mV/m Millivolts per meter
1239 μV/m Microvolts per meter
1240 V Volt
1241 MV Megavolt
1242 kV Kilovolt
1243 mV Millivolt
1244 μV Microvolt
1245 F Farad

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

252 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1246 mF Millifarad
1247 μF Microfarad
1248 nF Nanofarad
1249 pF Picofarad
1250 F/m Farad per meter
1251 μF/m Microfarad per meter
1252 nF/m Nanofarad per meter
1253 pF/m Picofarad per meter
1254 C·m Coulomb meter
1255 A/m 2
Amperes per square meter
1256 MA/m2 Megaamperes per square meter
1257 A/cm 2
Amperes per square centimeter
1258 kA/m2 Kiloamperes per square meter
1259 A/m Amperes per meter
1260 kA/m Kiloamperes per meter
1261 A/cm Amperes per centimeter
1262 T Tesla
1263 mT Millitesla
1264 μT Microtesla
1265 nT Nanotesla
1266 Wb Weber
1267 mWb Milliweber
1268 Wb/m Webers per meter
1269 kWb/m Kilowebers per meter
1270 H Henry
1271 mH Millihenry
1272 μH Microhenry
1273 nH Nanohenry
1274 pH Picohenry
1275 H/m Henries per meter
1276 μH/m Microhenries per meter
1277 nH/m Nanohenries per meter
1278 A·m 2
Ampere square meters
1279 N·m /A2
Newton meter squared per ampere
1280 Wb·m Weber meter
1281 Ω Ohm1
1282 GΩ Gigaohm1
1283 MΩ Megaohm1
1284 kΩ Kiloohm1
1285 mΩ Milliohm1
1286 μΩ Microohm1
1287 S Siemens
1288 kS Kilosiemens

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 253
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1289 mS Millisiemens
1290 μS Microsiemens
1291 Ω·m Ohms times meters1
1292 GΩ·m Gigaohms times meters1
1293 MΩ·m Megaohms times meters1
1294 kΩ·m Kiloohms times meters1
1295 Ω·cm Ohms times centimeters1
1296 mΩ·m Milliohms times meters1
1297 μΩ·m Microohms times meters1
1298 nΩ·m Nanoohms times meters1
1299 S/m Siemens per meter
1300 MS/m Megasiemens per meter
1301 kS/m Kilosiemens per meter
1302 mS/cm Millisiemens per centimeter
1303 μS/mm Microsiemens per millimeter
1304 1/H Per henry
1305 sr Steradian
1306 W/sr Watts per steradian
1307 W/(sr·m ) 2
Watts per (steradian square meter)
1308 W/(m2) Watts per square meter
1309 lm Lumen
1310 lm·s Lumen second
1311 lm·h Lumen hour
1312 lm/m 2
Lumens per square meter
1313 lm/W Lumens per watt
1314 lx Lux
1315 lx·s Lux second
1316 cd Candela
1317 cd/m 2
Candela per square meter
1318 g/s Grams per second
1319 g/min Grams per minute
1320 g/h Grams per hour
1321 g/d Grams per day
1322 kg/s Kilograms per second
1323 kg/min Kilograms per minute
1324 kg/h Kilograms per hour
1325 kg/d Kilograms per day
1326 t/s Metric tons per second
1327 t/min Metric tons per minute
1328 t/h Metric tons per hour
1329 t/d Metric tons per day
1330 lb/s Pounds per second
1331 lb/min Pounds per minute

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

254 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1332 lb/h Pounds per hour
1333 lb/d Pounds per day
1334 STon/s US tons per second
1335 STon/min US tons per minute
1336 STon/h US tons per hour
1337 STon/d US tons per day
1338 LTon/s British tons per second
1339 LTon/min British tons per minute
1340 LTon/h British tons per hour
1341 LTon/d British tons per day
1342 % Percent
1343 % sol/wt Percentage solids per weight unit
1344 % sol/vol Percentage solids per volume unit
1345 % stm qual Percentage steam quality
1346 °Plato Degree plato
1347 m3/s Cubic meters per second
1348 m3/min Cubic meters per minute
1349 m3/h Cubic meters per hour
1350 m /d3
Cubic meters per day
1351 L/s Liters per second
1352 L/min Liters per minute
1353 L/h Liters per hour
1354 L/d Liters per day
1355 ML/d Megaliters per day
1356 ft3/s Cubic feet per second
1357 ft /m
3
Cubic feet per minute
1358 ft /h
3
Cubic feet per hour
1359 ft3/d Cubic feet per day
1360 ft /min std
3
Standard cubic feet per minute
1361 ft3/h std Standard cubic feet per hour
1362 gal/s US gallons per second
1363 gal/min US gallons per minute
1364 gal/h US gallons per hour
1365 gal/d US gallons per day
1366 Mgal/d Mega US gallons per day
1367 ImpGal/s Imperial gallons per second
1368 ImpGal/min Imperial gallons per minute
1369 ImpGal/h Imperial gallons per hour
1370 ImpGal/d Imperial gallons per day
1371 bbl/s Barrels per second
1372 bbl/min Barrels per minute
1373 bbl/h Barrels per hour
1374 bbl/d Barrels per day

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 255
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1375 W/m2 Watts per square meter
1376 mW/m2 Milliwatts per square meter
1377 μW/m 2
Microwatts per square meter
1378 pW/m2 Picowatts per square meter
1379 Pa·s/m3 Pascal seconds per cubic meter
1380 N·s/m Newton seconds per meter
1381 Pa·s/m Pascal seconds per meter
1382 B Bel
1383 dB Decibel
1384 mol Mol
1385 kmol Kilomole
1386 mmol Millimole
1387 μmol Micromole
1388 kg/mol Kilograms per mole
1389 g/mol Grams per mole
1390 m3/mol Cubic meters per mole
1391 dm /mol
3
Cubic decimeters per mole
1392 cm3/mol Cubic centimeters per mole
1393 L/mol Liters per mole
1394 J/mol Joules per mole
1395 kJ/mol Kilojoules per mole
1396 J/(mol·K) Joules per mole kelvin
1397 mol/m3 Moles per cubic meter
1398 mol/dm 3
Moles per cubic decimeter
1399 mol/L Moles per liter
1400 mol/kg Moles per kilogram
1401 mmol/kg Millimoles per kilogram
1402 Bq Becquerel
1403 MBq Megabecquerel
1404 kBq Kilobecquerel
1405 Bq/kg Becquerels per kilogram
1406 kBq/kg Kilobecquerels per kilogram
1407 MBq/kg Megabecquerels per kilogram
1408 Gy Gray
1409 mGy Milligray
1410 rd Rad
1411 Sv Sievert
1412 mSv Millisievert
1413 rem Rem
1414 C/kg Coulombs per kilogram
1415 mC/kg Millicoulombs per kilogram
1416 R Röntgen
1417 1/Jm 3
Density of magnetic energy

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

256 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1418 e/Vm3
1419 m3/C Cubic meters per coulomb
1420 V/K Volts per kelvin
1421 mV/K Millivolts per kelvin
1422 pH pH value
1423 ppm Parts per million
1424 ppb Parts per billion
1425 ppth Parts per trillion
1426 °Brix Degrees Brix
1427 °Ball Degrees Balling
1428 proof/vol Proof per volume
1429 proof/mass Proof per mass
1430 lb/ImpGal Pounds per Imperial gallon
1431 kcalth/s Kilocalories per second1
1432 kcalth/min Kilocalories per minute1
1433 kcalth/h Kilocalories per hour1
1434 kcalth/d Kilocalories per day1
1435 Mcalth/s Megacalories per second1
1436 Mcalth/min Megacalories per minute1
1437 Mcalth/d Megacalories per day1
1438 kJ/s Kilojoules per second
1439 kJ/min Kilojoules per minute
1440 kJ/h Kilojoule per hour
1441 kJ/d Kilojoules per day
1442 MJ/s Megajoules per second
1443 MJ/min Megajoules per minute
1444 MJ/d Megajoules per day
1445 Btuth/s British thermal units per second1
1446 Btuth/min British thermal units per minute1
1447 Btuth/d British thermal units per day1
1448 μgal/s Micro US gallons per second
1449 mgal/s Milli US gallons per second
1450 kgal/s Kilo US gallons per second
1451 Mgal/s Mega US gallons per second
1452 μgal/min Micro US gallons per minute
1453 mgal/min Milli US gallons per minute
1454 kgal/min Kilo US gallons per minute
1455 Mgal/min Mega US gallons per minute
1456 μgal/h Micro US gallons per hour
1457 mgal/h Milli US gallons per hour
1458 kgal/h Kilo US gallons per hour
1459 Mgal/h Mega US gallons per hour
1460 μgal/d Micro US gallons per day

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 257
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1461 mgal/d Milli US gallons per day
1462 kgal/d Kilo US gallons per day
1463 μImpGal/s Micro Imperial gallons per second
1464 mImpGal/s Milli Imperial gallons per second
1465 kImpGal/s Kilo Imperial gallons per second
1466 MImpGal/s Mega Imperial gallons per second
1467 μImpGal/min Micro Imperial gallons per minute
1468 mImpGal/min Milli Imperial gallons per minute
1469 kImpGal/min Kilo Imperial gallons per minute
1470 MImpGal/min Mega Imperial gallons per minute
1471 μImpGal/h Micro Imperial gallons per hour
1472 mImpGal/h Milli Imperial gallons per hour
1473 kImpGal/h Kilo Imperial gallons per hour
1474 MImpGal/h Mega Imperial gallons per hour
1475 μImpgal/d Micro Imperial gallons per day
1476 mImpgal/d Milli Imperial gallons per day
1477 kImpgal/d Kilo Imperial gallons per day
1478 MImpgal/d Mega Imperial gallons per day
1479 μbbl/s Microbarrels per second
1480 mbbl/s Millibarrels per second
1481 kbbl/s Kilobarrels per second
1482 Mbbl/s Megabarrels per second
1483 μbbl/min Microbarrels per minute
1484 mbbl/min Millibarrels per minute
1485 kbbl/min Kilobarrels per minute
1486 Mbbl/min Megabarrels per minute
1487 μbbl/h Microbarrels per hour
1488 mbbl/h Millibarrels per hour
1489 kbbl/h Kilobarrels per hour
1490 Mbbl/h Megabarrels per hour
1491 μbbl/d Microbarrels per day
1492 mbbl/d Millibarrels per day
1493 kbbl/d Kilobarrels per day
1494 Mbbl/d Megabarrels per day
1495 μm3/s Cubic micrometers per second
1496 mm3/s Cubic millimeters per second
1497 km3/s Cubic kilometers per second
1498 Mm /s 3
Cubic megameters per second
1499 μm /min
3
Cubic micrometers per minute
1500 mm3/min Cubic millimeters per minute
1501 km /min
3
Cubic kilometers per minute
1502 mm3/min Cubic megameters per minute
1503 µm3/h Cubic micrometers per minute

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

258 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1504 mm3/h Cubic millimeters per minute
1505 km3/h Cubic kilometers per minute
1506 Mm /h 3
Cubic megameters per minute
1507 µm3/d Cubic micrometers per day
1508 mm3/d Cubic millimeters per day
1509 km3/d Cubic kilometers per day
1510 Mm /d 3
Cubic megameters per day
1511 cm3/s Cubic centimeters per second
1512 cm3/min Cubic centimeters per minute
1513 cm /h3
Cubic centimeters per hour
1514 cm3/d Cubic centimeters per day
1515 kcalth/kg Kilocalories per kilogram1
1516 Btuth/lb British thermal units per pound1
1517 kL Kiloliter
1518 kL/min Kiloliters per minute
1519 kL/h Kiloliters per hour
1520 kL/d Kiloliters per day
1551 S/cm Siemens per centimeter
1552 µS/cm Microsiemens per centimeter
1553 mS/m Millisiemens per meter
1554 µS/m Microsiemens per meter
1555 MΩ · cm Megaohm centimeter1
1556 kΩ · cm Kiloohm centimeter1
1557 Weight% Weight percent
1558 mg/L Milligram per liter
1559 µg/L Microgram per liter
1560 %Sat -
1561 vpm -
1562 %vol Volume percent
1563 ml/min Milliliters per minute
1564 mg/dm 3
Milligrams per cubic centimeter
1565 mg/L Milligram per liter
1566 mg/m 3
Milligrams per cubic meter
1567 ct Carat (jewels) = 200.0·10-6 kg
1568 lb (tr) Pound (troy or apothecary) =
0.3732417216 kg
1569 oz (tr) Ounce (troy or apothecary) = 1/12
lb (tr)
1570 fl oz (U.S.) Ounce (U.S. fluid) = (1/128) gal
1571 cm3 Cubic centimeter = 10-6 m3
1572 af acre foot = 43560 ft3
1573 m3 normal Cubic meter
1574 L normal Liter

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 259
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1575 m3 std. Standard cubic meter
1576 L std. Standard liter
1577 ml/s Milliliters per second
1578 ml/h Milliliters per hour
1579 ml/d Milliliters per day
1580 af/s Acre foot per second
1581 af/min Acre foot per minute
1582 af/h Acre foot per hour
1583 af/d Acre foot per day
1584 fl oz (U.S.)/s Ounces per second
1585 fl oz (U.S.) /min Ounces per minute
1586 fl oz (U.S.)/h Ounces per hour
1587 fl oz (U.S.)/d Ounces per day
1588 m /s normal
3
Standard cubic meters per second
1589 m /min normal
3
Standard cubic meters per minute
1590 m3/h normal Standard cubic meters per hour
1591 m3/d normal Standard cubic meters per day
1592 L/s normal Standard liters per second
1593 L/min normal Standard liters per minute
1594 L/h normal Standard liters per hour
1595 L/d normal Standard liters per second
1596 m /s std.
3
Standard cubic meters per second
1597 m3/min std. Standard cubic meters per minute
1598 m3/h std. Standard cubic meters per hour
1599 m3/d std. Standard cubic meters per day
1600 L/s std. Standard liters per second
1601 L/min std. Standard liters per minute
1602 L/h std. Standard liters per hour
1603 L/d std. Standard liters per day
1604 ft3/s std. Standard cubic feet per second
1605 ft /d std.
3
Standard cubic feet per day
1606 oz/s Ounces per second
1607 oz/min Ounces per minute
1608 oz/h Ounces per hour
1609 oz/d Ounces per day
1610 Paa Pascal (absolute)
1611 Pag Pascal (gauge)
1612 GPaa Gigapasacal (absolute)
1613 GPag Gigapascal (gauge)
1614 MPaa Megapascal (absolute)
1615 MPag Megapascal (gauge)
1616 kPaa Kilopascal (absolute)
1617 kPag Kilopascal (gauge)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

260 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description

1618 mPaa Millipascal (absolute)
1619 mPag Millipascal (gauge)
1620 μPaa Micropascal (absolute)
1621 μPag Micropascal (gauge)
1622 hPaa Hectopascal (absolute)
1623 hPag Hectopascal (gauge)
1624 gf/cm a2

1625 gf/cm2g
1626 kgf/cm2a
1627 kgf/cm2g
1628 SD4°C Standard density at 4°C
1629 SD15°C Standard density at 15°C
1630 SD20°C Standard density at 20°C
1631 PS Metric horsepower
1632 ppt Parts per trillion = 1012
1633 hl/s Hectoliters per second
1634 hl/min Hectoliters per minute
1635 hl/h Hectoliters per hour
1636 hl/d Hectoliters per day
1637 bbl (liq)/s Barrels (US liquid) per second
1638 bbl (liq)/min Barrels (US liquid) per minute
1639 bbl (liq)/h Barrels (US liquid) per hour
1640 bbl (liq)/d Barrels (US liquid) per day
1641 bbl (fed) Barrel (U.S. federal) = 31 gallons
1642 bbl (fed)/s Barrels (US federal) per second
1643 bbl (fed)/min Barrels (US federal) per minute
1644 bbl (fed)/h Barrels (US federal) per hour
1645 bbl (fed)/d Barrels (US federal) per day
1997 none None
1998 Unknown unit To be used when the unit of meas‐
ure is not known during configura‐
tion
1999 Special Special units
2000 inch/s2 Inch per square second
2001 g Grams
2002 mils Milli inch
1
A notation different to the PA profile must be used in order to represent this unit in conformity
with the system.
2
"m2" is used instead of "m3" in the Chinese and Japanese documentation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 261
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.13 Consumption of Process Objects

Process Objects (PO) Count

All function blocks of the APL uses in general one PO. Exceptions are listed in the table:

Block type PO count

AV 0
Evt16Ts 0
EventTs 0
KalFilt 50
ModPrCon 50
MPC10x10 100
PrDrpMon 5
PST 15
PumpMon 10
SteadySt 1
VlvMon 5
VlvPosL 2

2.1.14 Resynchronization
With a resynchronization the control outputs and the state of a block are adapted to a running
process. This is acheived by tracking the control outputs for one cycle through the actual
feedback signals (FbkXxx) or readback values (Rbk, PV_In).
The resynchronization is enabled over feature bits.

Resynchronization after CPU Startup:

Feature Bit17 =1 OpDi01, OpDi03, OpAnL

Feature2 Bit17 =1 MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL

In the first cycle after OB100 commands, block state and control outputs are tracked through the
feedback signals and readback values from the process. If they are not available or plausible, the
controls are put on hold.

Resynchronization after Out of service:

Feature Bit18 =1 OpDi01, OpDi03, OpAnL

Feature2 Bit18 =1 MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL

In the first cycle after leaving "Out of service" commands, block state and control outputs are
tracked through the feedback signals and readback values from the process. If they are not
available or plausible, the actual position is not changed. In the standard view and preview the
operator can see which state the block would assume after leaving "Out of service" mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

262 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resynchronization after Simulation:

Feature2 Bit18 =1 MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL,

VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL

In the first cycle after leaving simulation function commands, block state and control outputs are
tracked through the feedback signals and readback values from the process. If they are not
available or plausible, the actual position is not changed. In the standard view and preview the
operator can see which state the block would assume after leaving simulation function.

Resynchronization after CSF:

Feature2 Bit19 =1 MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL,

VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL

In the first cycle after leaving control system fault (CSF 1->0) commands, block state and control
outputs are tracked through the feedback signals and readback values from the process. If they
are not available or plausible, the actual position is not changed. In the standard view and
preview the operator can see which state the block would assume after leaving control system
fault.

Resynchronization with input StateTrkOn:

Feature Bit20 OpDi01, OpDi03, OpAnL

Feature2 Bit20 =1 MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL,
VlvMotL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL

After a trigger (0->1) at StateTrkOn input commands, block state and control outputs are tracked
through feedback signals and readback value. If they are not available or plausible, the actual
position is not changed. In the standard view and preview the operator can see which state the
block would assume after a trigger of StateTrkOn input.

General restrictions of resynchronization:

In many cases the control outputs are not tracked from the feedback signals or readback values:
• Active commands in automatic, local mode or forcing:
– XxxAut =1 in button mode (Feature Bit4 =0)
– XxxLocal =1 in local button mode (Feature2 Bit4 =1)
– In Switch mode (Feature Bit4 =1, Feature2 Bit4 =1) the commands are always active and
cannot be tracked.
• Interlocks: Tracking of an interlocked control is not possible. On the other hand the
resynchronization can set the block to a position where an interlock permission is active. Or
in case of an interlock (not protected), regarding the direction of the resynchronization can
be set to a none interlocked position.
• Active errors like monitoring errors with MonSafePos =1, FaultExt =1, CSF =1 with error
behavior Feature Bit18 =1, Trip =1: Tracking of a control is not possible. But the state/position
can be adapted by resynchronization.
• Rapid Stop: Tracking of a control is not possible. But the state/position can be adapted by
resynchronization.
Tracking of state is independent from the interlock permission

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 263
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.15 Selecting a large end position range with monitoring

Selecting a large end position range with monitoring

If you want to realize an analog valve with position close, a small immediate position and a large
monitored open position you can do it as example shown:

09B+L/LP 
RSHQ

LQWHUPHGLDWH
3RV'L2SHQ 
3RV'L&ORVH 
09B/R/LP  FORVH

095EN

Over Feature2 Bit15 the monitoring can switch on also in the end positions.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

264 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2.1 Block icon structure

Block icon structure

The new block icons are located in the template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV9.PDL" and
"@TemplateAPLV9.PDL".

Note
@PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.PDL and @TemplateAPLV7.PDL is no longer supplied with the Setup

There are two types of block icons (V9.0), those with a display of the instance-specific name and
those without:

Block icon of MotL with instance-specific name

Block icon of PIDConL with instance-specific name

Block icon of MotL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the information
that is actually available.

Block icon of PIDConL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the infor‐
mation that is actually available.

The old block icons are located in the template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.pdl" and
"@TemplateAPLV7.PDL".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 265
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

There are two types of block icons (V7.1), those with a display of the instance-specific name and
those without:

Block icon of MotRevL with instance-specific name

Block icon of PIDConL with instance-specific name

Block icon of MotRevL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the infor‐
mation that is actually available.

Block icon of PIDConL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the infor‐
mation that is actually available.

You can select one of these block icons. See section Configuring the block icons (Page 272) for
more information.
A block icon has several display areas:
• CPU stop
• Instance-specific name
• Icon for the block
• Analog value display
• Status bar for the block status
NoteView documents
You can configure a maximum of three files per block symbol instance, which can be selected in
the memo view during the process control and are displayed in a separate window.
These files must be located in the GraCS folder in the NoteView subdirectory.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

266 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The file names are configured at the block icon at the attributes NoteView1, NoteView2 and
NoteView3. Only .mht file formats are supported and the file extension ".mht" must be given (for
exmaple, " File1.mht") at the configuration.

Note
1. A maximum of three files are configured per block instance.
2. Only .mht file formats are permitted.
3. The file extension *.mht must be given at the configuration.
4. In multi-projects, all relevant files are stored in the path of the server project (OS project path
>> GraCS >> NoteView >> (files in MHT format)).
5. If the files are not configured at the block icon, the file selection and the "Open" button are
deactivated in the memo view (that is, grayed out).
6. If the file formats other than .mht files are configured, the error message "Invalid file format"
is displayed when the file is opened.
7. The maximum allowed file size is 25 MB. If a file exceeds this size, the error message "File size
exceeded" is displayed when the file is opened.

Displaying CPU stop

With a CPU stop, boxes are unavailable and a yellow warning triangle is displayed in the group
display for blocks with messaging.

Instance-specific name
The name of the associated block is shown in the instance-specific name, for example for the
PIDConL block:

You can change this name in the object properties of the instance block.
There are block icons with or without display of the instance-specific name. Refer to the
individual block descriptions to learn about them.
You can reach the visible display for blocks without display of the instance-specific name in two
different ways:
• Displaying individual instance-specific names: Click on the block icon while holding down
the Shift key: The name remains visible as long as the process picture is displayed.
• Displaying all instance-specific names at once: All instance-specific names can be made
visible in a process picture at once by clicking a button. To do this, copy this button into the
process picture of the chart from the @TemplateAPLV9.PDL or insert this button in the
"button area" of WinCC. If you insert it into the button area, read the manual section "PCS 7
OS Process Control " > "Layout of the User Interface".
The instance-specific names are hidden once more by clicking the button again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 267
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Icon for the block

Block icons for technologic blocks have their own operable symbols (for example, for the
MotRevL block) and represent a status display of the block.

This symbol can be positioned at various locations, 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°. Refer to the
Configuring the block icons (Page 272) section for more on this. You can change the operating
mode of the block by right-clicking on the status display. Refer to the Operation via the block icon
(Page 274) section for more on this.

Note
Block icons for motors and valves are available in various mounting positions and forms of
representation. However, a general state icon is always displayed in the faceplates that does not
consider the mounting position and form of representation in the block icons.

Analog value display

For block icons with analog value displays (for example, for the PIDConL block), there are basic
settings that differ depending of the associated unit of measure:

Refer to the Configuring the block icons (Page 272) section for more on this.
These analog values can be controlled according to the Operator control permissions
(Page 290). See also the section Operation via the block icon (Page 274) for more on this.
As of V9.0 block icons, when the actual values are displayed with limit monitoring in the analog
value displays, the background and font colors for an alarm, warning or tolerance correspond to
the message colors.

Note
As of V9.0 block icons, when the actual values are displayed with limit monitoring in the analog
value displays, the background and font colors for an alarm, warning or tolerance, control
system fault or control system fault correspond to the message colors.
If the analoge value display shows *****, the display field is too small for the parameterized
format specification. In this case, adapt the format specification AnalogValueFormatx in the
block icon APL_BLOCK_ICON.

For specification of the format, refer to Decimal points for the analog value display (Page 282).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

268 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Status bar for the block status

The status bar of the block icon provides an overview of the overall status of the block (see
figure below).

The arrangement of icons in the following tables is prioritized from high to low.
The following elements can be displayed:

Alarms, warnings, tolerances, and messages

Refer to the Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library (Page 94) section for more on
this.

Icon Meaning
No messages are output.

A fault has occurred.

An alarm is triggered.

An alarm for the high alarm limit is triggered.

An alarm for the low alarm limit is triggered.

An warning is triggered.

A warning for the high warning limit is triggered.

A warning for the low warning limit is triggered.

A tolerance violation has occurred.

A tolerance violation for the high tolerance limit has been triggered.

A tolerance violation for the low tolerance limit has been triggered.

The block has an operator prompt.

There is a process status determination.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 269
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Note
For user-configured message classes, the symbols for high/low alarm, warning and tolerance
limits are displayed only for limit violations which are triggered within the APL blocks with the
colors of the user-configured message classes.

Operating modes
Refer to the Overview of the modes (Page 78) section for more on this.

Icon Meaning
The block is in automatic mode.

The block is in the "On" operating mode.

The block is in manual mode.

The block is in program mode (only for controllers).

The block is in local mode.

The block is in the "Out of service" operating mode.

In this operating mode, no other symbols are displayed and no values are shown in the
analog value display except for:
- Display for an active message in the memo view
- Display for the maintenance enable

Note
No symbol is displayed for the "On" operating mode (no green "O" displayed) if the block only has
the operating modes "On" and "Out of service".

Internal or external setpoint

Refer to the section Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 138).

Icon Meaning
Setting the setpoint internally

External setpoint specification

SP/MV ramp active

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

270 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Signal status
Refer to the Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118) section for more on this.

Icon Meaning
The block is in simulation.

Signal status is "Bad, device related".

Signal status is "Bad, process related".

Signal status is "Uncertain, device related".

Signal status is "Uncertain, process related".

A maintenance request is pending.

Block is released for maintenance

Tracking and forcing of values and bypasses

See sections Forcing operating modes (Page 47), Interlocks (Page 109) and Manual and
automatic mode for control blocks (Page 81).

Icon Meaning
At least one value has been forced

Value is tracked

There is a bypass of an interlock or a bypass condition of an upstream Intlock FB or tag

bypass is active.

Interlocks
Refer to the Interlocks (Page 109) section for more on this.

Icon Meaning
Block is not interlocked.

Block is interlocked.

Bypass protection.

Rapid stop is commanded.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 271
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Memo display

Icon Meaning
A message is available in the memo view.

Customer-specific icons
In the block icons, the icons can be replaced with customer-specific icons. A subdirectory must
therefore be created in the OS project directory "GraCS" and the customer-specific icons must be
inserted there with the same name as before. The name of the subdirectory must be adapted in
the block icon in the "PictureDirectory" property ("Configurations" group). The icons in the
subdirectory are not changed by the OS project editor or a new version of APL faceplates.

Note
• The "PictureDirectory" property is an instance-specific property. This means that the
adaptations of block icons already configured in the process pictures are not changed by an
update of the block icons in the process picture.
• We recommend that you adapt this property in the process picture and not in the
"@PCS7TypicalsAPLVx.pdl" or "@TemplateAPLVx.PDL" pictures. The "@" pictures are system
pictures and are replaced by the new version of APL faceplates. Customer changes will be
lost.
• In the WinCC Graphics Designer, the PCS 7 "Export Objects" wizard can be used to generate
a list of adaptations of instance-specific properties in the block icons. The "PictureDirectory"
property can be changed in the exported list and collectively transferred back into the block
icons with the PCS 7 "Import Objects" wizard.
• It is possible to use several subdirectories. This can be useful to create different variants of
block icons in the process pictures.

See also
Motor protection function (Page 108)
Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 115)
User-configured message classes (Page 47)

2.2.2 Configuring the block icons

Configuring the block icons

There are two ways to configure your block icons:
• Automatically
• Manually

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

272 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The new block icons are in the template picture "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV9.PDL" and
"@TemplateAPLV9.PDL".

Note
@PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.PDL and @TemplateAPLV7.PDL is no longer supplied with the Setup.

If you still use the V7 block icons in your project and they should continue to be used, the V7
template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.PDL" must be present in the OS project directory (GraCS). In
addition, you must delete the newer template images "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV9.PDL" or
"@PCS7TypicalsAPLV8.PDL" from the OS project directory.
Deselect also the update for the V9 template in the OS project editor on the basic data tab.

Automatic configuration of block icons

There is a variety of block icons, which you can select for a block. You select a block icon by
entering the number of the block icon in the field "OCM possible" > "Create block icon" in the
object properties of the block instance:

2&0SRVVLEOH

2SHUDWLQJDQGPRQLWRULQJ

&UHDWHEORFNLFRQ

0(6UHOHYDQW

You can find the names (numerical entry) of the respective block icons in the description for the
blocks (Operator Control and Monitoring section).
If you do not enter a number for a block icon, the number 1 is always used for the block icon. The
template for automatically generated block icons is @PCS7TypicalsAPLV9.PDL.

Additional information
• Manual Process Control System PCS 7; Engineering System

Manual configuration of block icons

You can configure block icons manually by copying them from the @TemplateAPLV7.PDL/
@TemplateAPLV9.PDL template and inserting them into plant pictures.
The connection to the process tag is established with the "Connect faceplate with process tag"
Wizard, see WinCC Information System, section "Making Process Pictures Dynamic" and
"Standard Dynamics".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 273
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

You can find information on exporting/importing and updating these objects in the WinCC
Information System, section "Graphic Object Update Wizard". Use the "TemplateControlAPL.cfg"
configuration file for these wizards.

Note
• The procedure for changing the tooltip text of the block icons is described in the APL Style
Guide. Otherwise, this property may not be changed.

2.2.3 Operation via the block icon

Operation via the block icon

The block icon can be used to operate elements directly if a relevant operator control permission
(OS_Perm) is available. This operator control permission can be configured in the engineering
system (ES).
The operation is performed by right-clicking on the element involved. The operable elements in
the block icon include:
• Switching the operating mode
• Internal and external setpoint specification
• Changing the process value, setpoint and manipulated variable
• Changing the operating state
The operation is then performed in the same way as in the faceplate. Refer to the section
Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) as well as Changing values
(Page 296).

2.2.4 Block icons for PID and FM controller

Block icons for PID and FM controller

A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
• Process tag type
• Limits (high/low)
• Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits (tolerance limits not with PIDConS) as well
as control system faults
• Operating modes
• Internal and external setpoint specification
• Signal status, release for maintenance
• Memo display

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

274 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

• Process value (black, with and without decimal places, with and without color change at limit
violations)
• Setpoint (blue, with decimal places)
• Feedback value (red, with decimal points), not available for types 3 and 4
With FmCont and FmTemp as a step controller without feedback, there is no feedback value
• "Ramp active" indication is not available in FMCont and FMTemp blocks.
• only PIDStepL: Position feedback value (green, with decimal points), not available for types
3 and 4
• Interlock without reset (only for PIDConR and PIDConL)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV9.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features

the CFC
1

5 Block icon in the full display

6 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 275
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon Special features

in CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"

mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Special case for PIDStepL:

- In the case of the PIDStepL
block only, the green value shows
the position feedback (only visi‐
ble if WithRbk = 1 has been as‐
signed parameters). With opera‐
tion by means of the block icon,
however, the manipulated varia‐
ble is operated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

276 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available in
the following sections:
• Configuring the block icons (Page 272)
• Block icon structure (Page 265)
• Operation via the block icon (Page 274)

2.2.5 Block icon for interlock blocks

Properties of the block icon for interlock blocks Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
• Signal status
• Memo display
• Output signal

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV9.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Block icon for

CFC
1 Intlk02

1 Intlk04
1 Intlk08
1 Intlk16
2 Intlk02
2 Intlk04
2 Intlk08
2 Intlk16

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Block icon for

CFC
1 Intlk02

1 Intlk04

1 Intlk08

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 277
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Icons Selection of the block icon in Block icon for

CFC
1 Intlk16

2 Intlk02

2 Intlk04

2 Intlk08

2 Intlk16

3 Intlk02

3 Intlk04

3 Intlk08

3 Intlk16

Block icons (mini) without display of instance-specific names

These icons only show the output signal. They take the form of a small rectangle.

Display of the output signal

The display can show the following states for the output signal (priority from high to low):
• Gray: No inputs interconnected at the interlock block, the block is not used
• Blue: The output signal is 0 or 1, at least one input signal is bypassed. There is no gray state.
• Yellow: The signal status is 16#60; the output signal is simulated. There are no gray and blue
states.
• Red: The output signal is 0; there is an interlock. There are no gray, blue, and yellow states.
• Green: The output signal is 1; the block is in the good state. There are no gray, blue, yellow,
and red states.
Additional information on the block icon is available in the following chapters:
• Configuring the block icons (Page 272)
• Block icon structure (Page 265)
• Operation via the block icon (Page 274)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

278 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2.6 Block icons for SFC

Block icons for SFC

A variety of SFC block icons are available with the following functions:
• Alarm indicator
• Current active mode indicator ("Manual" or "Automatic" mode)
• Operator request icon
• Indicator for SFC operating status
The block icons from template @PCS7TypicalsAPLV9.PDL:

Block icons Type 2 Type 3

SFC-Type

SFC-Plan

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 279
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The following icons are dispayed in the SFC block icon:

1. Mode indicators:

Icon Bit number Tag name Description

7 .SFC_STATE The block is in "Automatic" mode.

7 .SFC_STATE The block is in "Manual" mode.

2. Status indicators:

Icon Bit number Tag name Description

0 1 2 3
0 0 0 0 .SFC_STATE IDLE

0 0 0 1 .SFC_STATE RUN

0 0 1 0 .SFC_STATE COMPLETED

0 0 1 1 .SFC_STATE HELD

0 1 0 0 .SFC_STATE ABORTED

0 1 0 1 .SFC_STATE STARTING

0 1 1 0 .SFC_STATE COMPLETING

0 1 1 1 .SFC_STATE ERROR_COMPLETING

1 0 0 0 .SFC_STATE HOLDING

1 0 0 1 .SFC_STATE RESUMING

1 0 1 0 .SFC_STATE ERROR

1 0 1 1 .SFC_STATE HELD_ERROR

1 1 0 0 .SFC_STATE RESU_ERROR

1 1 0 1 .SFC_STATE ABORTING

1 1 1 0 .SFC_STATE STOPPING

1 1 1 1 .SFC_STATE STOPPED

3. Acquired status indicators (for SFC type only):

Icon Bit number Tag name Description

14 .VSTATUS EM-SFC is acquired by a superordinated
equipment phase (EPH)

15 .VSTATUS Acquiring of at least one subordinated

equipment module (EM) failed

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

280 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

See also
Block icon structure (Page 265)
Configuring the block icons (Page 272)
Operation via the block icon (Page 274)

2.2.7 Adding block icons to static picture components

Static picture component for the block icons

The block icons for drives and valves contain no static picture components. However, you can
add static picture components to the block icons by copying them from the
@TemplateAPLV9.PDL/@TemplateAPLV7.PDL template and placing them over the block icons.
The following static picture components are available:
• Static picture components for motor blocks:

• Static picture components for valve blocks:

Note
The static picture components for the valves are visible here above the valve icon.

Note that all the block icons of the APL are located on layer 0 of the process picture. Layer 1 is
intended for the static picture component. This ensures that the static picture component is
always over the block icon. If you have changed this layer of the block icon, the static picture
component should always be placed in a higher layer.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 281
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2.8 Decimal points for the analog value display

The decimal points for the analog value display can parameterize centrally in the block icon at
the attribute Configurations > AnalogValueFormat1...AnalogValueFormat5. If the attribute is
empty, the format specification will be taken directly from the faceplate PDL file.
The parameterization in the block icon takes effect in the standard view, limit view, and the block
icon. The following table shows the analog values for which format specification can be
parametrized in the block icon:

Blocks AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐

Format1 Format2 Format3 Format4 Format5

Standard Standard Standard Standard view Limit view for

view, Limit view, Limit view, Limit motors
view view view
MotL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MotRevL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MotSpdL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MotSpdCL Rbk values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
ER values
VlvL UserAna1 UserAna2 -
VlvMotL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
VlvPosL Rbk values UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MV value
VlvAnL Rbk values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MV value
Vlv2WayL UserAna1 UserAna2 -
DoseL PV values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MonAnL PV values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MonAnS PV values -
OpAnL PV values SP values -
OpAnS PV values SP values -
PIDConL PV values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MV values
Rbk values
PIDConS PV values SP values MV values -
Rbk values
PIDConR PV values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MV values
Rbk values
PIDStepL PV values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MV values
Rbk values

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

282 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Blocks AnalogValueFor‐ AnalogValueFor‐ AnalogValueFormat9

mat1...AnalogValueFor‐ mat5...AnalogValueFor‐
mat4 mat8
ModPreCon CV1...CV4, SP1...SP4 val‐ MV5...MV8 values DV values
ues

Blocks AnalogValueFor‐ AnalogValueFor‐ AnalogValueFor‐

mat1...AnalogValueFor‐ mat11...AnalogValueFor‐ mat21...AnalogValueFor‐
mat10 mat20 mat24
MPC10x10 CV1...CV10, SP1...SP10 MV1...MV10 values DV1...DV5 values
values

Note
If the analoge value display shows *****, the display field is too small for the parameterized
format specification. In this case, adapt the format specification AnalogValueFormatx in the
block icon APL_BLOCK_ICON.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 283
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.1 Fast Operation for PID Controllers

Fast Operation for PID Controllers

The concerned blocks are:

• PIDConL
• PIDStepL
• PIDConR

Enabling Fast Operation

When internal tag "@APLFastOperationEnable" is set to 1, the above mini faceplate can be
opened from the block icon. You can right-click on the mode and the manipulated variable
fields on block icon will open this faceplate.
1. Changing modes
Only two modes - automatic and manual are available.You can click on the respective buttons
to change the mode.
2. Changing manipulated variable
Manipulated variable can be changed by either entering the value directly through slider or
by direct operation buttons. Both 2 and 3 step operation are available when changing
manipulated variable.
3. Pin
Faceplate is always pinned by default. Pin button is not operable and therefore faceplate can
not be unpinned.

2.3.2 Structure of the faceplate

General functions of the faceplates

This section provides general information that applies to all faceplates.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

284 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Recommended screen resolution

The faceplates are shown in full on the screen with a resolution of 1280 x 1024. The full-screen
mode (press the F11 key) must also be activated on the Web client.

Scaling the faceplates

You can scale the faceplates from 50% to 200%. The value to scale is given in the internal variable
"@APLFaceplateScaleFactor" which is of type unsigned 32-bit value. The default value of the
scale is 100. You can scale the faceplates from 101% to 200% by providing a value in the range
of 101 to 200 in the internal variable. Similarly, you can scale down the faceplates from 50% to
99% by providing a value in the range of 50 to 99. The reference for calculation is default size of
the faceplates which is 100%. This means if the value given is 150, the faceplates will be scaled
to 150% of the default size. Similarly, if the value given is 90, the faceplate will be scaled down
to 90% of the default size.
The faceplates can also be scaled up or down using the following buttons in a process picture.
These buttons are contained in @TemplateAPLV9.PDL and should be configured for both OS-
server and OS-client.

Button Name Description

BtnIncreaseZoom Increase the zoom factor by 5%

BtnDecreaseZoom Decrease the zoom factor by 5%

BtnResetZoom Reset the zoom factor to 100%

ZoomValue Displays the current Zoom value

Note
You must reopen the faceplate after changing the scale value. Already opened faceplate will not
be scaled if the scale value is changed.

Displaying CPU stop

With a CPU stop, boxes are unavailable or hidden and a yellow warning triangle is displayed in
the group display for blocks with messaging. No operations are possible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 285
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Opening the faceplate

Click on the block icon in WinCC to open the faceplate with the standard view; in this example
this is the standard view of PIDConL:

Note
Some of the illustrations of the faceplate views and block icons in the help for the PCS 7
Advanced Process Library are examples or offline representations. The representations on
runtime may vary.

The views differ depending on the block functions. All blocks that have faceplates provide a
status bar where you can see the most important information relating to the block status. There
are additional functions available that are described in the next sections.

Note
Display elements of block inputs with 16#FF as their status default, are only shown when their
block inputs are interconnected (status ≠ FF). Exception: The values for Gain, TI and TD are
always displayed for controller blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

286 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Displays and operator controls

  

         


The faceplate provides the following display and operator controls:

(1) Group display
(2) Lock/unlock messages
(3) Suppress messages / alarm delays with the icon
(4) Acknowledge alarms
(5) Worst signal status
(6) Batch display
(7) At least one delay time effective at the block
(8) Maintenance request and release
(9) Memo display
(10) Open views of the block
(11) Back to block icon
(12) Pin faceplate
(13) Instance name of the block
(14) Help button

(1) Group display

The group display shows the information that is transferred from ALARM_8P of the block
instance to WinCC.
• Alarms
• Warnings
• Tolerances
• Faults
• Operator prompts
• Process messages

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 287
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured message
classes. For user-configured message classes, message types depend on the project-specific
setting. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes
(Page 47).

(2) Lock/unlock messages

The Lock/unlock messages button is used to lock/unlock the triggering of messages for all single
control units in the process picture affected by group displays directly in the automation system.

(3) Suppress messages

Message suppression indicates whether or not the "Suppress process messages" function in the
AS block is activated with the MsgLock parameter. If message suppression is activated, all
messages in this block instance – except for process control messages – are suppressed.

(4) Acknowledge alarms

You can acknowledge all alarms from the block instance using this button.
You can hide this button from specific users / user groups using the permissions in PCS 7-OS.
Refer to the Process Control System PCS 7; OS Process Control documentation for more on this.

(5) Display for worst signal status

This display shows the worst signal status currently present. You will find more detailed
information in section Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 118).

(6) Batch display

The batch display shows whether or not the block instance is in use by SIMATIC BATCH.
You will find more detailed information in section SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 75).

(7) At least one delay time effective at the block

This display shows you the active delay time. You will find more detailed information in section Display of delay
times (Page 293).
The "dead band" function is temporarily deactivated.

(8) Maintenance request and release

This display shows you if a maintenance request or release has been made for this block.
You will find more detailed information in section Release for maintenance (Page 72).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

288 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(9) Memo display

This display shows you if a message has been left in the memo view for you. You will find more
detailed information in section Memo view (Page 343).

(10) Open views of a block

You can use this field to open the various views of a block. Refer to the block description to learn
of the available views. Left clicking shows the view in the same window. Right clicking opens a
new window.
You can select from the following typical views here:

Icon Identifier
Standard view

Message view

Limit view (several limit views within a block are possible)

Trend view

Ramp view

Parameter view (several parameter views within a block are possible)

Preview

Memo view

Batch view

Setpoint view

Parameter view 1 (continues to parameter view 4, see line below)

Parameter view 4

Quantity view

Flow view

Views (additional views within a block are possible)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 289
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
The buttons are unavailable when views cannot be selected.

(11) Back to block icon

Use this button to return to the block icon in the process image of the corresponding faceplate.
You can use this function, for example, when you have pinned a block (12) and the process
picture has changed in the meantime.

(12) Pin faceplate

You can pin the faceplate on top of the user interface using this button. This allows you to
change to another picture or area without closing the faceplate.

Note
You can learn about additional operator controls in the descriptions of the individual blocks.

(13) Instance name of the block

This area displays the instance specific name of the block.

(14) Help button

Click this button to open the APL Operator Guide online help of the corresponding view of the
faceplate.

2.3.3 Operator control permissions

Operator control permissions for blocks

The following conditions have an effect on operator control permissions:
• User management in the PCS 7 OS
• Local operating permission using the OpStations block
• Dependencies on operating modes in blocks
• Permissions via parameter assignment / interconnection of blocks
• Permissions via the OS_Perm input parameter at the block itself

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

290 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

User management in the PCS 7 OS

The following operator authorization levels from user management are used in the APL:
• Process control (for example, manual/automatic mode switchover, changing setpoints and
manipulated variables).
With this operator control permission, operations can be performed in the standard view of
all blocks and input can be made in the ramp and memo views. The "Out of service" operating
mode cannot be used with process controlling.
• Higher process controls (for example, changing limits, controller parameters and monitoring
times).
With this operator control permission, all operations in all views of all blocks are possible,
including the operations for "Out of service" operating mode. Exception: The operations
listed under "Highest process controlling".
• Highest process controls (simulate process values and release process tag for maintenance).
With this operator control permission, simulation can be switched on and off in the
parameter view and the process tag for maintenance work can be released.
• Extended operation 1
Free project-specific operator authorization
• Extended operation 2
Free project-specific operator authorization

Note
Exceptions to the uses described above are listed in the descriptions of the individual views.

Each operation is assigned with an operator authorization level in the faceplates. This fixed
assignment can be changed for each instance at the "operator authorization level" property of
an I/O in the AS block (for example, SP_Int with PIDConL). The following assignment applies:

Operator authorization level in the user man‐ Value "Operator authorization level" property
agement
Process controls 1
Higher process controls 2
Highest process controls 3
Extended operation 1 4
Extended operation 2 5

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 291
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
• The free three assignments in the upper table can be changed in the block icon at the
properties "OperationLevel1_backup", "OperationLevel2_backup" and
"OperationLevel3_backup". Any operator authorization level from the user management can
be assigned the values 1 to 3. This type of instance-specific configuration is still available only
for reasons of downward compatibility and should no longer be used in new projects.
• The controls for the message system (e.g. acknowledge messages) and trend display (e.g.
export) are fixed across the system and cannot be changed via the AS block.
The "Lock messages" control can be changed per OS Server/ Station via the internal variable
"@LockMessageAuthLevel" with the value of the operator authorization level from the
user management (for example, value "6" for "Higher process controls").

Local operating permission using the OpStations block

Local operating permission is an upstream operator control permission which is determined
before the operator control permissions for user management and the release of the block, and
is realized via the OpStations (Page 463) block.
If local operating permission is missing, operation of a block instance on an OS is usually blocked.
Otherwise, when local operating permission is allowed, the operator control permission is
normally determined through user management and the block.
Local operating permission can be set for each specific instance; in other words, block instances
can be enabled or disabled for use on an operator station independently of one another.
You can find additional information for the use of local operating permission in the section
Description of OpStations (Page 463).

Dependencies on operating modes in blocks

You can execute various functions depending on the block mode. These permissions are stored
in the block algorithm and are determined dynamically in online mode.

Permissions via parameter assignment / interconnection of blocks

The block is either controlled by the operator or by the controller, depending on parameter
settings or on the interconnection. An example for this is the switchover from manual to
automatic mode by a higher-level controller or by the operator. These permissions are stored in
the block algorithm and are determined dynamically in online mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

292 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Permissions via the OS_Perm input parameter at the block itself

Controllable blocks have the OS_Perm input parameter which allows you to implement
individual operator control strategies by setting the operator control permissions. A pressure
relief valve, for example, can only be opened by the master control system. The operator may
only close the valve. These authorizations are defined during configuration. These operator
control permissions are displayed in the preview view of the faceplate. For information about
setting the individual operator control permissions (OS_Perm) refer to the description of the
functions of the individual blocks.
The relevant operator controls are enabled if the operator has suitable permissions. The block
algorithm processes the input data.

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to reset
the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

See also
Enabling local operator authorization (Page 172)

2.3.4 Display of delay times

Display of delay times

As soon as the immediate command output is delayed due to an active delay time at the "Large"
blocks of the "Drives" family, this fact is signaled by a bit in the status word and a display in the
faceplate.
These times include:
• Pre-warning time
• On/Off delays
• Restart inhibit

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 293
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.5 Switching operating states and operating modes

Requirements
You can change the operating state, operating mode and other parameters if needed in
faceplates if you have the corresponding operator control permission (OS_Perm). This operator
control permission can be configured in the engineering system (ES).

  

(1) The mouse cursor changes when you place it over the following button:

The mouse pointer now looks as follows:

When you click on the button with the mouse pointer, the bottom of the faceplate expands. You
now see the field for changing the operating mode, for example.
(2) Field for changing the operating mode, operating state etc. This example describes changing
the operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

294 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

If the indicators for the operating state is currently located in this field and you have configured
text for specific instances, this text is also shown. You can find more information about this in the
section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 239).
(3) The text on this button is gray. You cannot select this operating mode due to the following
reasons:
• This operator control permission for this operating mode cannot be configured in the
engineering system (ES).
or
• The operating mode is already selected at this time.
or
• Due to the technology, you cannot switch from the operating mode currently set and the
desired operating mode.
(4) The text on this button is black. You can switch to this operating mode.

How to change the operating mode (using the PIDConL block in standard view as an example)
1. Click one of the selectable buttons in the operating mode field.
2. Confirm your selection by clicking "OK".
3. If you do not want to apply your selection, click "Cancel".
After clicking the "OK" or "Cancel" button, the faceplate is reduced again to its original form.

(5) Multiple operation

If the operating window is not to close after the confirmation of a command, it can be "attached".
The following button is located below the operating window for this purpose:

Operating window is closed after the value is applied

Operating window remains open after the value is applied

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 295
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.6 Changing values

Requirements
You can change the values in faceplates and in the block icons if you have the corresponding
operator authorization (OS_Perm). This operator permission can be configured in the
engineering system (ES). The following example shows how values are changed via the
faceplate.

 

(1) The background color of the input box is white. You can change the value. The mouse pointer
changes when you place it over the input box:

(2) The background color of the input box is gray. You cannot change the value.
(3) If you click on the input box, the bottom of the faceplate expands. You now see the field for
changing values.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

296 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

How to change values in faceplates

You have three options for changing values:
• "Direct control": Click on a button such as "2.5" in the box (6). The value is immediately
changed and applied. It is no longer necessary to confirm this value.
• Changing values using the slide control (5): move the slide control until the desired value is
shown in the box. Then confirm the value using the Enter key or by clicking "OK". Read the
section "Setting the multiple step operation".
• Change the values in the input box (4): Click the input box and enter the new value. If the new
values are outside the limits, they are rejected and the old values are retained. Then confirm
the value using the Enter key and clicking "OK". Read the section "Setting the multiple step
operation".

Setting the multiple step operation

You can use the internal @APLCommandExecutionSteps tag in the Tag Management of the
WinCC Explorer to specify if values are to be changed in two or three steps.
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Double-click on the internal @APLCommandExecutionSteps tag
2. Change the start value to 2 or 3 in the Limits/Reporting tab.
Start value = 2: It is no longer necessary to confirm the value in the faceplate by clicking "OK";
values are applied immediately.
Start value = 3: Each value change in the faceplate (with the exception of those for direct
control) needs to be confirmed with "OK".

Changing the values for "Direct control"

Specify the percentage values for the two inner keys for direct control with
the DirectOperationValue property at the block icon. The outer two keys are automatically
determined with DirectOperationValue times the factor 5.
If DirectOperationValue is not an integer but the values in the faceplate are integers, then
DirectOperationValue is rounded up to the next integer.
If the rounded value is 0, 1 is used for DirectOperationValue.
The default value for DirectOperationValue is 0.5. With integer format, the "+/-1%" results
for the inner keys and "+/-5%" for the outer keys.
The value change also depends on the change in the range of value, which is given by a high limit
and a low limit:

Blocks Kind of value High limit Low limit

MotSpdCL Setpoint SP_HiLim SP_LoLim
VlvAnL, VlvPosL Manipulated variable MV_HiLim MV_LoLim
MV
PIDConL, PIDConS, PID‐ Setpoint, SP_HiLim, SP_LoLim,
ConR, PIDStepL, Manual value Man ManHiLim ManLoLim
FmCont, FmTemp
OpAnL Setpoint SP_HiLim SP_LoLim

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 297
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
When the interlock is active, the High and Low limits of the operation area are considered for
VlvPosL and VlvAnL blocks.

The value change is calculated as follow:

value change = button value * (high limit - low limit) / 100.0

Note
Analog value format should be configured to accommodate the smallest change triggered by
operating range and DirectOperationValue. This ensures proper operation and no
disabling of direct operation in operation area.
• Example 1:
Operating range: 0 ~ 1
Direct Operation Value: 0.5%
Smallest possible change is 0.005.
Hence AnalogValueFormat should have atleast 3 decimal places - ##0.000.
• Example 2:
Operating range: 0 ~ 100
Direct Operation Value: 0.5%
Smallest possible change is 0.5.
Hence AnalogValueFormat should have atleast 1 decimal place - ##0.0Properties
DirectOperationValue: Block Icon>Object
Properties>Configurations>DirectOperationValue
AnalogValueFormat: Block Icon>Object Properties>Configurations>AnalogValueFormat

(7) Multiple operation

If the operating window is not to close after the confirmation of a command, it can be "pinned".
The following button is located below the operating window for this purpose:

Operating window unpinned.

When the value of a parameter is set using the "Direct control" button, the value is
applied to the parameter and the "Cancel" button is disabled. Click "OK" to close the
operating window.
Operating window pinned.
When the value of a parameter is applied using the "Direct control" button, the value is
applied to the parameter and the "OK" button is disabled. Click "Cancel" to close the
operating window.

(8) Suppress messages

You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

298 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.7 FM controllers standard view (analog)

Standard view (analog) of FM controllers












 

(1) Display and switch the operating mode

This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
• Manual mode (Page 81)
• Automatic mode (Page 81)
• Program mode for controllers (Page 87)
• Out of service (Page 79)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) for information on
switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification

This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
• By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
• By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) chapter for information
on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 138) chapter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 299
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

If text is configure for these commands, it is displayed as additional text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in chapter Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 239)

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status

This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status

This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 296) chapter for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint

This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" (MV) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to chapter Changing values (Page 296) for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area provides information on the current readback value of the manipulated variable with
the corresponding signal status. This display is only available when the readback value in the box
is interconnected to the Rbk input parameter.

(9) Bar graph for the "Manipulated variable"

This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" in the form of a bar graph (MV_OpScale).
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

300 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility of
this navigation button depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(12) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the Engineering
System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(13) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 72) Display
area for block states.

(14) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in chapter Simulating signals (Page 66).

(15) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Internal error"
• "Invalid Signal"

(16) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
• "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
• "Tracking FB"
• "Tracking FM"

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 301
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

• "Safety mode FM"

• "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

Note
"Ramp active" indication is not available for FMCont and FMTemp blocks in the Standard view.

(17) Limit display

These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
• Red: Alarm
• Yellow: Warning
• Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47).

(18) Bar graph for the "Process value"

This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(19) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"

This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar graph
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(20) Display of external setpoint

This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(21) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp

This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp generation
in the Ramp view (Page 339).

(22) Limit display for the setpoint

These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

302 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(23) High and low scale range of bar graph

These values provide the high and low limit values of the bargraph.

2.3.8 FM controllers standard view (pulse controller)

Standard view (pulse) of FM controllers

YY X
X_ Y

Z
YX
YW [
\
X` Z
X^ ]
^

X]
_
X\ ]
X[
`
XZ XW
XY XX

(1) Display and switch the operating mode

This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
• Manual mode (Page 81)
• Automatic mode (Page 81)
• Program mode for controllers (Page 87)
• Out of service (Page 79)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) for information on
switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification

This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
• By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
• By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 303
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) chapter for information
on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 138) chapter.

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status

This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status

This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 296) chapter for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint

This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" (MV) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to chapter Changing values (Page 296) for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status. This display is only available when the readback value in the box is interconnected to the
Rbk input parameter.

(9) Bar graph for the "Manipulated variable"

This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" in the form of a bar graph (MV_OpScale).
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

304 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this button for the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility of this button
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(12) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate

Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the engineering system. The
visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(13) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 72) Display
area for block states.

(14) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 66).

(15) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Internal error"
• "Invalid Signal"

(16) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
• "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
• "Tracking FB"
• "Tracking FM"
• "Safety mode FM"
• "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 305
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
"Ramp active" indication is not available for FMCont and FMTemp blocks in the Standard view.

(17) Bar graph for the "Process value"

This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(18) Limit display

These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
• Red: Alarm
• Yellow: Warning
• Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47).

(19) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"

This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar graph
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(20) Display of external setpoint

This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(21) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp

This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp generation
in the Ramp view (Page 339).

(22) Limit display for the setpoint

These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

(23) High and low scale range of bar graph

These values provide the high and low limit values of the bargraph.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

306 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

See also
Labeling of buttons and text (Page 239)

2.3.9 FM controllers standard view (step controller with position feedback)

Standard view with position feedback of FM controllers












 

(1) Display and switch the operating mode

This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
• Manual mode (Page 81)
• Automatic mode (Page 81)
• Program mode for controllers (Page 87)
• Out of service (Page 79)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) for information on
switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification

This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
• By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
• By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 307
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) chapter for information
on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 138) chapter.

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status

This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status

This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 296) chapter for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint

This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" (MV) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to chapter Changing values (Page 296) for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status. This display is only available when the readback value in the box is interconnected to the
Rbk input parameter.

(9) Bar graph for the "Manipulated variable"

This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" in the form of a bar graph (MV_OpScale).
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

308 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this button for the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility of this button
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(12) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate

Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering System. The
visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(13) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 72) Display
area for block states.

(14) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 66).

(15) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Internal error"
• "Invalid Signal"

(16) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
• "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
• "Tracking FB"
• "Tracking FM"
• "Safety mode FM"
• "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 309
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
"Ramp active" indication is not available for FMCont and FMTemp blocks in the Standard view.

(17) Bar graph for the "Process value"

This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(18) Limit display

These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
• Red: Alarm
• Yellow: Warning
• Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47).

(19) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"

This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar graph
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(20) Display of external setpoint

This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(21) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp

This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp generation
in the Ramp view (Page 339).

(22) Limit display for the setpoint

These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

(23) High and low scale range of bar graph

These values provide the high and low limit values of the bargraph.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

310 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

See also
Labeling of buttons and text (Page 239)

2.3.10 FM controllers standard view (step controller without position feedback)

Standard view without position feedback of FM controllers

X_

X^
X
XY
Y
X]
X\ Z
[

X[ \
Z
XZ
XY
X_
]
XX
^
XW
`
_

(1) Display and switch the operating mode

This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
• Manual mode (Page 81)
• Automatic mode (Page 81)
• Program mode for controllers (Page 87)
• Out of service (Page 79)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) for information on
switching the operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 311
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification

This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
• By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
• By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) chapter for information
on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 138) chapter.

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status

This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status

This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 296) chapter for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) Operating and displaying the actuating signal

This area shows the current feedback of the actuating signal.
• "Open"
• "Stop"
• "Close"
The button is shown next to the display in manual mode. You can influence the actuating signal
here. Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) chapter for more
on this.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons and
text (Page 239)

(7) Display of the limit stop value including signal status

This area shows the limit stop signal with the corresponding signal status.
• "Open"
• "Closed"

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

312 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons and
text (Page 239)

(8) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 72) Display
area for block states.

(9) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 66).

(10) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Internal error"
• "Invalid Signal"

(11) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
• "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
• "Tracking FB"
• "Tracking FM"
• "Safety mode FM"
• "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

Note
"Ramp active" indication is not available for FMCont and FMTemp blocks in the Standard view.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 313
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(12) Limit display

These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
• Red: Alarm
• Yellow: Warning
• Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47).

(13) Bar graph for the "Process value"

This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(14) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"

This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar graph
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(15) Display of external setpoint

This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(16) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp

This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp generation
in the Ramp view (Page 339).

(17) Limit display for the setpoint

These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

(18) High and low scale range of bar graph

These values provide the high and low limit values of the bargraph.

See also
Opening additional faceplates (Page 238)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

314 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.11 Interlock blocks standard view

Interlock blocks standard view Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16

The number of the displayed input values depends on the interlock block you have selected.
The operation and functions are identical for all interlock blocks and do not depend on the
number of input values.
The Intlk16 interlock block has two additional buttons for switching between the input values
1 to 8 and 9 to 16.









 




 


(1), (9) Switching between the input values 1 to 8 and 9 to 16 (for Intlk16 only)
The buttons (1) or (9) are displayed depending on the view you are in. These buttons are only
available for the Intlk16 block.
The Intlk16 block provides two views:
• When you are in the first view, the input values 1 to 8 are available in the area (12). The button
(9) is displayed. You switch to the second view by clicking on the button (9).
• When you are in the second view, the input values 9 to 16 are available in the area (12). The
button (1) is displayed. You switch back to the first view by clicking on the button (1).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 315
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) Status of the output signal of the interlock block

This area (2) shows the status of the output signal of the interlock block (priority from high to
low). You can configure the logic in the engineering system (ES).

Logic
Color of the field AND OR
Gray Block is not used (only for display in the faceplate,
interlock logic still enabled), set using
the NotUsed = 1 parameter
Blue Excluded (bypass)
Yellow Simulated
Red Interlocked
Green Not interlocked

(3) Exclude input values

You can use the button (3) to exclude input values from processing. Depending on the previous
settings, you can "Set" or "Reset" this property.
If the input value has been excluded, the following symbol appears in the field (8):

For more information on the operation, refer to the section Switching operating states and
operating modes (Page 294).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "high-level operating permission".

Note
Operator permissions via OS_Perm do not depend on the Feature.Bit5 setting. You can find
additional information in section Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 170).

(4) "First in" status display

The following symbol is displayed next to an input value, if this input value has caused the last
output signal change from 1 to 0 (good state to locked):

You can reset the first-in (initial) signal with the button (10).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "process control" operating permission.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

316 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

You can find additional information on this in the section Recording the first signal for interlock
blocks (Page 60).
For more information on the operation, refer to the section Switching operating states and
operating modes (Page 294).

(5) Open faceplate of the output value

When you press the button (5), you can open the faceplate associated with the output value. The
function of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES). See also
the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.

(6) Status of the block output

The line color indicates the status of the block output:

Color of the line Output status

Green Output is enabled
White Output is disabled

(7) Display the status for further processing

The symbol shows the status for further processing of the input values:

Icon Further processing

The input value is processed further with value 1.

The input value is processed further with value 0.

The input value is excluded from further processing.

(8) Display of input values (BOOL) with signal status (in front of the field)
These fields show the interlock information associated with the analog value (13) with a signal
status:
• 1 = "Good" state
• 0 = "Locked"

Changing the display

You can change the displays for 0 and 1 in the CFC in the object properties of the Interlock block:
• Navigate to the I/Os (object properties).
• Change the default for the input parameters (Inxx) in the Text 0 and Text 1 columns to what
you later want to see in runtime.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 317
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(9) Switching input values

Read point (1) for this.

(10) "Reset" the settings for further processing

When you press the button (10), you can "Reset" all input values:
• "Reset exclusions": the exclusions of the input values are reset.
• "Reset first-in": First-in detection / status display (4) is reset.
You can find additional information on this in the section Recording the first signal for interlock
blocks (Page 60).

(11) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 238).

(12) Displaying analog input values

The interconnected analog input values (AVxx) are displayed in this area. Set a unit of measure
(AVxx_Unit as shown in the picture with [Unit]) for each input in the engineering system (ES).

Changing the display

You can change the displays in the CFC in the object properties of the Interlock block:
• Navigate to the I/Os (object properties).
• In the “OS additional text” column, change the default setting for the input parameter
(INxx) to what you want to see during runtime later.
• In the "Identifier" column, change the default setting for the input parameter (AVxx) to what
you want to see during runtime later.
• The text is used as a label and is therefore always displayed, in other words, it is independent
of the signal status of the corresponding AVxxx input.
• The font size is reduced during the runtime if the input text length is greater than the label
width.

Note
If a text is added to the "OS additional text" field of the input parameter (INxx), this text will be
displayed even if the "Identifier" text field of the input parameter (AVxx) is not empty. If the "OS
additional text" field of the input parameter (INxx) is empty, the "Identifier" text of the input
parameter (AVxx) is displayed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

318 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The number of input values may vary depending on the selected interlock block:
• Intlk02: the input values 1 and 2 are available.
• Intlk04: the input values 1 to 4 are available.
• Intlk08: the input values 1 to 8 are available.
• Intlk16: the input values 1 to 8 are available. The input values 9 to 16 become available by
pressing the button (9). You can find additional information on this topic in the description
for (1) and (9).

(13) Open faceplate of the input value

When you press the button (13), you can open the faceplate associated with each input value.
The function of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES). See
also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) for more on this.
The connected block is in bypass if the following small bypass symbol is displayed over the arrow
symbol:

This display can be used only if Feature2.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 164) is active. If additionally the input BypEn.Inx = 1, this
interlock input will be set in bypass.

(14) Display area for block states

This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
• "Internal error"

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 319
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.12 Parameter view of PID controllers

Parameter view of PID controllers

(1) "Enabled operation"

This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They depend
on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

320 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Settings"
You can activate the following functions for the controller in this area:
• "PID optimization": ☑ (OptimEn) With pushing the button “Start Controller Optimization” in
the tool “PCS7 PID-Tuner” a controller optimization will be activated.
• "SP := PV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from manual mode to automatic mode
• "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of the setpoint for setpoint switchover from
"external" to "internal". The internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.
– With the PIDConR block, this area is only visible if you have set the Feature bit Switching
operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 156) to 1.

(3) "Parameters"
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the controller. Refer to
the Changing values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
• "Gain": Proportional gain
• "P in feedforw path" : Proportional action to the feedback path (0 to 1),
– 0 = Proportional action is completely in the feedback path
– 1 = Proportional action is completely in the feedforward path
(only with PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
• "Integral time": Integral action time in [s]
• "Derivative time TD": Derivative action time in [s]
• "Derivative gain": Gain of the derivative action
• "D in feedback path": Derivative action is moved to the feedback path (only with PIDConL,
PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
• "Dead band": Width of dead band
Dead band is temporarily disabled
• "Control zone": Width of the control zone (only with PIDConL block)
• "Motor actuating time": Motor actuating time [s] (for PIDStepL block only)
• "Minimum pulse duration": Minimum pulse duration [s] (for PIDStepL block only)
• "Minimum break duration": Minimum break duration [s] (for PIDStepL block only)

(4) “Delay factor” (only for PIDConL and PIDConR)

In this area, you can change the following parameters:
• "ER H alarm": Delay factor at the positive setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AH_Lim.
• "ER L alarm": Delay factor at the negative setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AL_Lim.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 321
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(5) "Service"
You can select the following functions in this area:
• "Bypass" (only with PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
• "Simulation"
• "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
• Bypassing signals (Page 117) (for PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
• Simulating signals (Page 66)
• Release for maintenance (Page 72)

(6) Navigation button for the GainSched block

You can use this navigation button to reach the GainSched block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 238).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

322 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.13 Parameter view of FM controllers

Parameter view of FM controllers

(1) "Enabled operations"

This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 323
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Settings"
You can activate the following functions for the controller in this area:
• "SP := PV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from manual mode to automatic mode
• "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of the setpoint for setpoint switchover from
"external" to "internal" The internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.

(3) "Parameters"
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the controller. Refer to
the Changing values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
• "Gain": Proportional gain
• "Integral time" Integral action time in [s]
• "Derivative time TD": Derivative action time in [s]
• "Derivative gain": Gain of the derivative action
• "Dead band": Width of dead band
• "Control zone": Width of the control zone (for block FmTemp only)
• "Motor actuating time": Motor actuating time [s]
• "Minimum pulse duration": Minimum pulse duration [s]
• "Minimum break duration": Minimum break duration [s]

(4) "Service"
You can activate the following functions in this area:
• "Simulation"
• "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
• Simulating signals (Page 66)
• Release for maintenance (Page 72)

(5) Navigation button for the GainSched block

You can use this navigation button to reach the GainSched block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 238)
section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

324 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.14 Parameter view for motors and valves

Parameter view for motors and valves

The following parameter view applies to the following bocks:
• MotL - Motor (Large) (Page 1382)
• MotRevL - Reversible motor (Page 1447)
• MotS - Motor (Small) (Page 1421)
• MotSpdL - Two-speed motor (Page 1566)
• VlvL - Valve (Large) (Page 1703)
• VlvS - Valve (small) (Page 1740)

Parameter view for MotL, MotRevL, MotS, MotSpdL, VlvL and VlvS with Feature.Bit13 = 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 325
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Parameter view for MotL, MotRevL, MotS, MotSpdL, VlvL and VlvS with Feature.Bit13 = 1.

(1) "Enabled operation"

This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They depend
on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) "Monitoring"
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the motor. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
• "Control": Monitoring time during startup and shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
• "Control stop": Monitoring time during shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
only for MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL and MotS with Feature.Bit13 = 1
• "Control start": Monitoring time during startup of the motor (dynamic)
only for MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL and MotS with Feature.Bit13 = 1
"End position": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)
• "Status": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)
The state is not displayed for small blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

326 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Enabling "Monitoring"
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 106).

(3) "Service"
You can select the following functions in this area:
• "Simulation"
• "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 294) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
• Simulating signals (Page 66)
• Release for maintenance (Page 72)

See also
Description of VlvS (Page 1740)

2.3.15 Limit view of FM controllers

Limit view of FM controllers

Several values are set in this view by default:
• Process value limits
• Error signal limits
• Readback value limits
• Setpoint operation range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Take into consideration
the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 327
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

 

(1) "Enabled operation"

This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They depend
on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

328 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Process value limits (PV)"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H alarm": Alarm high
• "H warning": Warning high
• "H tolerance": Tolerance high
• "Hysteresis"
• "L tolerance": Tolerance low
• "L warning": Warning low
• "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) "Error signal limits (ER)"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the control deviation. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H alarm": Alarm high
• "Hysteresis"
• "L alarm": Alarm low

(4) "Readback value limits (RBK)"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H warning": Warning high
• "Hysteresis"
• "L warning": Warning low

(5) "Setpoint operation range (SP)"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the setpoint operation range. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H range": Range limit high
• "L range": Range limit low

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 329
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(6) "Manipulated variable operating range"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operation range. Refer to
the Changing values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H range": Range limit high
• "L range": Range limit low

(7) "Message suppression/delay"

Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in the
AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not suppressed
when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages can only be
output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 229).

(8) Suppressing messages

You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

2.3.16 Limit view of PID controllers

Limit view of PID controllers

Several values are set in this view by default:
• Process value limits
• Error signal limits
• Readback value limits
• Setpoint operation range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Take into consideration
the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

330 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

 

(1) "Enabled operation"

This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They depend
on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 331
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Process value limits (PV)"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H alarm": Alarm high
• "H warning": Warning high
• "H tolerance": Tolerance high (not with PIDConS)
• "Hysteresis"
• "L tolerance": Tolerance low (not with PIDConS)
• "L warning": Warning low
• "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) "Error signal limits (ER)" (not with PIDConS)

In this area, you can enter the limits for the control deviation. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H alarm": Alarm high
• "Hysteresis"
• "L alarm": Alarm low

(4) "Readback value limits (RBK)" (not with PIDConS)

In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H warning": Warning high
• "Hysteresis"
• "L warning": Warning low

(5) Setpoint operation range (SP)

In this area, you can enter the limits for the setpoint operation range. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H range": Range limit high
• "L range": Range limit low

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

332 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(6) Manipulated variable operating range

In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operation range. Refer to
the Changing values (Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H range": Range limit high
• "L range": Range limit low

(7) "Message suppression / delay"

Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in the
AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not suppressed
when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages can only be
output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 229).

(8) Suppress messages

You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

2.3.17 Limit view of motors

Limit view of motors

The limit view of motors is only available when an AV block has been interconnected to the
motor.
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Take into consideration
the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 47).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 333
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates




   

(1) High and low scale range for the additional value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the additional value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(2) Display of the additional value including signal status

This area shows the current additional value with the corresponding signal status.

(3) "Limits for the additional value"

In this area, you can enter the limits for the additional value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 296) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
• "H alarm": Alarm high
• "H warning": Warning high
• "H tolerance": Tolerance high
• Hysteresis
• "L tolerance": Tolerance low
• "L warning": Warning low
• "L alarm": Alarm low

(4) Bar graph for the additional value

This area shows you the current additional value in the form of a bar graph. You can also see the
high low limits of the bargraph's scale. The visible area in the bar graph depends on the
configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

334 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

You can find additional information about this in the Bar graph (Page 381) section.

(5) "Enabled operation"

This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They depend
on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The colored triangles indicate the specified limits (3) for the additional value.

(6) Message suppression / delay

Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in the
AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not suppressed
when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages can only be
output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 229).

(7) Suppress messages

You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 335
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.18 Preview of FM controllers

Preview of FM controllers
The preview shows you the parameters that you, as an OS operator, can control in the entire
block. You cannot control anything in this view, however.

(1) Preview area

This area shows you a preview for the following values:
• "SP external": currently applicable external setpoint
• "SP internal": currently applicable internal setpoint
• "Control deviation": Current Control deviation
• "Program mode": Specified value for program mode
• "Disturbance variable": additive value for feedforward control
• "Tracking FM": track a manipulated variable in the FM module (value is 1)
• "Tracking FB": Track manipulated variable at the block (value is 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

336 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

• "Tracking value": Effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated variable at block"
• "Safety mode": safety mode in the FM module (value is 1)
• "Safety value": effective manipulated variable for "Safety mode"

(2) "Enabled operations"

This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
• "Close": You can select the manipulated variable "Close". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more information about this in the
Section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 239).
• "Open": You can select the manipulated variable "Open". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more information about this in the
Section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 239).
• "Stop": You can select the manipulated variable "Stop". If text is configured for this command,
it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more information about this in the
Section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 239).
• "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
• "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
• "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
• "Change MV": You can change the manipulated variable.
• "Program mode": You can switch to program mode.
• "Automatic": You can switch to automatic mode.
• "Manual": You can switch to manual mode.
• "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
• "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
"OpStations"" block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 290).

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 337
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

See also the Opening additional faceplates (Page 238) section for more on this.

(4) Process value

This area displays the real process value (PV).

2.3.19 Preview of interlock blocks

Preview of interlock blocks

(1) Enabled operations

This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

338 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Symbols for enabled operations:

• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
• "Local operating permission": Use the <-- button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 290).

2.3.20 Ramp view

Ramp view

(1) "Enabled operations"

This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
• Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 339
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) Enable "gradient limit"

Use this check box to enable "gradient limit" for the setpoint. "Gradient limit" can be set
separately for positive or negative setpoint changes ("Gradient +" or "Gradient -"). Refer to
the Changing values (Page 296) section for more on this.
If there is a difference between target setpoint and currently effective setpoint, a blue "G" may
be displayed at the bar in standard view of FmCont, FmTemp, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
OpAnL and MotSpdCL with parameter assignment of SP_RateTarget (target setpoint for
gradient limit).

If there is a difference between the target manipulated variable and the currently effective
manipulated variable, an orange "G" may be displayed at the bar in the standard view of VlvAnl
with parameter assignment of MV_RateTarget (target manipulated variable for gradient
limit).

The gradient limitation includes the Ramp function (Page 133). You can set the ramp mode in
the following two ways:
• Gradient
• Duration [s]

(3) "Target setpoint"

In this area, you can set the type of ramp function for the setpoint.
You can set the time duration and the target setpoint. Refer to the Changing values (Page 296)
section for more on this.

(4) Enable "Ramp"

You can use this control to enable or disable the configured function in the ramp function for the
setpoint change.
You can only enable this when the setpoint specification is set to "Internal" in the standard view
of the block. The enable is only valid for one setpoint change and is subsequently disabled again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

340 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.21 Alarm view

Message view

(1) Toolbar
If the short-term archive list is selected, a new button appears in the toolbar:

You can use this button to toggle between the "History" and "Operator messages" views.
You must be registered with the "Higher process control" operating permission in order to export
and hide messages.
(2) Display area for alarms
For additional information about the alarm view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.
(3) "Hide messages" button
Messages can be displayed and/or hidden with this button. The view of this button changes
accordingly:

Show messages

Hide messages

"Higher process controlling" operating permission is required and manual hiding must be active.
You can find additional information in the manual "Process Control System PCS 7 Operator
Station".

2.3.22 Batch view

Batch view
This area shows a display of the batch that is currently running (Batchview).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 341
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

You can use the internal tag "@APLBatchEnable" to enable/disable the "Batch" button in the
toolbar.

Value of @APLBatchEnable Operating the "Batch" button in Icon of the "Batch" button in the
the toolbar toolbar
0 Disabled

1 Enabled





(1) "Enabled"
This area shows you if the block is enabled for operation via SIMATIC BATCH (BatchEn = 1).

(2) "Allocated"
This area shows if the block is currently in use by SIMATIC BATCH (Occupied = 1).

(3) "Batch name"

This area shows the name of the batch that is currently running (Batchname).

(4) "Batch ID"

This area shows the identification number of the batch that is currently running (BatchID).
The batch view is disabled if BatchID = 16#00000000.

(5) "Batch step"

This area shows the step number of the batch that is currently running (StepNo).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

342 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.23 Memo view

Memo view
You can leave temporary messages for other OS operators in this view. Messages are entered in
the text box, and saved and activated by selecting the check box in the lower right corner of the
faceplate.

 

(1) Entry field for "Notes"

(2) Activating the note
(3) Selection of NoteView documents (maximum of three .mht files)
(4) Open the selected file and click "OK" to open a new window displaying the selected file
(5) Diplays error message
Possible error messages:
• File not found: If the selected file is not avaialbe in the NoteView folder.
• File size exceeded: If the selected file is larger than the allowable limit (> 25 MB).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 343
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

• Invalid file format: If the file format is not .mht extension.

• File name length exceeded: If the file name exceeds more than 32 characters excluding file
extension .mht.

Note
• Files that are configured for NoteVew should be saved with UTF-8 encoding. This is applicable
to all the intermediate files also, before they are converted to .mht files.
• Jump instruction within the file in NoteView window will not work in the OS Client, Web
Server and Web Client.
• No permission levels are required for combo box and open button in the APL_Memo.PDL.
• Document - internal skip marks are not supported.

(1) Window Title: indicates the title of Window and name of the file opened as well.
(2) Indicates the loading status of the selected MHT document
(3) NoteView display area: displays content of the selected file.
Advised maximum size of the file is <= 25 MB for a smooth operation.

Note
• This window cannot be resized but it is movable.
• This window is not supported by the "screen composition" functionality.

All the .mht files (NoteView documents) should be placed in the "OS project path\Gracs
\NoteView". In case of a Multiproject, standard server(SSM) holds all .mht files and these files are
not available in the client. If SSM is not configured then files should be placed in local project
folder of client

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

344 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Error Handling
• If selected file is not found in the folder path, an error message is shown as “File not found”.
• If configured file format is other than .mht, an error message is shown as "Invalid file format".
• If selected file is more than 25 MB and if tried to open same, an error is shown as “File size
exceeds 25 MB”.
• If file name length exceeds 32 characters, an error is shown as "File name length exceeded
32 characters".
The next time the faceplate is opened or there is a process picture change, you can see in the
status bar of the block icon and the faceplate that there is a new message for you.
Clearing the check box deletes the indicators in the status bars.
The message is not deleted automatically.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 345
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.24 Trend view

Trend view

  

(1) Toolbar
(2) Display area for trends
(3) Status bar
(4) Button for switching between archive tags and online tags. The status bar shows if the trend
view is working with online data or archive data.
(5) Button for opening the "Scatter plot" window
(6) Button for “Automatic scaling”: This button enables automatic calculation of the range of
values. This change is temporary and will revert to original setting when the view is changed, or
the faceplate is reopened.
The Export button is only visible and operable with the "Higher-level process control" operating
permission.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

346 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

For additional information about the trend view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.

Configuration of the trend view

The trend view can be configured so that archive values are displayed immediately after
opening. A prerequisite for this is that archive variables exist. Proceed as follows:
• A "1" is attached at the block icon in the "TrendPictureName" property. A semicolon is used as
the separator to the name of the trend view.
Example: @pg_apl_trendPID_Statistic.pdl;1

Special considerations for controllers

You can select two different representations for the display area:

1. Detailed display (default setting):

Display area consisting of three coordinate systems:
• Setpoint trend, actual value trend;
• Manipulated variable, control performance index trend;
• Binary trend via automatic/manual, manipulated variable at high or low limit
Open the scatterplot diagram with the user button (number 2) in the toolbar. It shows a
coordinate system with the process value on the value axis and the manipulated variable or
position feedback on the X axis. A new value pair is entered into the coordinate system with each
cycle.
If you want to use the detail display, you need to enter the following in the block icon under
Trends in the WinCC Graphics Designer:
TrendPictureName = @pg_apl_trendPID_Statistic.pdl

2. Simple display:
Display area consisting of two coordinate systems:
• Setpoint trend, actual value trend;
• Manipulated variable;
If you want to use the simple display, you need to enter the following in the block icon under
Trends in the WinCC Graphics Designer:
TrendPictureName =@pg_apl_trendPID.pdl

Notes on step controllers with position feedback:

If you use a step controller with position feedback as the controller type, you need to enter the
following in the block icon under Trends in the WinCC Graphics Designer:
TrendConfiguration5 = *.MV#Value;...
TrendConfiguration6 = .RbkOut#Value;...

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 347
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The following applies to all other controller types (default setting):

TrendConfiguration5 = .MV#Value;...
TrendConfiguration6 = *.RbkOut#Value;...

2.3.25 AddOn View for function blocks

The AddOn view allows you to display an additional view from a connected block in an APL
faceplate. This view can either created by yourself or provided by a third-party vendor.
For example, additional values from a field device block connected with the MonAnL block can
be displayed in the faceplate.
Messages of the interconnected blocks are also displayed in the "Message" view of the APL
faceplate.

Note
Alarms for the device specific view can be displayed in message view of the block but there will
not be any indication in the overview or block icon.

Configuration:
• To create an additional view, a new picture must be created in the GraCS project directory
with the file name @PG_xxx_AddOn.pdl. Where xxx denotes "Blocktype" of the AddOn view.
For example, @PG_MyType_AddOn.pdl can be used for displaying an additional view of the
"Mytype" block.
• In the CFC, connect the input AddOn of the APL block with any output of the block whose
additional view is to be displayed.
After compiling and loading the OS and AS, the additional view in the APL faceplate is available.
Following are the blocks that support additional view:

AddOn view supported block family Function blocks

Monitoring block for analog values MonAnL
Motor and valve blocks MotSpdCL, VlvAnL

2.3.26 APL Operator Trend Control (AOTC)

Opening the AOTC window

Press and hold the Ctrl key and left-click the value on the block icon to open the AOTC window.
The first value is added to the Trend Control and the detailed information is displayed in the first
row of the overview area.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

348 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Adding values to the AOTC window

To add values to the AOTC window, press and hold the Ctrl key and left-click the value on the
block icon. The value is added to the Trend Control. You can add up to 8 values in the AOTC
window. The following colors are assigned to the trends in the sequence they are added:
1. Black (HTML code 000000)
2. Red (HTML code FF0000)
3. Green (HTML code 00FF00)
4. Blue (HTML code 0000FF)
5. Yellow (HTML code FFFF00)
6. Turkish (HTML code 00FFFF)
7. Pink (HTML code FF00FF)
8. Orange (HTML code FFA100)
If the value is an archived value, the value is displayed from the archive. If the value is not
archived, it is displayed as an online value. The default time range for the time axis is 1 minute.

Note
For the Web Navigator, when a new value is added, the Trend Control always displays only the
online value. You can switch to display the archived values through the buttons "Monday",
"Tuesday", and so on.

For information on adding additional values to the AOTC window, refer to (10) Adding
additional values.

Adding digital values to the AOTC window

To add digital values to the AOTC window, press and hold the Ctrl key and left-click the value on
the block icon. You can add digital values from the following blocks:

Family Blocks
Drives MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, MotS, VlvL, VlvS, Vlv2WayL, VlvAnL, VlvMotL,
VlvPosL
Operate OpDi01, OpTrig, OpDi03
Monitor MonDiL, MonDiS, MonDi08

Example: If you perform Ctrl key + left-click operation on the MotL block icon, the AOTC window
opens showing its current status taken from the parameter FbkRunOut.Value. After opening
the AOTC window, if you perform Ctrl key + left-click operation on any other block then the
parameter corresponding to that block is added to the AOTC window.
For information on adding additional values to the AOTC window, refer to (10) Adding
additional values.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 349
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The AOTC window

 
       




 

1. Title
2. Trend group description
3. Tag row
4. Time range selection
5. WinCC online trend control
6. Value axis
7. Toolbar of the trend window
8. Enabling/disabling a trend
9. Opening a faceplate
10.Adding additional values
11.Block comment
12.Enabling/disabling a value axis
13.Saving a trend group
14.Opening a separate message window
15.Printing screenshot of the AOTC window
16.Help button

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

350 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

17.Deleting a trend
18.Closing the AOTC window

(1) Title
The title displays the name of the AOTC. If the trend group is not saved, the default title "APL
Operator Trend Control" is displayed. If a saved trend group is opened, title displays the group
name.

(2) Trend group description

This field displays the description of the trend group if it is saved with a description otherwise it
is empty.

(3) Tag row

The tag row displays the following information about the trend added.
• Button to enable/disable the trend:
Click this button to enable or disable the trend. For more information, refer to the description
of (8) Enabling/disabling a trend.
• "Parameter name":
This field displays the name of the trend.
• Button to add additional values:
Click this button to add additional values to the corresponding parameter. For more
information, refer to the description of (10) Adding additional values.
• "Value":
This field displays the current value of the trend.
• "Signal status":
This field displays the signal status of the trend. The corresponding icon is displayed in case
the quality is not good that is the quality code is not 0x80. In case of good quality (quality
code 0x80), the text "Good" is displayed.
• "Unit":
This field displays the unit of the trend. Units are calculated only while adding a trend to the
AOTC window. If the unit of a trend changes after it has been added to the AOTC window, the
new unit will not be updated in the AOTC window. For example, if PV_Unit changes, the
trend must be removed and added again.
• Button to enable/disable the value axis:
Click this button to enable or disable the value axis. For more information, refer to the
description of (11) Enabling/disabling a value axis.
• "Low limit":
This field displays the low limit of the trend. The low limit is taken from the tag
"XX_OpScale#Low". If the tag is not present, the value is taken automatically by the Trend
control and low limit field displays "Auto".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 351
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

• "High limit":
This field displays the high limit of the trend. The high limit is taken from the tag
"XX_OpScale#High". If the tag is not present, the value is taken automatically by the Trend
Control and the high limit field displays "Auto".
• "Ruler value":
This field displays the ruler value of the trend where the ruler intersects with the trend in the
Trend Control.
• "Ruler time":
This field displays the ruler time of the trend where the ruler intersects with the trend in the
Trend Control.
• Button to delete the trend:
Click this button to delete the trend. For more information, refer to the description of (15)
Deleting a trend.

(4) Time range selection

This area provides the option to select the time range based on the weekdays for the archived
view and fixed time frame for the online view.
Press the buttons named "Monday" to "Sunday" to switch to the archive view for that day. For
example, if today is Tuesday and the "Tuesday" button is pressed, the archived values from today
will be displayed. If the "Sunday" button is pressed, the archived values from last Sunday will be
displayed. The time range is 24 hours. If the trend is not archived, no value will be displayed.
Press the "Start/stop" button from the trend toolbar to switch back to the online view.
Use the drop-down list in the time range selection area to change the time range of the time axis.
The following preconfigured time ranges are available:
• Hour/minute based
– 1 min
– 2 min
– 5 min
– 10 min
– 15 min
– 30 min
– 1h
– 2h
– 3h
– 5h
– 12 h
– 24 h
The following figure shows the AOTC window when the time range is selected to "10 min" from
the drop-down list in "Time range" section:

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

352 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

7LPHUDQJHVHWWRPLQ

(5) WinCC online trend control

The Trend Control displays the trends added to the AOTC window. Each trend added to the AOTC
window will appear in different color.
The following colors have been defined default for the 8 trends:
1. Black
2. Red
3. Green
4. Blue
5. Yellow
6. Turkish
7. Pink
8. Orange

(6) Value axis

Each trend is shown in a separate value axis, therefore there can be maximum of 8 value axis.
The value axis appears in the same color as the corresponding trend.

(7) Toolbar of the trend window

Use these button to operate the trend window.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 353
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

For more information, refer to WinCC Information System Online Help.

(8) Enabling/disabling a trend

Press these buttons to disabled or enabled trends.
If a trend is enabled, the corresponding button will be displayed in the same color as the value
trend.
If a trend is disabled, the corresponding button will be displayed in Grey color.
By default the trend added to the AOTC is enabled, therefore the corresponding button is visible
and appears in the the same color as the value trend.
When the button is pressed the first time, the corresponding trend is hidden from the Trend
Control. The color of the button changes to Grey. The corresponding tag row in the overview
area is hidden except the "Parameter name".
On pressing the button again, the corresponding trend is visible again in the Trend Control. The
color of the button changes to the same color as the value trend. The corresponding row of
values is visible again.

(9) Opening a related faceplate

Click the parameter name in the tag row to open the corresponding faceplate.

(10) Adding additional values

This button is used to configure values of a particular function block which is already configured
in the parameter list of the AOTC window. This button is visible only for the parameters which are
configured in the AOTC window.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

354 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Perform the following steps to configure additional values to the AOTC window:
1. Click the [+] button which is available in the right corner of a configured parameter. The
"Additional Values" window opens which displays a list of parameters of the corresponding
function block.

2. Select a value from the list and click OK to configure the selected value in the AOTC window.

Note
• You can select only one value at a time. Multiple selections are disabled.
• Additional value buttons are visible only if the number of trends configured is less than the
maximum number of trends allowed (8 values).
• Additional value buttons will be disabled if the configured values in the AOTC reaches its
maximum allowed limit.
• Unit of the parameter added from the "Additional Values" window will not be displayed.

(11) Block Comment

This section provides the name of the block selected corresponding to the selected parameter.

(12) Enabling/disabling a value axis

Click the button next to the I/O field of the unit to enable or disable the value axis. The value itself
will stay in the Trend Control, only the value axis will be hidden from the Trend Control.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 355
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(13) Saving and reopening a trend group

Saving a trend group:
1. Click the "Save" button to save the trend group. The "Save Trend Group" window appears to
save the trend group:

2. Enter the following details in the "Save Trend Group" window:

– Trend group name (maximum of 32 characters)
– Trend group description (maximum of 64 characters)
– Select the checkbox if you want to save the trend group as private. If the checkbox is not
selected (default), the trend group will be saved as public.
Saving trend group as private:
Saving trend group as private allows only the originator to open the trend again. Private
trends cannot be opened by other users. Public trends can be opened and modified by
every operator.
3. Press the "OK" button to save the trend group.
You can abort the operation by pressing the "Cancel" button. The dialog will close without
saving the name or description.
The "OK" button is enabled only if the trend group name is entered and the Enter key is
pressed. The trend group descitption is optional.
Once the trend group is saved, further changes made in that trend group from the AOTC window
will be saved automatically.
The trend group name should be different from the previously saved trend groups. You cannot
save the trend group again with the same name.
The following special characters are not allowed in the trend group name:
' ' (space character), '.', ',', ';', ':', '/', '=', '\t', '\\', '"', '<', '>', '{', '}', '[', ']', '|', '?', '*'

Opening a trend group:

Click the "Trend system" standard button at the bottom of the WinCC runtime window to open
a saved trend.

Opening trend groups in "Full screen display":

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

356 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The AOTC full screen display is used to display configured trend groups on a dedicated screen.
The AOTC full screen window has four quadrants which means you can display four different
trend groups at a time. This window is termed as “Quad trend window” or “Full screen display”.
Perform the following steps to display the trend groups in "Full screen display":
1. Click the AOTC full screen display button at the bottom of the WinCC runtime window.

The AOTC full screen display opens with four empty quadrants and with four buttons at the
bottom to select a saved trend group for each quadrant.

2. Click the "(open trend group)" button at the bottom of the AOTC full screen display for the
quadrant in which you want to display a particular trend group. A window opens with a list
of saved trend groups.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 357
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

3. Select a trend group from the list and click "Display" to load the trend group into the
corresponding quadrant.
4. Use all four buttons to load four different trend groups into the different quadrants of the full
screen display.

(14) Opening a separate message window

Press the "Messages" button to open a new message window which displays the messages for
the selected block types corresponding to the trends added in the AOTC window.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

358 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

In the online mode, only the actual messages (all active messages, acknowledged and
unacknowledged) will be displayed.
If you select a time range displaying values from the archive, the message window will display
all the messages within this time range.
Messages only from the enabled trend will be displayed. If a trend is enabled or disabled and the
message window is open, the corresponding messages will be displayed or not displayed
accordingly. Similarly if a trend is deleted, the corresponding messages will disappear from the
messages window.
If two or more trends of the same block type are added to the AOTC window, and one of them
is disabled, the corresponding messages will not be removed from message window. All the
trends should be disabled or deleted to remove the corresponding messages from the message
window.
Only one message window can be opened at a time. If one more AOTC window is opened and
you want to display the messages for the values in that window, the already opened message
view should be closed and opened again from the specific AOTC window.

(15) Printing screenshot of the AOTC window

Press the "Print" button to print the screenshot of the complete AOTC window. WinCC runtime
(also the Web Navigator) should be in full screen mode without scroll bar. As screenshot is taken
from the process picture visible in runtime, the AOTC window should be visible completely in the
runtime, otherwise the screenshot will show only the visible section of the AOTC faceplate.

(16) Help button

Click this button to open the AOTC chapter in the APL Operator Guide online help. You will find
detailed information about the AOTC window and its functionalities in this online help.

(17) Deleting a trend

Click the "X" button at the end of the row in the overview area to delete existing values.
The corresponding trend is removed from the Trend Control. In the overview area, the rows
below the deleted row are moved up and an empty row is added at the end.
New values are added to the first empty row.

(18) Closing the AOTC window

Click the "Close" button in the title bar to close the AOTC window.

Operator permissions
The operator permissions are similar to the existing online trend function.
The following fields are enabled only if the area authorization is available:
1. Delete buttons to delete trends.
2. Save button to open the pop-up window to save the trend group.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 359
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

3. Field to enter the trend group name in the pop-up window.

4. Field to enter the trend group description in the pop-up window.
5. Checkbox to select private trend group.
6. The "OK" button to save the trend in the pop-up window.

Note
The functions for example, disable/enable trend, disable/enable value axis, delete trend, open
message window, print AOTC screenshot, select private trend group, need no operation area or
quitting function. The feature "Save Trend Group" needs an operation area where only 3 step
operation is possible. It does not support 2 step operation.

2.3.27 Limit operation and display in the faceplate

Limit operation and display in the faceplate

The limit value view of the faceplate can be used to modify limits and the hysteresis if the
corresponding operating permission (higher process controlling) is available. The limits are
displayed graphically in the standard view of the faceplate.
If the limits are reached or exceeded, an alarm, warning or tolerance class message is triggered.
This is indicated graphically as follows:

Symbol Meaning
Alarm

Warning

Tolerance

Note
The text displayed at the labels for the limit fields in limit view depends on the setting of the PCS
7 message system.
If the “User-configured message classes (Page 47)” is activated then the displayed text is taken
from the “TextOp” property of the limit object else it is taken from property “AnaText”

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

360 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.28 Central color management

Central color management

As of version 8.1, the colors in the faceplates and block icons can be changed centrally via the
central color palette in WinCC. The central color palette is located in the "User interface and
design" tab of the project properties.
The following colors cannot be changed via the central color palette:
• The colors (except trend colors) of WinCC Alarm Control, WinCC Online Trend Control, WinCC
Ruler Control and WinCC Function Control.
• The window titles can only be changed by editing the Windows designs.
• The colors of check boxes cannot be changed.
• Alarm colors are changed via the PCS 7 message system.
• Trend colors are not automatically changed in the block icons in existing projects, because
these properties are changeable instance-specific and not in the update mechanisms for the
block icons.
The user can use the color range of 0-199; the APL color range begins with the color index 200.
Description of the APL color index:

Color index for block icons

The following color indexes can be created for block icons.

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
200 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Background: Back‐ BackgroundColor Block icons with
ground color analog values
201 1 0 DADADA Very light Background: Fill pattern BackgroundFillPattern‐ Block icons with
gray color Color analog values
202 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Tag display: Background TagBackColor All block icons with
color tag display
203 1 0 DADADA Very light Tag display: Fill pattern TagFillColor All block icons with
gray color tag display
204 1 0 919191 Dark gray Tag display: Border col‐ TagBorderColor All block icons with
or tag display
205 1 0 000000 Black Tag display: Font color TagFontColor All block icons with
tag display
206 1 0 00FFFA Pure cyan Tag highlight: Back‐ BlockIconHighlight‐ All block icons
ground color BackColor
207 1 0 5CC2BC Medium cy‐ Tag highlight: Fill pat‐ BlockIconHighlightFill‐ All block icons
an tern color Color
208 1 0 FFFFFF White Tag highlight: Font col‐ BlockIconHighlight‐ All block icons
or FontColor

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 361
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
209 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Display of high limit: LimitObjectHighBack‐ Block icons with
Background color Color display of the high
limit
210 1 0 DADADA Very light Display of high limit: Fill LimitObjectHighFill‐ Block icons with
gray pattern color Color display of the high
limit
211 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Display of the low limit: LimitObjectLowBack‐ Block icons with
Background color Color display of the low
limit
212 1 0 DADADA Very light Display of the low limit: LimitObjectLowFillCol‐ Block icons with
gray Fill pattern color or display of the low
limit
213 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Empty rectangle: Back‐ EmptyRectBackColor"1 Block icons with
ground color status bar
214 1 0 DADADA Very light Empty rectangle: Fill EmptyRectFillColor1 Block icons with
gray pattern color status bar
215 1 0 808080 Dark gray Empty rectangle: Bor‐ EmptyRectBorderCol‐ Block icons with
der color or1 status bar
216 1 0 FFFFFF White Process value: Back‐ Value1BackColorVal‐ Block icons with
ground color ue10BackColor analog value
217 1 0 000000 Black Process value: Font col‐ Value1FontColorVal‐ Block icons with
or ue10FontColor analog value
218 1 100 C0C0C0 None Setpoint: Background Value2BackColor Block icons with
(transpar‐ color analog value
ent)
219 1 0 0000FF Pure blue Setpoint: Font color Value2FontColor Block icons with
analog value
220 2 100 C0C0C0 None Changed variable: Back‐ Value3BackColor Block icons with
(transpar‐ ground color analog value
ent)
221 2 0 F24F00 Pure orange Changed variable: Font Value3FontColor Block icons with
color analog value
222 2 100 C0C0C0 None Read-back value: Back‐ Value3BackColor Val‐ Block icons with
(transpar‐ ground color ue4BackColor analog value
ent)
223 2 0 008080 Dark cyan Read-back value: Font Value3FontColor Val‐ Block icons with
color ue4FontColor analog value
224 2 100 B6B6B6 None Unit2, process value/ UnitBackColor, Block icons with
(transpar‐ setpoint: Background Unit1BackColor- analog value
ent) color Unit4BackColor
225 2 0 494949 Very dark Unit, process value/ UnitFontColor, Block icons with
gray setpoint: Font color Unit1FontColor- analog value
Unit4FontColor
226 2 100 B6B6B6 None Unit2, changed variable: Unit2BackColor Block icons with
(transpar‐ Background color analog value
ent)
227 2 0 494949 Very dark Unit, changed variable: Unit2FontColor Block icons with
gray Font color analog value

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

362 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
228 2 100 B6B6B6 None Unit2, read-back value: Unit1BackColor, Block icons with
(transpar‐ Background color Unit2BackColor analog value
ent)
229 2 0 494949 Very dark Unit, read-back value: Unit1FontColor, Block icons with
gray Font color Unit2FontColor analog value
230 2 0 6D6D6D Very dark "Not used" state: back‐ BackColorOn1 Interlock
gray ground color
231 2 0 919191 Dark gray "Not used" state: fill pat‐ FillColorOn1 Interlock
tern color
232 2 0 0000FF Pure blue "Bypassed" state: back‐ BackColorOn2 Interlock
ground color
233 2 0 00A2E8 Pure blue "Bypassed" state: fill pat‐ FillColorOn2 Interlock
tern color
234 2 0 E4D400 Pure yellow "Simulation" state: back‐ BackColorOn3 Interlock
ground color
235 2 0 FFFF00 Pure yellow "Simulation" state: fill FillColorOn3 Interlock
pattern color
236 2 0 00B500 Bright lime "Unlocked" state: back‐ BackColorOn4 Interlock
green ground color
237 2 0 00FF00 Pure lime "Unlocked" state: fill pat‐ FillColorOn4 Interlock
green tern color
238 2 0 E60000 Pure red "Locked" state: back‐ BackColorOn5 Interlock
ground color
239 2 0 FF0000 Pure red "Locked" state: fill pat‐ FillColorOn5 Interlock
tern color
240 3 0 00B500 Bright lime "On" state: Background BackColorOn, OnBack‐ Family counter /
green color Color MonDi08/ MonDiL‐
MonDiS (type 1
and 4) / OpDi03 /
ShrdResS/ Time‐
Trig/ TotalL
241 3 0 00FF00 Pure lime "On" state: Fill pattern FillColorOn, OnFillCol‐
green color or
242 3 0 00FF00 Pure lime "On" state: Background Value2BackColor OpDi01, OpTrig
green color
243 3 0 000000 Black "On" state: Font color Value2FontColor OpDi01, OpTrig
244 3 0 FFFFFF White "On" state: Background Value2BackColor MonDiL-MonDiS
color (types 2, 3 and 5)
245 3 0 000000 Black "On" state: Font color Value2FontColor MonDiL-MonDiS
(types 2, 3 and 5)
246 3 0 FFFFFF White "On" state: Font color FontColorOn MonDiL-MonDiS
(type 4)
247 3 0 B6B6B6 Gray "Off" state: Background BackColorOff, BackCo‐
color lorOn
248 3 0 DADADA Very light "Off" state: Fill pattern FillColorOff, FillColor‐
gray color On

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 363
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
249 3 0 DADADA Very light "Off" state: Background BackColorOff Family counter,
gray color MonDi08, TimeTrig
250 3 0 FFFFFF White "Off" state: Fill pattern FillColorOff Family counter,
color MonDi08, TimeTrig
251 3 0 FFFFFF White "Off" state: Background Value1BackColor MonDiLMonDiS
color (types 2, 3 and 5)
252 3 0 000000 Black "Off" state: Font color Value1FontColor MonDiLMonDiS
(types 2, 3 and 5)
253 3 0 000000 Black "Off" state: Font color FontColorOff MonDiLMonDiS
(type 4)
254 3 0 B6B6B6 Gray "Not used" state: Back‐ BackColorNA MonDi08
ground color
255 3 0 000000 Black "No operation" state: ForeColorValue OpStations
Font color
256 3 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Display of the selected Value2BackColor SelA16In
analog value: Back‐
ground color
257 3 0 6D6D6D Very dark Display of the selected Value2FontColor SelA16In
gray analog value: Font color
258 3 0 494949 Very dark ISO/DIN symbols: Line BorderColor
gray color
1
New property
2
Note: The pattern in the block icon must be changed to "single color" for the color to take effect.

Color indexes for faceplates

The following color indexes can be created for faceplates.

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
259 3 0 AFAFAF Gray View: Background color BackColor Views in all face‐
plates
260 4 0 DEDEDE Very light View: Fill pattern color FillColor Views in all face‐
gray plates
261 4 0 62ACAA Dark cyan Operating area: Back‐ BackColor Total operating
ground color area
262 4 0 AACFCD Gray cyan Operating area: Fill pat‐ FillColor Total operating
tern color area
263 4 0 000000 Black Title or label of operat‐ ForeColor All static texts in
ing area: Font color the operating area
264 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Slider operating area: BackColor, BackColor‐ Operating area
Background color Top, BackColorBottom, "@PG_APL_OA_An‐
ButtonColor, HighLi‐ alogwithli‐
mitColor, LowLimitCol‐ mits100.PDL"
or

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

364 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
265 4 0 FFFFFF White Slider operating area: BorderBackColor Operating area
Border background col‐ "@PG_APL_OA_An‐
or alogwithli‐
mits100.PDL"
266 4 0 000000 Black Slider operating area: BorderColor Operating area
Border color "@PG_APL_OA_An‐
alogwithli‐
mits100.PDL"
267 4 0 DADADA Very light Block comment: Fill pat‐ FillColor Header in all face‐
gray tern color plates
268 4 0 808080 Dark gray Block comment: Border BorderColor Header in all face‐
color plates
269 4 0 000000 Black Block comment: Font FontColor Header in all face‐
color plates
270 4 0 B6B6B6 Gray Empty rectangle over‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
view: Background color plates
271 4 0 DADADA Very light Empty rectangle over‐ FillColor Header in all face‐
gray view: Fill pattern color plates
272 4 0 808080 Dark gray Empty rectangle over‐ BorderColor Header in all face‐
view: Border color plates
273 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Group display overview: BackColor Header in all face‐
Background color plates [1]
274 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Toolbar button: Back‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
ground color plates
275 4 0 BABABA Gray Toolbar button: Fill pat‐ FillColor Header in all face‐
tern color plates
276 4 0 808080 Dark gray Toolbar button: Border BorderColor Header in all face‐
color plates
277 4 0 000000 Black Toolbar button: Font FontColor Header in all face‐
color plates [2]
278 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Header button[3]: Back‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
ground color plates
279 4 0 808080 Dark gray Toolbar button: Border BorderColor 8 Header in all face‐
color plates
280 5 0 000000 Black Title or label in views: TextFontColor, Font‐ Views with static
Font color Color, ForeColor, Left‐ text and APL ob‐
HandTextFontColor[4] jects with type
ID=17-20, 22-24,
27, 29, 64, 120,
130
281 5 0 AFAFAF Gray Button in views/operat‐ BackColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Background jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52
282 5 0 CECECE Light gray Button in views/operat‐ FillColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Fill pattern jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 365
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
283 5 0 808080 Dark gray Button in views/operat‐ BorderColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Border color jects with type
ID=30-34, 50-52
284 5 0 FFFFFF White Button in views/operat‐ BorderColorTop Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: 3D border col‐ jects with type
or ID=30-34, 50-52
285 5 0 808080 Dark gray Button in views/operat‐ BorderColorBottom Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: 3D shadow jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52
286 5 0 000000 Black Button in views/operat‐ ForeColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Font color jects with type
ID=30-34, 50-52
287 5 0 DADADA Very light Analog value enabled in EnabledBackColor, Views with I/O
gray views/operating areas: BackColor, BackCol‐ fields (also exten‐
Background color or_OK ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 130
288 5 0 FFFFFF White Analog value enabled in EnabledFillColor, Fill‐ Views with I/O
views/operating areas: Color, FillColor_OK fields (also exten‐
Fill pattern color ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 130
289 5 0 B6B6B6 Gray Analog value disabled DisabledBackColor, Views with I/O
in views/operating BackColor, BackCol‐ fields (also exten‐
areas: Background color or_OK ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 91¹³,92,130
290 5 0 DADADA Very light Analog value disabled DisabledFillColor, Fill‐ Views with I/O
gray in views/operating Color, FillColor_OK fields (also exten‐
areas: Fill pattern color ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 91¹³,92,130
291 5 0 000000 Black Analog value or unit in ValueFontColor, Fore‐ Views with I/O
views/operating areas: Color, ForeColor_OK fields (also exten‐
Font color ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=16, 20, 22-24,
27, 28-29, 91, 130
292 5 0 00B500 Bright lime Analog process value: LineColor, BorderColor Views with I/O
green Border color fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 24

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

366 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
293 5 0 0000FF Pure blue Analog setpoint: Border LineColor, BorderColor Views with I/O
color fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 28
294 5 0 D27A00 Bright or‐ Changed analog varia‐ LineColor, BorderColor Views with I/O
ange ble: Border color fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 24, 28
295 5 0 008582 Dark cyan Analog read-back value: LineColor, BorderColor Views with I/O
Border color fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20
296 5 0 808080 Dark gray Analog parameter/ LineColor, BorderColor Views with I/O
range value: border col‐ fields (also exten‐
or ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28, 90, 92, 130
297 5 0 000000 Black Analog limit (no alarm), LineColor, BorderColor In
input value, offset, gra‐ "@PG_CntOhSc_Li
dient: border color mit.PDL",
"@PG_Mo‐
nAnL_Stand‐
ard.PDL", "@PG_Ra‐
tio_Standard.PDL",
"@PG_To‐
talL_Stand‐
ard.PDL" APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 24, 28, 29
and HMIStaticText
298 5 0 808080 Dark gray Empty analog value dis‐ BorderColor Views with APL ob‐
plays jects with type
ID=21, 25, 26
299 5 0 00B500 Bright lime Binary value on: Back‐ OnBackColor, Views with APL ob‐
green ground color State1BackColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
300 6 0 00FF00 Pure lime Binary value on: Fill pat‐ OnFillColor, State1Fill‐ Views with APL ob‐
green tern color Color jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
301 6 0 FFFFFF White Binary value on: Font OnFontColor, Views with APL ob‐
color State1FontColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
302 6 0 FFFFFF White Binary value off: Back‐ OffBackColor, Views with APL ob‐
ground color State2BackColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 367
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
303 6 0 DADADA Very light Binary value off: Fill pat‐ OffFillColor, State2Fill‐ Views with APL ob‐
gray tern color Color jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
304 6 0 000000 Black Binary value off: Font OffFontColor, Views with APL ob‐
color State2FontColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
305 6 0 808080 Dark gray Binary value: Border col‐ BorderColor Views with APL ob‐
or jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
306 6 0 B6B6B6 Gray Binary value preview: BackColor Preview, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=14
307 6 0 DADADA Very light Binary value preview: FillColor Preview, APL ob‐
gray Fill pattern color jects with type
ID=14
308 6 0 000000 Black Binary value preview: FontColor Preview, APL ob‐
Font color jects with type
ID=14
309 6 0 808080 Dark gray Binary value preview: BorderColor Preview, APL ob‐
Border color jects with type
ID=14
310 6 0 00B500 Bright lime Status display "On" State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
green mode: background color State7BackColor objects with type
ID=11
311 6 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display "On" State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
green mode: fill pattern color State7FillColor objects with type
ID=11
312 6 0 FFFFFF White Status display "On" State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
mode: font color State7FontColor objects with type
ID=11
313 6 0 FFFFFF White Status display "Manual" State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
mode: background color State7BackColor objects with type
ID=11
314 6 0 CECECE Light gray Status display "Manual" State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
mode: fill pattern color State7FillColor objects with type
ID=11
315 6 0 000000 Black Status display "Manual" State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
mode: font color State7FontColor objects with type
ID=11
316 6 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display "Automat‐ State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
green ic" mode: background State7BackColor objects with type
color ID=11
317 6 0 008500 Dark lime Status display "Automat‐ State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
green ic" mode: fill pattern col‐ State7FillColor objects with type
or ID=11
318 6 0 FFFFFF White Status display "Automat‐ State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
ic" mode: font color State7FontColor objects with type
ID=11

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

368 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
319 6 0 00CECA Bright cyan Status display "Local" State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
mode: background color State7BackColor objects with type
ID=11
320 7 0 00FFFA Pure cyan Status display "Local" State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
mode: fill pattern color State7FillColor objects with type
ID=11
321 7 0 000000 Black Status display "Local" State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
mode: font color State7FontColor objects with type
ID=11
322 7 0 0000FF Pure blue Status display "Pro‐ State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
gramm MV/SP" mode: State7BackColor objects with type
background color ID=11
323 7 0 98BDFF Very light Status display "Pro‐ State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
blue gramm MV/SP" mode: State7FillColor objects with type
fill pattern color ID=11
324 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display "Pro‐ State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
gramm MV/SP" mode: State7FontColor objects with type
font color ID=11
325 7 0 919191 Dark gray Status display "Out of State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
service" mode: back‐ State7BackColor objects with type
ground color ID=11
326 7 0 CECECE Light gray Status display "Out of State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
service" mode: fill pat‐ State7FillColor objects with type
tern color ID=11
327 7 0 000000 Black Status display "Out of State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
service" mode: font col‐ State7FontColor objects with type
or ID=11
328 7 0 808080 Dark gray Status display operating BorderColor Standard view, APL
mode: Border color objects with type
ID=11
329 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1BackColor… Mostly standard/
command State7BackColor parameter view/
"Stop"/"Close"/"Off"/"Pau preview, APL ob‐
se"/"Cancel"/"Reques‐ jects with type
ted"/"No": background ID=10, 11, 15
color
330 7 0 DADADA Very light Status display control State1FillColor… Mostly standard/
gray command State7FillColor parameter view/
"Stop"/"Close"/"Off"/"Pau preview, APL ob‐
se"/"Cancel"/"Reques‐ jects with type
ted"/"No": fill pattern col‐ ID=10, 11, 15
or
331 7 0 000000 Black Status display control State1FontColor… Mostly standard/
command State7FontColor parameter view/
"Stop"/"Close"/"Off"/"Pau preview, APL ob‐
se"/"Cancel"/"Reques‐ jects with type
ted"/"No": font color ID=10, 11, 15

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 369
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
332 7 0 00B500 Bright lime Status display control State1BackColor… Mostly standard/
green command State7BackColor parameter view/
"Start"/"Open"/"On"/"Co preview, APL ob‐
ntinue"/"Ac‐ jects with type
tive"/"ready"/"Yes": back‐ ID=10, 11, 15, 19
ground color
333 7 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display control State1FillColor… Mostly standard/
green command State7FillColor parameter view/
"Start"/"Open"/"On"/"Co preview, APL ob‐
ntinue"/"Ac‐ jects with type
tive"/"ready"/"Yes": fill ID=10, 11, 15, 19
pattern color
334 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1FontColor… Mostly standard/
command State7FontColor parameter view/
"Start"/"Open"/"On"/"Co preview, APL ob‐
ntinue"/"Ac‐ jects with type
tive"/"ready"/"Yes": font ID=10, 11, 15, 19
color
335 7 0 FF0000 Pure red Status display control State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
command "Rapid stop": State7BackColor objects with type
background color ID=10, 15
336 7 0 FF8296 Very light Status display control State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
red command "Rapid stop": State7FillColor objects with type
fill pattern color ID=10, 15
337 7 0 000000 Black Status display control State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
command "Rapid stop": State7FontColor objects with type
font color ID=10, 15
338 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
command "Internal": State7BackColor objects with type
background color ID=11
339 7 0 CECECE Light gray Status display control State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
command "Internal": fill State7FillColor objects with type
pattern color ID=11
340 8 0 000000 Black Status display control State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
command "Internal": State7FontColor objects with type
font color ID=11
341 8 0 0000FF Pure blue Status display control State1BackColor… Standard view, APL
command "External": State7BackColor objects with type
background color ID=10, 11, 15
342 8 0 98BDFF Very light Status display control State1FillColor… Standard view, APL
blue command "External": fill State7FillColor objects with type
pattern color ID=10, 11, 15
343 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1FontColor… Standard view, APL
command "External": State7FontColor objects with type
font color ID=10, 11, 15
344 8 0 808080 Dark gray Status display control BorderColor Standard view, APL
command: Border color objects with type
ID=10, 11, 15

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

370 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
345 8 0 000000 Black Status display error BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard view,
("End position error", Color…State7BackCol‐ mostly APL objects
"Control error", "Invalid or with type ID=12
Signal", "Changeover er‐
ror", "Motor protection",
"Torque active", "Exter‐
nal error", "CPI invalid",
"Changeover error",
"Fluttering"): Back‐
ground color
346 8 0 919191 Dark gray Status display error FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard view,
("End position error", or… State7FillColor mostly APL objects
"Control error", "Invalid with type ID=12
Signal", "Changeover er‐
ror", "Motor protection",
"Torque active", "Exter‐
nal error", "CPI invalid",
"Changeover error",
"Fluttering"): Fill pattern
color
347 8 0 FFFF00 Pure yellow Status display error FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard view,
("End position error", Color…State7FontCol‐ mostly APL objects
"Control error", "Invalid or with type ID=12
Signal", "Changeover er‐
ror", "Motor protection",
"Torque active", "Exter‐
nal error", "CPI invalid",
"Changeover error",
"Fluttering"): Font color
348 8 0 919191 Dark gray Status display AS block BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard view,
state ("Forced", "Re‐ Color…State7BackCol‐ mostly APL objects
quest 0/1", "Tracking", or with type ID=12,
"Optimizing", "Output 13
…"[5], "Fuzzy...", "Safety
mode", "End", "Taring",
"Dribbling", "Paused",
"Off"[6], "… Trigger",
"Disabled", "SP/MV ramp
active"): Background
color
349 8 0 DADADA Very light Status display AS block FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard view,
gray state ("Forced", "Re‐ or… State7FillColor mostly APL objects
quest 0/1", "Tracking", with type ID=12,
"Optimizing", "Output 13
…"[7], "Fuzzy...", "Safety
mode", "End", "Taring",
"Dribbling", "Paused",
"Off"[8], "… Trigger",
"Disabled", "SP/MV ramp
active"): Fill pattern col‐
or

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 371
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
350 8 0 000000 Black Status display AS block FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard view,
state ("Forced", "Re‐ Color…State7FontCol‐ mostly APL objects
quest 0/1", "Tracking", or with type ID=12,
"Optimizing", "Output 13
…"[9], "Fuzzy...", "Safety
mode", "End", "Taring",
"Dribbling", "Paused",
"Off"[10], "… Trigger",
"Disabled", "SP/MV ramp
active"): Font color
351 8 0 FF0000 Pure red Status display alarm BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard view,
("Flow", "Underdosed", Color…State7BackCol‐ mostly APL objects
"Overdosed"): Back‐ or with type ID=12,
ground color 13
352 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display alarm FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard view,
("Flow", "Underdosed", or… State7FillColor mostly APL objects
"Overdosed"): Fill pat‐ with type ID=12,
tern color 13
353 8 0 000000 Black Status display alarm FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard view,
("Flow", "Underdosed", Color…State7FontCol‐ mostly APL objects
"Overdosed"): Font color or with type ID=12,
13
354 8 0 00B500 Dark lime Status display enabled BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard view,
green ("On"[11],"Enabled","… Color…State7BackCol‐ mostly APL objects
dosing"): Background or with type ID=12,
color 13, 15
355 8 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display enabled FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard view,
green ("On"[12],"Enabled","… or… State7FillColor mostly APL objects
dosing"): Fill pattern col‐ with type ID=12,
or 13, 15
356 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display enabled FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard view,
("On"[13],"Enabled","… Color…State7FontCol‐ mostly APL objects
dosing"): Font color or with type ID=12,
13, 15
357 8 0 DADADA Very light Status display disabled BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard view,
gray ("Off"[14]): Background Color…State7BackCol‐ mostly APL objects
color or with type ID=12,
13, 15
358 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display disabled FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard view,
("Off"): Fill pattern color or… State7FillColor mostly APL objects
with type ID=12,
13, 15
359 8 0 000000 Black Status display disabled FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard view,
("Off"): Font color Color…State7FontCol‐ mostly APL objects
or with type ID=12,
13, 15

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

372 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
360 9 0 FFFA00 Pure yellow Status display impor‐ BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard/parame‐
tant AS block informa‐ Color…State7BackCol‐ ter view, mostly
tion ("Simulation", or APL objects with
"Process excitation", type ID=12, 13
"Time delay"): Back‐
ground color
361 9 0 FFFFFF White Status display impor‐ FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard/parame‐
tant AS block informa‐ or… State7FillColor ter view, mostly
tion ("Simulation", APL objects with
"Process excitation", type ID=12, 13
"Time delay"): Fill pat‐
tern color
362 9 0 000000 Black Status display impor‐ FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard/parame‐
tant AS block informa‐ Color…State7FontCol‐ ter view, mostly
tion ("Simulation", or APL objects with
"Process excitation", type ID=12, 13
"Time delay"): Font color
363 9 0 0000FF Pure blue Status display mainte‐ BackColor, State1Back‐ Standard view,
nance ("Maintenance"): Color…State7BackCol‐ mostly APL objects
Background color or with type ID=12,
13
364 9 0 96BBFF Very light Status display mainte‐ FillColor, State1FillCol‐ Standard view,
blue nance ("Maintenance"): or… State7FillColor mostly APL objects
Fill pattern color with type ID=12,
13
365 9 0 000000 Black Status display mainte‐ FontColor, State1Font‐ Standard view,
nance ("Maintenance"): Color…State7FontCol‐ mostly APL objects
Font color or with type ID=12,
13
366 9 0 808080 Dark gray Status display error, ..., BorderColor Standard view /
Maintenance: Border preview, mostly
color APL objects with
type ID=11-13, 15
367 9 0 DADADA Very light Interlock, display of in‐ BackColor Standard view in‐
gray put values (BOOL): terlock, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=100
368 9 0 CECECE Light gray Interlock, display of in‐ FillColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): Fill terlock, APL ob‐
pattern color jects with type
ID=100
369 9 0 000000 Black Interlock, display of in‐ FontColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): Font terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=100
370 9 0 808080 Dark gray Interlock, display of in‐ BorderColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): Bor‐ terlock, APL ob‐
der color jects with type
ID=100

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 373
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
371 9 0 919191 Dark gray Interlock, display of in‐ SeparatorBackColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): terlock, APL ob‐
Background color sepa‐ jects with type
rator ID=100
372 9 0 00FF00 Pure lime Interlock, status "1" for SetBackColor Standard view in‐
green further processing: terlock, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=101
373 9 0 00B500 Dark lime Interlock, status "1" for SetFillColor Standard view in‐
green further processing: Fill terlock, APL ob‐
pattern color jects with type
ID=101
374 9 0 FFFFFF White Interlock, status "0" for ResetBackColor Standard view in‐
further processing: terlock, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=101
375 9 0 B6B6B6 Gray Interlock, status "0" for ResetFillColor Standard view in‐
further processing: Fill terlock, APL ob‐
pattern color jects with type
ID=101
376 9 0 0000FF Pure blue Interlock, status "By‐ BypassBackColor Standard view in‐
passed" (excluded) for terlock, APL ob‐
further processing: jects with type
Background color ID=101
377 9 0 00A2E8 Pure blue Interlock, status "By‐ BypassFillColor Standard view in‐
passed" (excluded) for terlock, APL ob‐
further processing: Fill jects with type
pattern color ID=101
378 9 0 FFFFFF White Interlock, status for fur‐ ForeColor Standard view in‐
ther processing: Font terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=101
379 9 0 6D6D6D Very dark Interlock, status for fur‐ BorderColor Standard view in‐
gray ther processing: Border terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=101
380 10 0 B6B6B6 Gray Interlock, "Not used" sta‐ Set5BackColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Background color ID=103
381 10 0 DADADA Very light Interlock, "Not used" sta‐ Set5FillColor Standard view in‐
gray tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Fill pattern color ID=103
382 10 0 0000FF Pure blue Interlock, "Not used" sta‐ Set4BackColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Background color ID=103

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

374 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
383 10 0 00A2E8 Pure blue Interlock, "Not used" sta‐ Set4FillColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Fill pattern color ID=103
384 10 0 E4D400 Pure yellow Interlock, "Simulation" Set2BackColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Background color ID=103
385 10 0 FFFF00 Pure yellow Interlock, "Simulation" Set2FillColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Fill pattern color ID=103
386 10 0 00B500 Bright lime Interlock, "Unlocked" Set1BackColor Standard view in‐
green status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Background color ID=103
387 10 0 00FF00 Pure lime Interlock, "Unlocked" Set1FillColor Standard view in‐
green status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Fill pattern color ID=103
388 10 0 E60000 Pure red Interlock, "Locked" sta‐ Set3BackColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Background color ID=103
389 10 0 FF0000 Pure red Interlock, "Locked" sta‐ Set3FillColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Fill pattern color ID=103
390 10 0 000000 Black Interlock, status of the ForeColor Standard view in‐
output signal of the in‐ terlock, APL ob‐
terlock block: Font color jects with type
ID=103
391 10 0 919191 Dark gray Interlock, status of the BorderColor Standard view in‐
output signal of the in‐ terlock, APL ob‐
terlock block: Border jects with type
color ID=103
392 10 0 850082 Dark ma‐ Interlock, "First signal" BackColor Standard view in‐
genta status display: Back‐ terlock, APL ob‐
ground color jects with type
ID=102
393 10 0 CD51FF Light purple Interlock, "First signal" FillColor Standard view in‐
status display: Fill pat‐ terlock, APL ob‐
tern color jects with type
ID=102
394 10 0 808080 Dark gray Interlock, "First signal" BorderColor Standard view in‐
status display: Border terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=102

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 375
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
395 10 0 00B500 Bright lime Interlock, "Unlocked" OnStateColor Standard view in‐
green status of the block out‐ terlock, APL ob‐
put: Line color jects with type
ID=104
396 10 0 FFFFFF White Interlock, "Locked" sta‐ OffStateColor Standard view in‐
tus of the block output: terlock, APL ob‐
Line color jects with type
ID=104
397 10 0 B6B6B6 Gray Interlock, block rectan‐ BackgroundColor Standard view in‐
gle: Background color terlock, HMIRec‐
tangle
398 10 0 DADADA Very light Interlock, block rectan‐ FillPatternColor Standard view in‐
gray gle: Fill pattern color terlock, HMIRec‐
tangle
399 10 0 919191 Dark gray Interlock, block rectan‐ BorderColor Standard view in‐
gle: Border color terlock, HMIRec‐
tangle
400 11 0 00B500 Bright lime Bar chart, analog proc‐ ValueColor Standard/setpoint
green ess value: Background view, APL objects
color with type ID=71
401 11 0 00FF00 Pure lime Bar chart, analog proc‐ ValueFillColor Standard/setpoint
green ess value: Fill pattern view, APL objects
color with type ID=71
402 11 0 0000FF Pure blue Bar chart, analog set‐ ValueColor, FontColor Standard/setpoint
point: Background col‐ view, APL objects
or, foreground color with type ID=70,
80, 81
403 11 0 98BDFF Very light Bar chart, analog set‐ ValueFillColor Standard/setpoint
blue point: Fill pattern color view, APL objects
with type ID=70
404 11 0 D27A00 Bright or‐ Bar chart, changed ana‐ ValueColor, FontColor Standard view, APL
ange log variable: Back‐ objects with type
ground color, fore‐ ID=72, 82, 83
ground color
405 11 0 FFC848 Light or‐ Bar chart, changed ana‐ ValueFillColor Standard view, APL
ange log variable: Fill pattern objects with type
color ID=72
406 11 0 008582 Dark cyan Bar chart, analog read- ValueColor Standard view, APL
back value: Background objects with type
color ID=71, 73
407 11 0 00CECA Bright cyan Bar chart, analog read- ValueFillColor Standard view, APL
back value: Fill pattern objects with type
color ID=71, 73
408 11 0 008582 Dark cyan Bar chart, predicted val‐ ValueColor Standard view, APL
ue: Background color objects with type
ID=75
409 11 0 00CECA Bright cyan Bar chart, predicted val‐ ValueFillColor Standard view, APL
ue: Fill pattern color objects with type
ID=75

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

376 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name] objects
cy
410 11 0 000000 Black Bar chart, message gra‐ ValueColor, AlarmCol‐ Standard view, APL
dient value or limit or, WarningColor objects with type
(without alarm): Back‐ ID=74 or 71[15]
ground color
411 11 0 6D6D6D Very dark Bar chart, gradient val‐ ValueFillColor Standard view, APL
gray ue: Fill pattern color objects with type
ID=74
412 11 0 808080 Dark gray Bar chart: Border color BorderColor Standard/setpoint
view, APL objects
with type ID=7075
413 11 0 62ACAA Mostly un‐ Selection rectangle op‐ BackgroundColor All views with oper‐
saturated eration: Background col‐ ation, HMIRectan‐
dark cyan or gle object name
"rect_selectionBor‐
der"
414 11 0 B1CFCD Gray cyan Selection rectangle op‐ FillColor All views with oper‐
eration: Fill pattern col‐ ation, HMIRectan‐
or gle object name
"rect_selectionBor‐
der"
415 11 0 808080 Dark gray Selection rectangle op‐ BorderColor All views with oper‐
eration: Border color ation, HMIRectan‐
gle object name
"rect_selectionBor‐
der"
416 11 0 808080 Dark gray Dividing line: Border col‐ BorderColor All views with di‐
or viding line, HMI‐
Line

[1] Note: Also types without messages have an empty group display
[2] Note: Only important for the "Next" button
[3] "Lock"/"Acknowledgement"/"Attach"/"Back to process picture" buttons; "Attach" button in the
operating area
[4] In the standard view Ratio
[5] Used in type ID = 17, 18, 120
[6] In the standard view DoseL
[7] In the standard view Ratio
[8] In the standard view DoseL
[9] In the standard view Ratio
[10] In the standard view DoseL
[11] In the standard view OpDi01, OpDi03, display the confirmation of the command
[12] In the standard view OpDi01, OpDi03, display the confirmation of the command
[13] Not used, only in @PCS7ElementsAPL.pdl
[14] In the standard view OpDi01, OpDi03, display the confirmation of the command

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 377
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

[15] In @PG_CntOhSc_Standard.PDL

Color indexes for trends

The following color indexes can be created for trends:

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
417 11 0 00CE00 Bright lime Actual value TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view
green Color12
418 11 0 0000FF Pure blue Setpoint TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view
Color12
419 11 0 E69100 Pure orange Changed variable TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view
Color12
420 12 0 008582 Dark cyan Read-back value TrendColor1 - 1Trend‐ Trend view
Color12
421 12 0 00CE00 Bright lime Controller, closed loop TrendColor8 Trend view control‐
green ler
422 12 0 000000 Black Controller, input for con‐ TrendColor7 Trend view control‐
trol performance index ler
(CPI)
423 12 0 000000 Black Controller, binary mes‐ TrendColor3, TrendCol‐ Trend view control‐
sage "violated"1 or4, TrendColor9, ler
TrendColor10
424 12 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Controller, control per‐ TrendColor1 Trend view ConPer‐
genta formance index (CPI) Mon
425 12 0 E69100 Pure orange Ratio, analog input "In" TrendColor1 Trend view Ratio
426 12 0 00FF00 Pure lime Ratio, input for process TrendColor2 Trend view Ratio
green variable "InPV"
427 12 0 0000FF Pure blue Ratio, process value of TrendColor3 Trend view Ratio
the secondary compo‐
nent "SecComPV"
428 12 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Ratio, output "Out" TrendColor4 Trend view Ratio
genta
429 12 0 FF0000 Pure red Ratio, current ratio "Ra‐ TrendColor5 Trend view Ratio
tioPV"
430 12 0 6D6D6D Very dark Ratio, applied ratio (Ra‐ TrendColor6 Trend view Ratio
gray tioInt or RatioExt) "Ra‐
tioOut"
431 12 0 009D00 Dark lime Dosing, dosing amount TrendColor3 Trend view Dosing
green
432 12 0 FF0000 Pure red Monitoring, gradient TrendColor2 Trend view Mo‐
value nAnL
433 12 0 E69100 Pure orange Monitoring, output 1 TrendColor1 Trend view Mon‐
Di08, MonDiL,
MonDiS
434 12 0 00CE00 Bright lime Monitoring, output 2 TrendColor2 Trend view Mon‐
green Di08

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

378 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
435 12 0 0000FF Pure blue Monitoring, output 3 TrendColor3 Trend view Mon‐
Di08
436 12 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Monitoring, output 4 TrendColor4 Trend view Mon‐
genta Di08
437 12 0 FF0000 Pure red Monitoring, output 5 TrendColor5 Trend view Mon‐
Di08
438 12 0 494949 Very dark Monitoring, output 6 TrendColor6 Trend view Mon‐
gray Di08
439 12 0 543500 Very dark Monitoring, output 7 TrendColor7 Trend view Mon‐
orange Di08
440 13 0 005400 Very dark Monitoring, output 8 TrendColor8 Trend view Mon‐
lime green Di08
441 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Monitoring, flutter val‐ TrendColor2 Trend view MonDiL
green ue
442 13 0 E69100 Pure orange Operation, binary out‐ TrendColor1 Operation, trend
put / binary output 1 view binary
443 13 0 494949 Very dark Operation, binary out‐ TrendColor2 Operation, trend
gray put 2 view binary
444 13 0 0000FF Pure blue Operation, binary out‐ TrendColor3 Operation, trend
put 3 view binary
445 13 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Operation, binary feed‐ TrendColor4 Operation, trend
genta back 1 view binary
446 13 0 FF0000 Pure red Operation, binary feed‐ TrendColor5 Operation, trend
back 2 view binary
447 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Operation, binary feed‐ TrendColor2, TrendCol‐ Operation, trend
green back / binary feedback 3 or6 view binary
448 13 0 0000FF Pure blue Actuators, valve control TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view Valve
output Color4, TrendColor6
449 13 0 000000 Black Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor1 Trend view Valve
back open
450 13 0 6D6D6D Very dark Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor2 Trend view Valve
gray back close
451 13 0 005400 Very dark Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor1, TrendCol‐ Trend view
lime green back or3, TrendColor5, Vlv2WayL
TrendColor7
452 13 0 E69100 Pure orange Actuators, open valve TrendColor1 Trend view
output VlvMotL
453 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Actuators, close valve TrendColor2 Trend view
green output VlvMotL
454 13 0 0000FF Pure blue Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor3 Trend view
back open VlvMotL
455 13 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor4 Trend view
genta back close VlvMotL
456 13 0 FF0000 Pure red Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor5 Trend view
back open VlvMotL
457 13 0 005400 Very dark Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor6 Trend view
lime green back close VlvMotL

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 379
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
458 13 0 E69100 Pure orange Actuators, motor start TrendColor1 Trend view
output MotL/MotS
459 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Actuators, motor feed‐ TrendColor2 Trend view
green back MotL/MotS
460 14 0 E69100 Pure orange Drives, motor start TrendColor1 Trend view
Speed1 / forward MotSpdL/MotRevL/
MotSpdCL
461 14 0 00CE00 Bright lime Drives, motor start TrendColor2 Trend view
green Speed2 / reverse MotSpdL/MotRevL/
MotSpdCL
462 14 0 0000FF Pure blue Drives, feedback TrendColor3 Trend view
Speed1 / forward MotSpdL/MotRevL
463 14 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Drives, feedback TrendColor4 Trend view
genta Speed2 / reverse MotSpdL/MotRevL
464 14 0 00FFFA Pure cyan Drives, feedback for‐ TrendColor3 Trend view
ward MotSpdCL
465 14 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Drives, feedback reverse TrendColor4 Trend view
genta MotSpdCL
466 14 0 E69100 Pure orange Count: Output TrendColor1 Trend view Counter
467 14 0 E69100 Pure orange Count / time: Unit on TrendColor1 CountOh / TimeTrig
468 14 0 005400 Very dark Count / time: Count type TrendColor7 CountOh / TimeTrig
lime green
469 14 0 E69100 Pure orange Count / time: Count type TrendColor1 Trend view
CntOhSc
470 14 0 00CE00 Bright lime Count / time: Unit on TrendColor2 Trend view
green CntOhSc
471 14 0 005400 Very dark Count: Service life TrendColor7 Trend view
lime green CntOhSc
472 14 0 6D6D6D Very dark Count: Count TrendColor8 Trend view
gray CntOhSc
473 14 0 0000FF Pure blue Statusdisplay operation State1BackColor Mostly In Parame‐
command - Release for ter view APL ob‐
Maintenance” (“Yes”): jects with Type‐
background color ID=11
474 14 0 FFFFFF White Statusdisplay operation State1FillColor Mostly In Parame‐
command - Release for ter view APL ob‐
Maintenance” (“Yes”): jects with Type‐
filling pattern color ID=11
475 14 0 FFFFFF White Statusdisplay operation State1FontColor Mostly In Parame‐
command -Release for ter view APL ob‐
Maintenance (“Yes”): jects with Type‐
font color ID=11
476 14 0 919191 Dark gray Statusdisplay (“Not State1BackColor… Mostly In ShrdResS
Ready”, “None”, “No”): State7BackColor Standard \Preview
background color view APL objects
with TypeID=11,19

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

380 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color Description Property(ies) [attrib‐ Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name ute name]
cy
477 14 0 DADADA Very light Statusdisplay (“Not State1FillColor… Mostly In ShrdResS
gray Ready”, “None”,”No”): State7FillColor Standard \Preview
filling pattern color view APL objects
with TypeID=11,19
478 14 0 000000 Black Statusdisplay (“Not State1FontColor… Mostly In ShrdResS
Ready”, “None”,”No”): State7FontColor Standard \Preview
font color view APL objects
with TypeID=11,19
479 14 0 757575 Gray Analog value in views FontColor Mostly In Standard
for high and low scale. \Limit view I/O
fields (also exten‐
ded)
1
For example, PIDConL "PV_ToleHi#Value", ".MV_HiAct#Value"
2
ModPreCon=@PG_APL_TrendMPC.PDL; MPC10x10=@PG_APL_TrendMPC_L.PDL

Note
If these colors were changed only via the OS project editor, the default values can be assigned
again.

2.3.29 Bar graph

Bar graph for the Process Value


D

E

(1) Bar graph for the "Process Value"

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 381
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. You can also see the high
low limits of the bar graph’s scale. The visible area in the bar graph depends on the
configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Note
The value displayed can be different for different blocks. For example, the Bar graph display other
than "Process Value" are as follows

Bar graph display other than "Process Value" are as follows:

Block name Value and Limits displayed Color

DoseL Current quantity
CntOhSc Current counts (Cnt and Time‐
Hours(h)).
CountOh Current count (TimeMin (min)).
CountScL Current count (Out).
TotalL Current sum value (Out). Orange
TimeTrig Amount of time(s) until the next
trigger
ConPerMon Current control performance in‐
dex (CPI)
MotL, MotRevL, Current additional value
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, (AV_Out) in the limit view for ad‐
VlvMotL, VlvPosL ditional value.
MotSpdCL Current readback value in the Cyan
standard view
PumpMon Electrical power Green
Mechanical power Yellow
Hydraulic power Cyan

(2) Limit display

• 2a: High limit display
• 2b: Low limit display
These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
• Red: Alarm
• Yellow: Warning
• Blue: Tolerance

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

382 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
• The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes.
• The limit triangles visibility depends on the configuration in engineering system (ES).
– If a limit is not enabled (e.g. PV_AH_En = 0 & Feature.Bit23 =0) then triangle for
corresponding limit (high alarm in this example) will not be visible.
– If a limit is not supported by a block, then the corresponding limit triangle is not displayed.
E.g. DoseL block only has Alarm high and Alarm low limits. So, limit triangles for Warning
and Tolerence will not be visible.
– For TotalL, CountOh and CountScL, in counting mode "count up", only the colored
triangles of the upper limits are visible; and in counting mode "count down", only the
colored triangles of the lower limits are visible.
– For MotSpdCL, only the warning high and low limit triangles for readback value are
displayed.
– For CntOhSc, only the high limit triangles are available for the following configured
limits in the respective bar graph:
Red: High limit 1
Yellow: High limit 2
– For ConPerMon, only the low limit triangles are available for the following configured
limits in the respective bar graph:
Red: Low alarm limit
Yellow: Low warning limit
For PumpMon, only the high and low limit triangles for Alarms and warnings for readback
value are displayed.

(3) Bargraph high scale

(4) Bargraph low scale

Bar graph for the "Gradient value"

D

E
 F

G

(1) Display of the gradient indicator

This display indicates the movement of the gradient up (↑) or down (↓).

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 383
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Gradient monitoring is displayed when the gradient value PV_Grad ≠ 0 and one of the following
monitoring functions is activated:
• Gradient monitoring for positive changes (GradHUpEn = 1)
• Gradient monitoring for negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1)
• Gradient monitoring (GradLEn = 1)
(2) Bar graph for the gradient
This area shows the current gradient value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
The bar graph is displayed when gradient monitoring is activated for positive (GradHUpEn = 1)
or negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1).
(3) Display of limits in the bar graph
This area shows you the specified limits.
The display only appears when the bar for the gradients is also displayed.
• 3a: Limit (high) for positive gradients (GradHUpLim)
• 3b, 3c: Limit (low) for positive and negative gradients (GradLLim)
• 3d: Limit (high) for negative gradients (GradHDnLim)

Bar graph for the "Setpoint value"

D

 


E

(1) Bar graph for the setpoint

This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. You can also see the high low
limits of the bargraph's scale. The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in
the engineering system (ES).

Note
For Ratio block, this area shows you the current value for the ratio (RatioOut).

(2) Limit display for the setpoint

These triangles show the setpoint limits configured in the ES.
• 2a: High limit for setpoint
• 2b: low limit for setpoint

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

384 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
For Ratio block, these blue triangles show the configured High and low range limits for the ratio.

(3) Display of external setpoint

This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".
(4) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp
This display [R] shows the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp and is only visible if you have
enabled ramp generation in the Ramp view (Page 339).
(5) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint gradient ramp
This display [G] shows the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp and is only visible if you have
enabled gradient ramp generation in the Ramp view (Page 339).

Bar graph for the "Manipulated value”

D      E

(1) Bar graph for the manipulated variable

This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. You can also see the
high and low limits of the bargraph's scale. The visible area in the bar graph depends on the
configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Note
For Ratio block this display graphically represents the output value, Out

(2) Limit display for the manipulated variable

These orange triangles show the limits configured in the ES.
• 2a: low limit for manipulated variable
• 2b: High limit for manipulated variable

Note
For Ratio block limits are for output value Out.

(3) Display of external manipulated variable

This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" manipulated variable
specification. It shows the external manipulated variable that would apply if you were to change
the manipulated variable specification to "External".

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 385
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(4) Display for the target manipulated variable of the manipulated variable ramp
This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp generation
in the Ramp view (Page 339).
(5) Display for the target manipulated variable of the manipulated variable gradient ramp
This display [G] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled gradient ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 339).
(6) Display of the manipulated variable for automatic mode
The display [A] is only visible when the block is not in automatic mode. In Automatic mode, it is
displayed when it needs to be reset or when tracking or forced tracking is enabled.
This display shows the manipulated variable that would apply if you were to switch to automatic
mode or if you were to reset in automatic mode or disable tracking or forced tracking.

Bar graph for the "Position Feedback”

D  E

D E

(1) Bar graph for position feedback

This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. You can also see the
high and low limits of the bargraph's scale. The visible area in the bar graph depends on the
configuration in the engineering system (ES).
(2) Limit display for the position feedback
These triangles show the limits configured in the ES.
• 2a. low limit for position feedback
• 2b. High limit for position feedback
The limit triangles can have different colors based on the type of limit:
• Red: Alarm
• Yellow: Warning
• Blue: Tolerance

Note
The limit triangles visibility depends on the configuration in engineering system (ES).
If a limit is not enabled (e.g. RbkWH_En= 0 & Feature.Bit31 =0 for PIDConL) then triangle
for corresponding limit (Warning high limit in this example) will not be visible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

386 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(3) The limits for the "open" and "close" positions (for VlvAnL)
• 3a: limits for the "close" position
• 3b: limits for the "open" position

2.3.30 Reset of errors during Request 0/1

“Request 0/1” is displayed in faceplate whenever there is a reset pending but reset from faceplate
is not possible.
The following table shows the various possibilities to reset the errors.

Mode OS_Perm.B Feature.B Feature.B Feature.B Feature2. Resetting of

it7 it30 it31 it9 Bit13 errors
Auto 0 0 0 0 0 Possible
1 1 0 0 0 by
RstLi.Val
ue
0 0 0 1 0 Possible by
1 1 0 1 0 two ways

1)
RstLi.Val
ue or
2) By Auto
Commands
Manual 0 1 1 0 0 Possible by
forced com‐
mands
0 0 1 0 0 Possible
by
RstLi.Val
ue
Local 0 0 0 0 1 Reset is pos‐
sible only via
Faceplate
hence not
recommen‐
ded to Re‐
move
the
OS_Perm.B
it7

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 387
Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

2.4.1 Overview of the "PCS 7 measuring point browser" window

Overview
The "PCS 7 measuring point browser" window displays all relevant status information of the APL
function blocks.

(1) "Selection of states"

This area displays all possible states of APL function blocks. All state icons are shown in their
respective status group frames. The group name is displayed in the tooltip when the mouse
pointer is hovered in the area between the state icon and the group frame. You can select/
deselect one or more states from any status group by clicking the icon. The status information
of the selected states is displayed in the status area.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

388 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC
 Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

The following states are displayed in this area:

Icon State Status group

Out of service Operating mode

On mode

Manual mode

Automatic mode

Program mode

Local mode

Internal setpoint Setpoint

External setpoint

Ramp active

Manipulated value Signal status

Bad, device-related

Bad, process-related

Uncertain, device-related

Uncertain, process-related

Maintenance request

In progress

Tracking Tracking, Forcing and Bypass

Forcing

Bypass

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC 389
Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

Icon State Status group

Interlock active Interlock

Interlock disabled

Rapid stop

Reset request

Active memo Memo

Locked messages Messages

Suppressed messages

Internal simulation Block status

Internal error

Group error

(2) "Selection of areas"

This area displays the top folders of the plant hierarchy. You can select/deselect one or more
areas. The status information from the selected areas is displayed in the status area.

(3) Status area

This area shows the list of blocks with their corresponding "Type", "State", and "Area" depending
on the "Selection of states" and "Selection of areas".

(4) Opening the faceplate

Double-click a row in the status area to open the corresponding faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.1 SP2)

390 Function Manual, 07/2022, A5E48022986-AC